OptiX OSN 6800 Hardware Description (V100R003)

Hardware Description

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformV100R003

Issue 01

Date 2007-12-25

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. Please feel free to contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial BaseBantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Product VersionOptiX OSN 6800/3800 V100R003

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2007. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

NoticeThe information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Issue 01 (2007-12-25) Commercial in Confidence Page 2 of 664

mailto:[email protected]

http://www.huawei.com/

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform V100R003


About This Document

AuthorPrepared by Xxxx xxxxx Date 2005-06-24

Reviewed by

Xxxxx xxxx Date 2005-06-26

Approved by

Xxxx xxxxx Date 2006-06-29

SummaryThis document provides information for xxxxx.

This document includes:

Chapter Details

Chapter 1 Cabinet This chapter describes the mechanical structure and technical specifications of the cabinet.

Chapter 2 Subrack This chapter describes the mechanical structure, technical specifications, and interfaces of the subrack.

Chapter 3 Frame This chapter describes the structure of the DCM frame and CRPC frame.

Chapter 4 Overview of boards This chapter describes the classification and appearance of boards.

Chapter 5 Optical Transponder Unit

This chapter describes the function and the working principle of optical transponder units.

Chapter 6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

This chapter describes the function and the working principle of tributary units and line unit.

Chapter 7 Cross-Connect Unit

This chapter describes the function and the working principle of cross-connect Units.




Chapter Details

Chapter 8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

This chapter describes the function and the working principle of optical multiplexer and demultiplexer units.

Chapter 9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

This chapter describes the function and the working principle of optical add and drop multiplexing units.

Chapter 10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

This chapter describes the function and the working principle of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing units.

Chapter 11 Optical Amplifying Unit

This chapter describes the function and the working principle of optical amplifier units.

Chapter 12 System Control and Communication Unit

This chapter describes the function and the working principle of system control and communication units.

Chapter 13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit

This chapter describes the function and the working principle of optical supervisory channel units.

Chapter 14 Optical Protection Unit

This chapter describes the function and the working principle of optical protection units.

Chapter 15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit

This chapter describes the function and the working principle of spectrum analyzer units.

Chapter 16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit

This chapter describes the function and the working principle of variable optical attenuator units.

Chapter 17 Dispersion Compensation Board

This chapter describes the function and the working principle of dispersion compensation board.

Chapter 18 Cables This chapter describes the cables of the OptiX OSN 6800.

Appendix A Indicators This chapter describes the indicators of the OptiX OSN 6800.

Appendix B Bar Code for Boards

This chapter describes the bar codes of the boards used in the OptiX OSN 6800.

Appendix C Parameter Description

This chapter describes the parameters of the boards used in the OptiX OSN 6800.

Appendix D Quick Reference Table of the Units

This chapter describes the basic function of the optical transponder units and the tributary and line unit and the specifications of the boards used in the OptiX OSN 6800.

Appendix E Power Consumption, Weight and Valid Slots of Boards

This chapter describes the power consumption, weight and slots of the boards used in the OptiX OSN 6800.




Chapter Details

Appendix F Glossary This appendix lists the terms that are used in this document.

Appendix G Acronyms and Abbreviations

This appendix lists the acronyms and abbreviations that are used in this document.

HistoryIssue

Details Date Author Approved by

01 Creation 2007-03-14 Xxx xxx Xxx xxxxxx




Contents

1 Cabinet...........................................................................................................................271.1 Cabinet Structure........................................................................................................................... 271.2 Configuration of the Integrated Cabinet.........................................................................................281.3 Specifications................................................................................................................................ 291.4 DC Power Distribution Box............................................................................................................29

2 Subrack..........................................................................................................................332.1 Structure........................................................................................................................................ 332.2 Slot Description............................................................................................................................. 352.3 Fan Area........................................................................................................................................ 382.4 PIU................................................................................................................................................ 40

2.4.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................402.4.2 Application............................................................................................................................ 412.4.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................412.4.4 Front Panel........................................................................................................................... 412.4.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................. 422.4.6 Specifications of the PIU.......................................................................................................42

2.5 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces......................................................422.5.1 Interfaces in the Interface Area.............................................................................................432.5.2 Interfaces on the Front Panel of the AUX Board...................................................................442.5.3 PIN Assignment of Interfaces................................................................................................46

3 Frame............................................................................................................................. 533.1 DCM Frame................................................................................................................................... 533.2 CRPC Frame................................................................................................................................. 54

4 Overview of Boards.......................................................................................................554.1 Board Appearance and Dimensions..............................................................................................55

4.1.1 Appearance and Dimensions................................................................................................554.1.2 Laser Safety Label................................................................................................................57

4.2 Bar Code for Boards...................................................................................................................... 584.2.1 Overview............................................................................................................................... 584.2.2 Characteristic Code..............................................................................................................59

4.3 Board Category............................................................................................................................. 59




5 Optical Transponder Unit.............................................................................................635.1 ECOM............................................................................................................................................ 63

5.1.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................635.1.2 Application............................................................................................................................ 635.1.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................645.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................655.1.5 Front Panel........................................................................................................................... 675.1.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................. 695.1.7 NM Configuration Reference................................................................................................695.1.8 Specifications of the ECOM..................................................................................................70

5.2 L4G................................................................................................................................................ 735.2.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................735.2.2 Application............................................................................................................................ 735.2.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................745.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................755.2.5 Front Panel........................................................................................................................... 775.2.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................. 795.2.7 Characteristic Code for the L4G...........................................................................................795.2.8 NM Configuration Reference................................................................................................795.2.9 Specifications of the L4G......................................................................................................80

5.3 LDGD............................................................................................................................................ 845.3.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................845.3.2 Application............................................................................................................................ 845.3.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................855.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................865.3.5 Front Panel........................................................................................................................... 885.3.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................. 905.3.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGD........................................................................................905.3.8 NM Configuration Reference................................................................................................915.3.9 Specifications of the LDGD...................................................................................................91

5.4 LDGS............................................................................................................................................. 965.4.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................965.4.2 Application............................................................................................................................ 965.4.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................965.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................975.4.5 Front Panel........................................................................................................................... 995.4.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................... 1015.4.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGS.......................................................................................1015.4.8 NM Configuration Reference..............................................................................................1015.4.9 Specifications of the LDGS.................................................................................................102

5.5 LOG............................................................................................................................................. 1065.5.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................106




5.5.2 Application.......................................................................................................................... 1065.5.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................1075.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................1085.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................1105.5.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................... 1125.5.7 Characteristic Code for the LOG.........................................................................................1125.5.8 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................1125.5.9 Specifications of the LOG...................................................................................................113

5.6 LOM............................................................................................................................................. 1185.6.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................1185.6.2 Application........................................................................................................................... 1185.6.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................1185.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................1205.6.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................... 1225.6.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................... 1235.6.7 Characteristic Code for the LOM........................................................................................1235.6.8 NM Configuration Reference..............................................................................................1245.6.9 Specifications of the LOM...................................................................................................125

5.7 LQMD.......................................................................................................................................... 1305.7.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................1305.7.2 Application.......................................................................................................................... 1305.7.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................1315.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................1335.7.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................... 1345.7.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................... 1365.7.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMD......................................................................................1365.7.8 NM Configuration Reference..............................................................................................1375.7.9 Specifications of the LQMD................................................................................................138

5.8 LQMS.......................................................................................................................................... 1435.8.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................1435.8.2 Application.......................................................................................................................... 1445.8.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................1445.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................1465.8.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................... 1475.8.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................... 1495.8.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMS......................................................................................1495.8.8 NM Configuration Reference..............................................................................................1495.8.9 Specifications of the LQMS.................................................................................................150

5.9 LSX.............................................................................................................................................. 1565.9.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................1565.9.2 Application.......................................................................................................................... 1565.9.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................157




5.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................1585.9.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................... 1605.9.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................... 1615.9.7 Characteristic Code for the LSX.........................................................................................1615.9.8 NM Configuration Reference..............................................................................................1615.9.9 Specifications of the LSX....................................................................................................162

5.10 LSXL.......................................................................................................................................... 1675.10.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................1675.10.2 Application........................................................................................................................ 1675.10.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................1675.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................1695.10.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................... 1705.10.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................... 1715.10.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXL......................................................................................1715.10.8 NM Configuration Reference............................................................................................1725.10.9 Specifications of the LSXL................................................................................................172

5.11 LSXLR....................................................................................................................................... 1755.11.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................1755.11.2 Application......................................................................................................................... 1755.11.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................1755.11.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................1765.11.5 Front Panel........................................................................................................................ 1775.11.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................... 1795.11.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXLR...................................................................................1795.11.8 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................1795.11.9 Specifications of the LSXLR..............................................................................................180

5.12 LSXR......................................................................................................................................... 1815.12.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................1815.12.2 Application........................................................................................................................ 1815.12.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................1825.12.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................1835.12.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................... 1845.12.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................... 1865.12.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXR.....................................................................................1865.12.8 NM Configuration Reference............................................................................................1865.12.9 Specifications of the LSXR...............................................................................................187

5.13 LWX2......................................................................................................................................... 1905.13.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................1905.13.2 Application........................................................................................................................ 1905.13.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................1905.13.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................1915.13.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................... 193




5.13.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................... 1945.13.7 Characteristic Code for the LWX2.....................................................................................1945.13.8 NM Configuration Reference............................................................................................1955.13.9 Specifications of the LWX2...............................................................................................196

5.14 LWXD........................................................................................................................................ 2025.14.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................2025.14.2 Application........................................................................................................................ 2025.14.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................2025.14.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................2035.14.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................... 2055.14.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................... 2065.14.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXD....................................................................................2065.14.8 NM Configuration Reference............................................................................................2075.14.9 Specifications of the LWXD...............................................................................................208

5.15 LWXS........................................................................................................................................ 2145.15.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................2145.15.2 Application........................................................................................................................ 2145.15.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................2145.15.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................2155.15.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................... 2175.15.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................... 2185.15.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXS....................................................................................2185.15.8 NM Configuration Reference............................................................................................2185.15.9 Specifications of the LWXS...............................................................................................219

5.16 TMX........................................................................................................................................... 2255.16.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................2255.16.2 Application........................................................................................................................ 2255.16.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................2255.16.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................2275.16.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................... 2285.16.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................... 2295.16.7 Characteristic Code for the TMX.......................................................................................2295.16.8 NM Configuration Reference............................................................................................2295.16.9 Specifications of the TMX.................................................................................................230

6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit.......................................................................................2376.1 NS2............................................................................................................................................. 237

6.1.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................2376.1.2 Application.......................................................................................................................... 2376.1.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................2376.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................2396.1.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................... 240




6.1.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................... 2426.1.7 Characteristic Code for the NS2.........................................................................................2426.1.8 NM Configuration Reference..............................................................................................2426.1.9 Specifications of the NS2....................................................................................................243

6.2 TBE............................................................................................................................................. 2466.2.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................2466.2.2 Application.......................................................................................................................... 2466.2.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................2476.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................2496.2.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................... 2516.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................... 2536.2.7 NM Configuration Reference..............................................................................................2536.2.8 Specifications of the TBE....................................................................................................254

6.3 TDG............................................................................................................................................. 2586.3.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................2586.3.2 Application.......................................................................................................................... 2586.3.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................2586.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................2596.3.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................... 2606.3.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................... 2626.3.7 NM Configuration Reference..............................................................................................2626.3.8 Specifications of the TDG...................................................................................................263

6.4 TDX............................................................................................................................................. 2656.4.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................2656.4.2 Application.......................................................................................................................... 2656.4.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................2666.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................2676.4.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................... 2686.4.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................... 2706.4.7 NM Configuration Reference..............................................................................................2706.4.8 Specifications of the TDX....................................................................................................271

6.5 TQM............................................................................................................................................ 2726.5.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................2726.5.2 Application.......................................................................................................................... 2726.5.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................2736.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................2746.5.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................... 2756.5.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................... 2776.5.7 NM Configuration Reference..............................................................................................2776.5.8 Specifications of the TQM...................................................................................................278

6.6 TQS............................................................................................................................................. 2826.6.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................282




6.6.2 Application.......................................................................................................................... 2826.6.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................2826.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................2836.6.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................... 2846.6.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................... 2866.6.7 NM Configuration Reference..............................................................................................2866.6.8 Specifications of the TQS...................................................................................................287

7 Cross-connect Unit.....................................................................................................2917.1 XCS............................................................................................................................................. 291

7.1.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................2917.1.2 Application.......................................................................................................................... 2917.1.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................2917.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................2927.1.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................... 2937.1.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................... 2947.1.7 Specifications of the XCS...................................................................................................294

8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit..............................................................2958.1 D40.............................................................................................................................................. 295

8.1.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................2958.1.2 Application.......................................................................................................................... 2958.1.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................2958.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................2968.1.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................... 2978.1.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................... 3018.1.7 Characteristic Code for the D40..........................................................................................3018.1.8 NM Configuration Reference..............................................................................................3028.1.9 Specifications of the D40....................................................................................................302

8.2 D40V........................................................................................................................................... 3038.2.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................3038.2.2 Application.......................................................................................................................... 3038.2.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................3048.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................3048.2.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................... 3058.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................... 3098.2.7 Characteristic Code for the D40V.......................................................................................3098.2.8 NM Configuration Reference..............................................................................................3098.2.9 Specifications of the D40V..................................................................................................310

8.3 FIU............................................................................................................................................... 3118.3.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................3118.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................... 3118.3.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................312




8.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................3128.3.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................... 3148.3.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................... 3158.3.7 Characteristic Code for the FIU..........................................................................................3158.3.8 NM Configuration Reference..............................................................................................3168.3.9 Specifications of the FIU.....................................................................................................316

8.4 ITL............................................................................................................................................... 3178.4.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................3178.4.2 Application.......................................................................................................................... 3178.4.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................3188.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................3188.4.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................... 3198.4.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................... 3218.4.7 Characteristic Code for the ITL...........................................................................................3218.4.8 NM Configuration Reference..............................................................................................3228.4.9 Specifications of the ITL......................................................................................................322

8.5 M40............................................................................................................................................. 3238.5.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................3238.5.2 Application.......................................................................................................................... 3238.5.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................3248.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................3248.5.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................... 3258.5.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................... 3298.5.7 Characteristic Code for the M40.........................................................................................3298.5.8 NM Configuration Reference..............................................................................................3298.5.9 Specifications of the M40....................................................................................................330

8.6 M40V........................................................................................................................................... 3318.6.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................3318.6.2 Application.......................................................................................................................... 3318.6.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................3318.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................3328.6.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................... 3338.6.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................... 3378.6.7 Characteristic Code for the M40V.......................................................................................3378.6.8 NM Configuration Reference..............................................................................................3378.6.9 Specifications of the M40V.................................................................................................338

9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit....................................................................3419.1 CMR2.......................................................................................................................................... 341

9.1.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................3419.1.2 Application.......................................................................................................................... 3419.1.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................341




9.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................3429.1.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................... 3429.1.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................... 3449.1.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR2......................................................................................3449.1.8 NM Configuration Reference..............................................................................................3459.1.9 Specifications of the CMR2.................................................................................................345

9.2 CMR4.......................................................................................................................................... 3479.2.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................3479.2.2 Application.......................................................................................................................... 3479.2.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................3479.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................3489.2.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................... 3489.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................... 3509.2.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR4......................................................................................3509.2.8 NM Configuration Reference..............................................................................................3519.2.9 Specifications of the CMR4.................................................................................................352

9.3 DMR1.......................................................................................................................................... 3539.3.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................3539.3.2 Application.......................................................................................................................... 3539.3.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................3549.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................3549.3.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................... 3559.3.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................... 3579.3.7 NM Configuration Reference..............................................................................................3579.3.8 Specifications...................................................................................................................... 358

9.4 MR2............................................................................................................................................. 3599.4.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................3599.4.2 Application.......................................................................................................................... 3599.4.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................3599.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................3609.4.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................... 3609.4.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................... 3629.4.7 Characteristic Code for the MR2.........................................................................................3629.4.8 NM Configuration Reference..............................................................................................3639.4.9 Specifications of the MR2...................................................................................................363

9.5 MR4............................................................................................................................................. 3649.5.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................3649.5.2 Application.......................................................................................................................... 3649.5.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................3659.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................3659.5.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................... 3669.5.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................... 368




9.5.7 Characteristic Code for of MR4...........................................................................................3689.5.8 NM Configuration Reference..............................................................................................3699.5.9 Specifications of the MR4...................................................................................................369

9.6 MR8............................................................................................................................................. 3719.6.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................3719.6.2 Application.......................................................................................................................... 3719.6.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................3719.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................3729.6.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................... 3729.6.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................... 3749.6.7 Characteristic Code for the MR8.........................................................................................3749.6.8 NM Configuration Reference..............................................................................................3759.6.9 Specifications of the MR8...................................................................................................376

9.7 SBM2........................................................................................................................................... 3779.7.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................3779.7.2 Application.......................................................................................................................... 3779.7.3 Functions and Features......................................................................................................3789.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................3789.7.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................... 3799.7.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................... 3819.7.7 NM Configuration Reference..............................................................................................3819.7.8 Specifications of the SBM2.................................................................................................382

10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit.......................................38310.1 RMU9........................................................................................................................................ 383

10.1.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................38310.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................ 38310.1.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................38410.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................38510.1.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................... 38610.1.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................... 38810.1.7 NM Configuration Reference............................................................................................38810.1.8 Specifications of the RMU9...............................................................................................389

10.2 ROAM........................................................................................................................................ 39010.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................39010.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................ 39010.2.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................39110.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................39210.2.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................... 39310.2.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................... 39610.2.7 NM Configuration Reference............................................................................................39610.2.8 Specifications of the ROAM..............................................................................................397




10.3 WSD9........................................................................................................................................ 39810.3.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................39810.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................ 39910.3.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................40010.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................40110.3.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................... 40210.3.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................... 40410.3.7 NM Configuration Reference............................................................................................40410.3.8 Specifications of the WSD9..............................................................................................405

10.4 WSM9........................................................................................................................................ 40710.4.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................40710.4.2 Application........................................................................................................................ 40810.4.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................40810.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................40910.4.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................... 41010.4.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................... 41210.4.7 NM Configuration Reference............................................................................................41310.4.8 Specifications of the WSM9..............................................................................................413

10.5 WSMD4..................................................................................................................................... 41510.5.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................41510.5.2 Application........................................................................................................................ 41510.5.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................41610.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................41610.5.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................... 41810.5.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................... 41910.5.7 NM Configuration Reference............................................................................................42010.5.8 Specifications of the WSMD4...........................................................................................421

11 Optical Amplifying Unit.............................................................................................42311.1 CRPC........................................................................................................................................ 423

11.1.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................42311.1.2 Application......................................................................................................................... 42311.1.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................42411.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................42411.1.5 Front Panel........................................................................................................................ 42511.1.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................... 42611.1.7 Dip Switch and Jumper.....................................................................................................42711.1.8 Characteristic Code for of CRPC......................................................................................42811.1.9 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................42811.1.10 Specifications of the CRPC.............................................................................................428

11.2 HBA........................................................................................................................................... 42911.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................429




11.2.2 Application......................................................................................................................... 42911.2.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................43011.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................43111.2.5 Front Panel........................................................................................................................ 43111.2.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................... 43311.2.7 Characteristic Code for the HBA.......................................................................................43311.2.8 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................43411.2.9 Specifications of the HBA..................................................................................................435

11.3 OAU1......................................................................................................................................... 43611.3.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................43611.3.2 Application......................................................................................................................... 43611.3.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................43611.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................43711.3.5 Front Panel........................................................................................................................ 43811.3.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................... 44011.3.7 Characteristic Code for the OAU1.....................................................................................44011.3.8 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................44111.3.9 Specifications of the OAU1...............................................................................................441

11.4 OBU1......................................................................................................................................... 44311.4.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................44311.4.2 Application......................................................................................................................... 44311.4.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................44311.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................44411.4.5 Front Panel........................................................................................................................ 44511.4.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................... 44711.4.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU1.....................................................................................44711.4.8 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................44811.4.9 Specifications of the OBU1...............................................................................................448

11.5 OBU2......................................................................................................................................... 45011.5.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................45011.5.2 Application......................................................................................................................... 45011.5.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................45011.5.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................45111.5.5 Front Panel........................................................................................................................ 45211.5.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................... 45411.5.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU2.....................................................................................45411.5.8 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................45511.5.9 Specifications of the OBU2...............................................................................................455

12 System Control and Communication Unit..............................................................45712.1 SCC........................................................................................................................................... 457

12.1.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................457




12.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................ 45712.1.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................45712.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................45812.1.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................... 45912.1.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................... 46112.1.7 DIP Switch and Jumper....................................................................................................46112.1.8 Specifications of the SCC.................................................................................................461

12.2 AUX........................................................................................................................................... 46212.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................46212.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................ 46212.2.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................46212.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................46212.2.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................... 46312.2.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................... 46512.2.7 DIP Switch and Jumper....................................................................................................46512.2.8 Specifications of the AUX..................................................................................................465

13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit...........................................................................46713.1 SC1........................................................................................................................................... 467

13.1.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................46713.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................ 46713.1.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................46813.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................46813.1.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................... 46913.1.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................... 47113.1.7 NM Configuration Reference............................................................................................47113.1.8 Specifications of the SC1..................................................................................................472

13.2 SC2........................................................................................................................................... 47213.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................47213.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................ 47213.2.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................47313.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................47413.2.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................... 47513.2.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................... 47613.2.7 NM Configuration Reference............................................................................................47613.2.8 Specifications of the SC2..................................................................................................477

14 Optical Protection Unit.............................................................................................47914.1 DCP........................................................................................................................................... 479

14.1.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................47914.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................ 47914.1.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................48014.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................481




14.1.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................... 48314.1.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................... 48614.1.7 NM Configuration Reference............................................................................................48614.1.8 Specifications of the DCP.................................................................................................487

14.2 OLP........................................................................................................................................... 48814.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................48814.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................ 48814.2.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................48914.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................48914.2.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................... 49114.2.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................... 49314.2.7 NM Configuration Reference............................................................................................49314.2.8 Specifications of the OLP..................................................................................................494

14.3 SCS........................................................................................................................................... 49514.3.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................49514.3.2 Application........................................................................................................................ 49514.3.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................49614.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................49614.3.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................... 49714.3.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................... 49914.3.7 NM Configuration Reference............................................................................................49914.3.8 Specifications of the SCS.................................................................................................500

15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit............................................................................................50115.1 MCA4........................................................................................................................................ 501

15.1.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................50115.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................ 50115.1.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................50115.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................50215.1.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................... 50315.1.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................... 50415.1.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA4....................................................................................50415.1.8 NM Configuration Reference............................................................................................50515.1.9 Specifications of the MCA4...............................................................................................505

15.2 MCA8........................................................................................................................................ 50615.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................50615.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................ 50615.2.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................50615.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................50715.2.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................... 50815.2.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................... 50915.2.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA8....................................................................................509




15.2.8 NM Configuration Reference............................................................................................51015.2.9 Specifications of the MCA8...............................................................................................510

15.3 WMU.......................................................................................................................................... 51115.3.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................51115.3.2 Application.........................................................................................................................51115.3.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................51215.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................51215.3.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................... 51315.3.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................... 51515.3.7 NM Configuration Reference............................................................................................51515.3.8 Specifications of the WMU................................................................................................515

16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit..............................................................................51716.1 VA1............................................................................................................................................ 517

16.1.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................51716.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................ 51716.1.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................51816.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................51816.1.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................... 51916.1.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................... 52116.1.7 Characteristic Code for the VA1........................................................................................52116.1.8 NM Configuration Reference............................................................................................52116.1.9 Specifications of the VA1..................................................................................................522

16.2 VA4............................................................................................................................................ 52316.2.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................52316.2.2 Application........................................................................................................................ 52316.2.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................52416.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................52416.2.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................... 52516.2.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................... 52716.2.7 Characteristic Code for the VA4........................................................................................52716.2.8 NM Configuration Reference............................................................................................52716.2.9 Specifications of the VA4..................................................................................................528

17 Dispersion Compensation Unit................................................................................53117.1 DCU........................................................................................................................................... 531

17.1.1 Version Description...........................................................................................................53117.1.2 Application........................................................................................................................ 53117.1.3 Functions and Features....................................................................................................53217.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................53217.1.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................... 53317.1.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................... 53417.1.7 Characteristic Code for the DCU.......................................................................................534




17.1.8 NM Configuration Reference............................................................................................53417.1.9 Specifications of the DCU.................................................................................................535

18 Cables.........................................................................................................................53718.1 Power Cables and Grounding Cables.......................................................................................537

18.1.1 Cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND Power Cables......................................................................53718.1.2 Subrack Power Cables.....................................................................................................540

18.2 Optical Fibers............................................................................................................................ 54118.2.1 Classification..................................................................................................................... 54118.2.2 Connectors....................................................................................................................... 542

18.3 Grounding Cables...................................................................................................................... 54418.3.1 Cabinet Door Grounding Cables.......................................................................................54418.3.2 PDU Grounding Cable......................................................................................................544

18.4 Alarm Cables............................................................................................................................. 54518.4.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable....................................................................................................54518.4.2 Alarm Interface Cable.......................................................................................................54718.4.3 Alarm Concatenating/Inter-Subrack Concatenating Cable................................................548

18.5 Management Cables................................................................................................................. 55018.5.1 OAM Serial Port Cable......................................................................................................550

A Indicators.....................................................................................................................553A.1 Cabinet Indicators....................................................................................................................... 553A.2 Subrack Indicator........................................................................................................................ 553A.3 Board Indicators.......................................................................................................................... 554A.4 Fan Indicator............................................................................................................................... 556A.5 PIU Indicator............................................................................................................................... 557

B Bar Code for Boards...................................................................................................559B.1 Overview..................................................................................................................................... 559B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.....................................................................................................560

B.2.1 Characteristic Code for DWDM OTUs................................................................................560B.2.2 Characteristic Code for DWDM Wavelength-Tunable OTUs..............................................562B.2.3 Characteristic Code for CWDM OTUs................................................................................562

B.3 Characteristic Code for Line Unit................................................................................................563B.4 Characteristic Code for FOADMs................................................................................................563

B.4.1 Characteristic Code for the CMR2......................................................................................563B.4.2 Characteristic Code for the CMR4......................................................................................564B.4.3 Characteristic Code for the MR2........................................................................................564B.4.4 Characteristic Code for of MR4..........................................................................................565B.4.5 Characteristic Code for the MR8........................................................................................565

B.5 Characteristic Code for MCAs.....................................................................................................566B.5.1 Characteristic Code for the MCA4......................................................................................566B.5.2 Characteristic Code for the MCA8......................................................................................566

B.6 Characteristic Code for OAUs.....................................................................................................567




B.6.1 Characteristic Code for the OAU1......................................................................................567B.6.2 Characteristic Code for the OBU1......................................................................................567B.6.3 Characteristic Code for of CRPC........................................................................................568

B.7 Characteristic Code for Optical MUX/DMUX Units......................................................................568B.7.1 Characteristic Code for the D40.........................................................................................568B.7.2 Characteristic Code for the D40V.......................................................................................569B.7.3 Characteristic Code for the FIU..........................................................................................569B.7.4 Characteristic Code for the M40.........................................................................................570B.7.5 Characteristic Code for the M40V......................................................................................570

B.8 Characteristic Code for VOAs.....................................................................................................570B.8.1 Characteristic Code for the VA1.........................................................................................571B.8.2 Characteristic Code for the VA4.........................................................................................571

C Parameter Description...............................................................................................573C.1 Optical Transponder Units (OTUs), Tributary Units and Line Units.............................................573

C.1.1 Path Use Status................................................................................................................. 573C.1.2 Optical Interface Loopback.................................................................................................574C.1.3 Service Type....................................................................................................................... 575C.1.4 Client Service Bearer Rate (M)..........................................................................................576C.1.5 Port Mapping...................................................................................................................... 576C.1.6 Laser Status....................................................................................................................... 577C.1.7 Automatic Laser Shutdown.................................................................................................578C.1.8 Current Bearer Rate (M).....................................................................................................578C.1.9 Service Mode..................................................................................................................... 579C.1.10 FEC Working State...........................................................................................................579C.1.11 FEC Type.......................................................................................................................... 580C.1.12 PAUSE Frame Flow Control.............................................................................................580C.1.13 Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)........................................581C.1.14 Configure Band Type........................................................................................................582C.1.15 Maximum Packet Length..................................................................................................582C.1.16 Ethernet Working Mode....................................................................................................583C.1.17 LPT Enabled..................................................................................................................... 583C.1.18 Path Loopback................................................................................................................. 584C.1.19 SD Trigger Condition........................................................................................................584C.1.20 FC Distance Extension.....................................................................................................585

C.2 Optical Multiplexing Units (MUXs) and Optical Demultiplexing Units (DMUXs)..........................585C.2.1 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB).............................................................................585C.2.2 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)................................................................................586C.2.3 Configure Band.................................................................................................................. 586C.2.4 Configure Working Band Parity..........................................................................................587C.2.5 Actual Band........................................................................................................................ 587C.2.6 Actual Working Band Parity................................................................................................588




C.3 Optical Add/Drop Multiplexing Units (OADMs)............................................................................588C.3.1 Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz).........................588C.3.2 Configure Band Type..........................................................................................................589

C.4 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit (ROADMs)...........................................589C.4.1 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)................................................................................589C.4.2 Wavelength Target Power (dBm)........................................................................................590C.4.3 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB).............................................................................590C.4.4 Maximum Attenuation Ratio (dB)........................................................................................591C.4.5 Minimum Attenuation Ratio (dB).........................................................................................591C.4.6 Configure Band.................................................................................................................. 591C.4.7 Configure Working Band Parity..........................................................................................592C.4.8 Actual Band........................................................................................................................ 592C.4.9 Actual Working Band Parity................................................................................................593

C.5 Optical Amplifier Units................................................................................................................. 593C.5.1 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)................................................................................593C.5.2 Laser Status....................................................................................................................... 594C.5.3 Gain (dB)............................................................................................................................ 594C.5.4 Nominal Gain (dB)..............................................................................................................595C.5.5 Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB)..................................................................................595C.5.6 Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB)..................................................................................596C.5.7 Rated Optical Power (dBm)................................................................................................596C.5.8 Board Work Type................................................................................................................597C.5.9 Configure Band.................................................................................................................. 597C.5.10 Configure Working Band Parity........................................................................................598C.5.11 Actual Band...................................................................................................................... 598C.5.12 Actual Working Band Parity..............................................................................................599

C.6 Optical Supervisory Channel Units (OSCs)................................................................................599C.6.1 Optical Interface Loopback.................................................................................................599C.6.2 Laser Status....................................................................................................................... 600

C.7 Optical Protection Units..............................................................................................................600C.7.1 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)................................................................................600C.7.2 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB).........................601C.7.3 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)...........................601

C.8 Spectrum Analyzer Units.............................................................................................................602C.8.1 Optical Monitoring..............................................................................................................602C.8.2 Monitor Interval (min).........................................................................................................603C.8.3 Wavelength Monitor Status................................................................................................603C.8.4 Configure Band.................................................................................................................. 604C.8.5 Configure Working Band Parity..........................................................................................604C.8.6 Actual Band........................................................................................................................ 605C.8.7 Actual Working Band Parity................................................................................................605

C.9 Variable Optical Attenuator Units (VOAs)....................................................................................606




C.9.1 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB).............................................................................606C.9.2 Maximum Attenuation Ratio (dB)........................................................................................606C.9.3 Minimum Attenuation Ratio (dB).........................................................................................607C.9.4 Path Use Status................................................................................................................. 607C.9.5 Configure Band.................................................................................................................. 608C.9.6 Configure Working Band Parity..........................................................................................608C.9.7 Actual Band........................................................................................................................ 609C.9.8 Actual Working Band Parity................................................................................................609C.9.9 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)................................................................................610

D Quick Reference Table of the Units...........................................................................611D.1 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification..............................................................611

D.1.1 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification on the Client Side........................611D.1.2 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification on the WDM Side........................621

D.2 Optical Amplifying Unit Specification...........................................................................................626D.3 Other Unit Specification..............................................................................................................628D.4 MON Interface Optical Split Ratio...............................................................................................630D.5 Basic Functions of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards.....................................................630D.6 Loopback Function of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards................................................632D.7 Protection mode of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards....................................................633D.8 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards....................................635

E Power Consumption, Weight and Valid Slots of Boards.........................................637

F Glossary.......................................................................................................................645

G Acronyms and Abbreviations........................................................................................651




1 Cabinet

1.1 Cabinet StructureThe OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transmission Platform (OptiX OSN 6800 for short) has hardware such as cabinet, subrack, DCM frame and board.

The OptiX OSN 6800 takes subracks as the basic working units. The subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800 has independent power supply and can be installed in ETSI 300 mm rear column cabinet, standard ETSI 300 mm cabinet, or a 23-inch open rack.

In typical configuration, the OptiX OSN 6800 is installed in ETSI 300 mm rear column cabinet.

The main frame of the ETSI 300 mm rear column cabinet is a rack with a door fixed at the front, a rear door with air vents fixed at the back and movable side doors at both sides. Figure 1-1 shows the appearance of an OptiX OSN 6800 ETSI 300 mm rear column cabinet.




Figure 1-1 Appearance of an ETSI 300 mm rear column cabinet

W

H

D

1.2 Configuration of the Integrated CabinetThe ETSI cabinets can be of two heights respectively. Cabinets of different types can be configured with different quantity of OptiX OSN 6800 subracks.

Table 1-1 lists the full configuration of cabinets of different heights. When the cabinet is not fully configured, configure the subracks from bottom to top.




Table 1-1 Full configuration of cabinets of different heights

Item 2.2-m high cabinet

2.6-m high cabinet

23-inch open rack

Quantity of configurable subracks in a ETSI 300 mm middle-column cabinet

4 4 -

Quantity of configurable subracks in a standard ETSI 300 mm cabinet

3 4 -

Quantity of configurable subracks in a 23-inch open rack

- - 4

NOTEHuawei Technologies Co.,Ltd. only provides the ETSI 300 mm middle-column cabinet and standard ETSI 300 mm cabinet.

1.3 SpecificationsThe specifications of the integrated cabinet include dimensions, weight, maximum power, voltage, and so on.

Table 1-2 lists the technical specifications of the two types of cabinets.

Table 1-1 Technical specifications of the cabinet

Item 2.2-m high cabinet

2.6-m high cabinet

Dimensions 600 mm (W) × 300 mm (D) ×2200 mm (H)

600 mm (W) × 300 mm (D) × 2600 mm (H)

Weight 69 kg 80 kg

Maximum power consumption (full configuration)

4800 W 4800 W

Normal working voltage –48 V/–60 V DC –48 V/–60 V DC

Working voltage range –38.4 V to –72 V DC –38.4 V to –72 V DC

1.4 DC Power Distribution BoxA DC power distribution box is mounted at the top part of a cabinet. Its input interface area is divided into two parts: part A and part B.Each part contains two power input terminals and two power grounding terminals. That is, on the DC power distribution box, there are eight terminals in total.




Based on the current of the power supply equipment in the equipment room, there are two power supply modes:

When the current of each power input is 63 A, four power inputs are required. When the current of each power input is 100 A to 128 A inclusive, one power

input is required for part A and part B, respectively. That is, two inputs in total are required. In this mode, a junction box need be mounted. For details about the junction box, refer to Junction Box.

The power distribution box consists of part A and part B for mutual backup. Part A and part B access two –48 V DC power each.

For the two working inputs, the RTN1(+) and NEG1(-), and the RTN2(+) and NEG2(-) in part A are connected.

For the two protection inputs, the RTN1(+) and NEG1(-), and the RTN2(+) and NEG2(-) in part B are connected.

The PDU provides twelve power output interfaces (For the OptiX OSN 6800, both parts A and B use only power switches SW2, SW3, SW4 and SW5 which correspond to four subracks respectively from bottom up.) to supply power to the subracks in the cabinet. Figure 1-2 shows the front panel of the DC power distribution box.

Figure 1-1 Front panel of the DC power distribution box

NEG2(-)

INPUT

RTN2(+)RTN1(+) NEG1(-) NEG2(-)

INPUT

RTN2(+)RTN1(+) NEG1(-)

SW1 SW3SW2 SW4

ON

OFFSW5 SW6 SW1 SW3SW2 SW4

ON

OFFSW5 SW6

OUTPUT1 2 3 4 5 6

OUTPUT1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3

4 4

2 13

1. Output cable terminal 2. Grounding screw

3. Input cable terminal 4. Power switch

Output cable terminal: There are six output cable terminals in each part, which lead in the power cables connected to the subracks.

Grounding screw: It is used to access the protection grounding cable. Input cable terminal: Part A and part B connect to two -48 V DC power cables

and two power grounding cables, respectively. Totally, the input cable terminals lead in four -48 V DC power cables and four power grounding cables.

Power switch: There are six power switches matched for the corresponding output cable terminals in each part so as to control the power supply of each subrack.

Figure 1-3 shows the internal cable connection of the DC power distribution box.




Figure 1-2 Internal cable connection of the DC power distribution box

INPUT

++

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OUTPUT

--INPUT

++ --

OUTPUT------

- - - - - -+ + + + + + - - - - - -+ + + + + +

In part A, the input cable terminals RTN1(+) and NEG1(-) are in one group. They supply power to output cable terminals 1, 2, and 3. The corresponding power switches are respectively SW1, SW2, and SW3.

In part A, the input cable terminals RTN2(+) and NEG2(-) are in one group. They supply power to output cable terminals 4, 5, and 6. The corresponding power switches are respectively SW4, SW5, and SW6.

Part B is the same.

Junction BoxWhen the current of each power input is 100 A to 128 A inclusive, a junction box need be mounted. One input is required for part A and part B, respectively. That is, two inputs in total are required. In this case, a power distribution box need be mounted on each part. Figure 1-4 and Figure 1-5 show the structure and mounting position of the junction box.

Figure 1-1 Junction box structure




Figure 1-2 Junction box mounting position




2 Subrack

2.1 StructureThe OptiX OSN 6800 takes subracks as the basic working units. The subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800 has independent power supply.

Figure 2-1 shows the structure of the subrack.

Figure 2-1 OptiX OSN 6800 subrack structure diagram

1

2

3

456

7

1. Indicator 2. Board area

3. Fiber cabling area

4. Fan tray assembly

5. Air filter 6. Fiber spool

7. Mounting ear

NOTEThe interface area is behind the indicator panel in the upper part of the subrack. Remove the indicator panel before you connect cables.

Indicators: They indicate the running status and alarm status of the subrack.




Board area: All service boards are in this area. Totally 21 slots are available. Fiber cabling area: Fiber jumpers from the ports on the front panel of the boards

are routed to the area before reaching the matched side of the cabinet. The mechanical VOA is also installed in this area.

Fan tray assembly: This area contains 10 fans for ventilation and heat dissipation of the subrack.

Air filter: It protects the subrack from outside dust in the air. It needs to be taken out and cleaned periodically.

Fiber spool: The fiber spool serves to coil the extra fibers. Fixed fiber spools are on two sides of the subrack. The fibers whose extras are coiled in the fiber spool on the cabinet side enter another subrack.

Mounting ears: They fix the subrack in the cabinet. Interface area: This area is behind the subrack indicator panel, providing

functional interfaces such as management interface, inter-subrack communication interface, alarm output and cascading interface, alarm input and output interface.

Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack.

Table 2-1 Technical specifications of the subrack

Item Specification

Dimensions 487 mm (W) × 295 mm (D) × 400 mm (H)

Weight (empty subracka) 13 kg

Maximum power consumption 1200 W

Rated working current 30 A

Nominal working voltage –48 V/–60 V DC

Working voltage range –38.4 V to –72 V DC

a: The empty subrack means no board is installed in the board area, and no fan tray assembly and no air filter is installed.

Table 2-2 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly

Item Specification

Dimensions 493.7 mm (W)× 266.6 mm (D) × 56.1 mm (H)

Weight 3.6 kg

Power consumption 120 W

Table 2-3 lists the power consumption of the common units in the OptiX OSN 6800.




Table 2-3 Power consumption of the common units in the OptiX OSN 6800

Unit Name Maximum Power Consumptiona

Remarks

Subrack OTU subrack 640 W It is the power consumption when the subrack is installed with seventeen OTU10G (LSX), one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly.

OTM subrack 520 W It is the power consumption when the subrack is installed with one M40V, one D40V, one OAU, one OBU, eight OTU10G (LSX), one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly.

OLA subrack 270 W It is the power consumption when the subrack is installed with seventeen two OBU101, two OBU103, four VA1, one SC2, one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly.

OADM subrack

380 W It is the power consumption when the subrack is installed with two OAU101, four VA1, two MR4, four OTU10G, one SC2, one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray assembly.

Cabinet OTM cabinet (40×10Gbits)

1800 W It is the power consumption when the cabinet is installed with two OTU subrack and one OTM subrack.

a: Indicates that the power consumption of the subrack and cabinet is the value in a certain configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumption of the chassis and cabinet is calculation based on the power consumption of each module.

NOTEThe power consumption value in the table is the measured value when the ambient temperature is 25 . During the starting up of the equipment or in high or low temperature, the power consumption of the equipment increases. Hence, the actual power consumption of the equipment is 1.2 to 1.5 times of the value in the table.

2.2 Slot DescriptionThe board area of the subrack has 21 slots, defined as IU1 to IU21 from left to right.

Slots of the subrack is shown in Figure 2-2




Figure 2-1 Slots of the subrack

IU5

IU4

IU6

IU7

IU8

XCS

XCS I

U12

IU13

IU14

IU15

IU16

SCC

SCC

PIU

PIU

AUX

IU3

IU2

IU1

IU11I

UIU

9 10

17

18

/ /IU

IU

//Board area

VOA area12

34

56

78

IU19

IU20

IU21

IU1-IU18 are for service boards. IU21 is for the AUX. IU19 and IU20 are for the PIU. IU18 is for the active SCC. IU17 is available for the standby SCC or the other service boards. IU9 is available for the active XCS or for the other service boards. IU10 is available for the standby XCS or for the other service boards.

Mapping of Pair Slots Pair slots refer to a pair of slots whose resident boards' overhead can be processed by the buses on the backplanes. For the two boards in the paired slots, the inter-board cross-connection can be directly configured, and the cross-connect grooming of services can be realized without the cross-connect board. The OptiX OSN 6800 supports seven pair slots, which are IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU15 and IU16.

Mapping of Boards and SlotsTable 2-4 shows the mapping between boards and slots of the OptiX OSN 6800.

Table 2-1 Mapping between boards and slots of the OptiX OSN 6800

Board Available slot

AUX IU21

CMR2 IU1-IU17

CMR4 IU1-IU17

D40 IU1-IU15





D40V IU1-IU15

DCP IU1-IU17

DCU IU1-IU17

DMR1 IU1-IU17

ECOM IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

FIU IU1-IU17

HBA IU2-IU16

ITL IU1-IU17

L4G IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

LDGD IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

LDGS IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

LOG IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

LOM IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

LQMS IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

LQMD IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

LSX IU1-IU17

LSXL IU1-IU14

LSXLR IU1-IU14

LSXR IU1-IU17

LWX2 IU1-IU17

LWXD IU1-IU17

LWXS IU1-IU17

M40 IU1-IU15

M40V IU1-IU15

MCA4 IU1-IU16

MCA8 IU1-IU16

MR2 IU1-IU17

MR4 IU1-IU17

MR8 IU1-IU16

NS2 IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

OAU1 IU2-IU17





OBU1 IU1-IU17

OBU2 IU2-IU17

OLP IU1-IU17

RMU9 IU1-IU17

ROAM IU1-IU15

SBM2 IU1-IU17

SC1 IU1-IU17

SC2 IU1-IU17

SCC IU17, IU18

SCS IU1-IU17

TBE IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TDX IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TDG IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TMX IU1-IU17

TQS IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

TQM IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

VA1 IU1-IU17

VA4 IU1-IU17

WMU IU1-IU17

WSM9 IU1-IU15

WSD9 IU1-IU15

WSMD4 IU1-IU16

XCS IU9, IU10

2.3 Fan AreaIn the OptiX OSN 6800 system, each subrack has a fan area. A fan area consists of fan tray assembly and air filter. The air filter can be drawn out and be cleaned.

AppearanceFigure 2-3 shows the appearance of a fan area.




Figure 2-1 Appearance of a fan area

1

2

3

1. Air filter 2. Fan running indicators 3. Fans (ten in total)

Functions and Features

Table 2-1 Functions

Function Describes

Basic function Realizes heat dissipation on an NE, so that the NE is able to work normally and effectively under the designed temperature.

Commissioning control

Realizes intelligent speed regulating of fans. The speed varies automatically with the temperature.

The fan speed can be manually adjusted.

The fan area realizes heat dissipation on an NE. Hence, the NE is able to work normally and effectively under the designed temperature. The fan tray assembly is located on the lower part of the subrack. It adopts blowing method, forming an air duct from bottom to top. Other boards in the subrack are installed vertically, that is, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This design ensures reliable heat dissipation.

Figure 2-4, Figure 2-5 shows the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 6800.




Figure 2-2 Single-subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system

Air outlet

Board area

Optical fiberlaying area

Fan tray assembly

Air inlet

Figure 2-3 Multi-subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system

Air outlet

Board area

Optical fiberlaying area

Fan tray assembly

Air inlet

Airduct frame

NOTEWhen multiple subracks are used, an airduct frame is required to help in heat dissipation.

2.4 PIUPIU: Power Interface Unit

2.4.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the PIU board is available, that is TN11.




2.4.2 ApplicationThe OptiX OSN 6800 is configured with two PIU boards. The two boards provide power supplies to the system with 1+1 hot backup.

2.4.3 Functions and FeaturesThe PIU is an power interface unit. It accesses DC power and provides protection and filtering functions.

For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 2-6.

Table 2-1 Functions and features of the PIU

Function and Feature

Description

Basic function Accesses DC power from –38.4 V to –72 V for the system. Provides protection and filtering functions for the accessed power. Provides the fan tray assembly with a 48 V DC power after voltage reduction.

2.4.4 Front PanelThere are indicators and interfaces on the board front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 2-6 shows the PIU front panel.

Figure 2-1 PIU front panel

RUN

NEG

(-)R

TN(+)

PIU

IndicatorsThere is one indicator on the front panel.

Running status indicator (RUN) - green




InterfaceThere is only one power interface on the front panel of the PIU board. The interface is used to access the DC power from –38.4 V to –72 V.

2.4.5 Valid SlotsThe PIU occupies one slot. The valid slots for the PIU are IU19 and IU20.

2.4.6 Specifications of the PIUSpecifications include performance indexes, dimensions, weight and power consumption.

Performance Indexes

Table 2-1 Performance Indexes of the PIU Board

Item Unit Value

Number of DC input power supplies - 1

Input DC power voltage range V DC –38.4 to –72

Input DC power current A ≤30

Mechanical Specifications Dimensions of front panel: 28 mm X 65 mm Weight: 0.5 kg

Power Consumption The maximum power consumption: 35 W

2.5 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces

The OptiX OSN 6800 provides abundant interfaces for data communication and equipment maintenance.

These interfaces are located in the interface area of the subrack and on the front panel of the AUX, as shown in Figure 2-7.




Figure 2-1 Interfaces of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack

Fan

ETH3COM ALM02ALM01 ALM03 ALM04 ALMI2ALMI1 LAMP1 ALMP2SERIAL

SCC

SCC

STATACTPROGSRVPWRAPWRBPWRCALMC

RESET

LAMP TEST

ALM CUT

SubRACK_ID

RUN

NEG

(-)R

TN(+)

PIU

AUX

STATPROG

NM

_ETH

1N

M_E

TH2

ETH

1E

TH2

xcs

xcs

STATACTPROGSRV

NOTEThe interface area is behind the indicator panel in the upper part of the subrack. Remove the indicator panel before you connect cables.

2.5.1 Interfaces in the Interface AreaThe interface area provides functional interfaces such as management interface, inter-subrack communication interface, alarm output and cascading interface, alarm input and output interface.

The interface area is behind the indicator panel in the upper part of the subrack. Figure 2-8 shows the front panel.

Figure 2-1 Interfaces in the interface area

ETH3COM ALM02ALM01 ALM03 ALM04 ALMI2ALMI1 LAMP1 LAMP2SERIAL

Description of interfaces in the interface area is list in Table 2-8.




Table 2-1 Description of interfaces in the interface area

Interface Silk-screen

Connector

Function

Commissioning interface

COM RJ-45 It is for the commissioning.

Inter-subrack communication interface

ETH3 RJ-45 Connects the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface on one subrack through a network cable to such interfaces on the other subracks to achieve the communication between the master subrack and slave subracks.

Alarm output and cascading interface

ALMO1 ALMO2 ALMO3 ALMO4

RJ-45 The definitions for the pins of the ALM01 and ALM02 interfaces are the same. The two interfaces are used for output/cascading, respectively. The definitions for the pins of the ALM03 and ALM04 interfaces are the same. The two interfaces are used for output/cascading, respectively.Alarm outputs are sent to the DC power distribution cabinet through the output interface and the cascading interface. You can configure it to be the other outputs to realize integrated display of alarms. The OptiX OSN 6800 provides eight alarm outputs. Defaults of the first three are critical alarm, major alarm, and minor alarm. The other five are reserved. Alarm outputs can be cascaded.

OAM interface SERIAL DB9 The OAM interface is a serial NM interface, providing functions of serial NM and supporting X.25 protocol. When this interface is a COA management interface, it can manage external equipment such as COA, TDA, and DCU. The interface rate is 9.6 kbit/s.

Alarm input interface

ALMI1 ALMI2

RJ45 External alarm signal input function is designed for requirements when the alarm signals of the external systems (such as the environment monitory) need remote monitoring.The OptiX OSN 6800 provides eight alarm inputs. The name of the eight alarms can be configured to cooperate with the external system to realize remote monitoring of external alarms.

Subrack alarm output and cascading interface

LAMP1 LAMP2

RJ45 This interface drives the running indicators and alarm indicators of the cabinet that holds the subrack.

2.5.2 Interfaces on the Front Panel of the AUX BoardThe AUX board provides NM interface, NM cascading interface, inter-subrack normal and emergent communication interface.

Figure 2-9 shows the front panel of the AUX. The AUX is inserted in slot IU21.




Figure 2-1 Interfaces on the front panel of the AUX

AUX

STAT

PROG

NM

_ETH

1N

M_E

TH2

ETH

1E

TH2

Description of interfaces on the front panel of the AUX board is list in Table 2-9.

Table 2-1 Description of interfaces on the front panel of the AUX board

Interface Silk-screen

Connector

Function

NE management interface

NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2

RJ-45 Connects the network interface on the OptiX OSN 6800 through a network cable to that on the T2000 server to achieve the management of the T2000 over the OptiX OSN 6800.

Connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE through a network cable to that on another NE to achieve communication between NEs.

Inter-subrack communication interface

ETH1/ETH2

RJ-45 Connects the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface on one subrack through a network cable to such interfaces on the other subracks to achieve the communication between the master subrack and slave subracks.




2.5.3 PIN Assignment of InterfacesThe interfaces of the OptiX OSN 6800 used for data communication and equipment maintenance use the RJ-45 and the DB9 connectors. The pin assignment figures and the functions of the pins are given in this section.

Pin assignment of the RJ-45 ConnectorFigure 2-10 shows the pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector.

Figure 2-1 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector

. 18 7 6 5 4 3 2

Pin Assignment of the DB9 ConnectorFigure 2-11 shows the pin assignment of the DB9 connector.

Figure 2-1 Pin assignment of the DB9 connector

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Pin Assignment of the COM InterfaceFor the pin assignment of the COM inerface, refer to Table 2-10 .




Table 2-1 Pin assignment of the COM interface

Pin Signal Function

1 ETNTX_P_1 Transmits the data positive

2 ETNTX_N_1 Transmits the data negative

3 ETNRX_P_1 Receives the data positive

4 NC Not connected

5 NC Not connected

6 ETNRX_N_1 Receives data negative

7 NC Not connected

8 NC Not connected

Pin Assignment of the ETH3 InterfaceFor the pin assignment of the ETH3 interface, refer to Table 2-11.

Table 2-1 Pin assignment of the ETH3 interface

Pin Signal Function

1 ETH3_TXP Transmits the data positive for inter-subrack ordinary communications

2 ETH3_TXN Transmits the data negative for inter-subrack ordinary communications

3 ETH3_RXP Receives the data positive for inter-subrack ordinary communications

4 ETH3_CRIT_TXP Transmits the data positive for inter-subrack emergent communications

5 ETH3_CRIT_TXN Transmits the data negative for inter-subrack emergent communications

6 ETH3_RXN Receives the data negative for inter-subrack ordinary communications

7 ETH3_CRIT_RXP Receives the data positive for inter-subrack emergent communications

8 ETH3_CRIT_RXN Receives the data negative for inter-subrack emergent communications

Pin Assignment of the ALMO1 and the ALMO2 InterfacesFor the pin assignment of the ALMO1 and the ALMO2 interfaces, refer to Table 2-12.




Table 2-1 Pin assignment of the ALMO1 and ALMO2 interfaces

Pin Signal Funciton

1 CRIT_SWITCH_OUTP Outputs the critical alarm signal positive

2 CRIT_SWITCH_OUTN Outputs the critical alarm signal negative

3 MAJ_SWITCH_OUTP Outputs the major alarm signal positive

4 ALM_SWITCH_OUT1P Outputs the minor alarm signal positive

5 ALM_SWITCH_OUT1N Outputs the minor alarm signal negative

6 MAJ_SWITCH_OUTN Outputs the major alarm signal negative

7 ALM_SWITCH_OUT2P Alarm signal output 1 positive

8 ALM_SWITCH_OUT2N Alarm signal output 1 negative

Pin Assignment of the ALMO3 and the ALMO4 InterfacesFor the pin assignment of the ALMO3 and the ALMO4 interfaces, refer to Table 2-13.

Table 2-1 Pin assignment of the ALMO3 and the ALMO4 interfaces

Pin Signal Function









Pin Assignment of the SERIAL InterfaceFor the pin assignment of the SERIAL interface, refer to Table 2-14.

Table 2-1 Pin assignment of the SERIAL interface

Pin Signal Function

1 N.C Not defined

2 RXD Receive end of data




Pin Signal Function

3 TXD Transmit end of data

4 DTR Data terminal equipment ready

5 GND Ground

6 F_RS232RX F&f receive end of data

7 F_RS232TX F&f transmit end of data

8 GND GND

9 5VOADM Power supply for OADM

Pin Assignment of the ALMI1 InterfaceFor the pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface, refer to Table 2-15.

Table 2-1 Pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface

Pin Signal Function

1 SWITCHI_IN1 Alarm input 1

2 GND Ground



5 GND Ground

6 GND Ground


8 GND Ground

Pin Assignment of the ALMI2 InterfaceFor the pin assignment of the ALMI2 interface, refer to Table 2-16.

Table 2-1 Pin assignment of the ALMI2

Pin Signal Function


2 GND Ground






Pin Signal Function

5 GND Ground

6 GND Ground


8 GND Ground

Pin Assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 InterfacesFor the pin assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 interfaces, refer to Table 2-17.

Table 2-1 Pin assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 interfaces

Pin Signal Function

1 CRIT_ALMP Critical alarm signal positive

2 CRIT_ALMN Critical alarm signal negative

3 MAJ_ALMP Major alarm signal positive

4 RUNP Power indicating signal positive

5 RUNN Power indicating signal negative

6 MAJ_ALMN Major alarm signal positive

7 MIN_ALMP Minor alarm signal positive

8 MIN_ALMN Minor alarm signal negative

Pin Assignment of the NM-ETH1 InterfaceFor the pin assignment of the NM-ETH1 interface, refer to Table 2-18.

Table 2-1 Pin assignment of the NM-ETH1 interface

Pin Signal Function

1 NM_ETNTXP NM communications, transmits the data positive

2 NM_ETNTXN NM communications, transmits the data negative

3 NM_ETNRXP NM communications, receives the data positive

4 N C Not connected.


6 NM_ETNRXN NM communications, receives the data negative





Pin Signal Function


Pin Assignment of the NM-ETH2 InterfaceFor the pin assignment of the NM-ETH2 interface, refer to Table 2-19.

Table 2-1 Pin assignment of the NM-ETH2 interface

Pin

Signal Function

1 NMJL_ETNTXP Transmits the concatenated data positive for NM communications

2 NMJL_ETNTXN Transmits the concatenated data negative for NM communications

3 NMJL_ETNRXP Receives the concatenated data positive for NM communications

4 N C Not connected

5 N C Not connected

6 NMJL_ETNRXN Receives the concatenated data negative for NM communications

7 N C Not connected

8 N C Not connected



Pin

Signal Function








Pin

Signal Function







Pin

Signal Function












3 Frame

3.1 DCM FrameThe DCM frame can be used to hold DCM modules which compensate the positive dispersion of transmitting fiber, so as to maintain the original shape of the signal pulse.

The OptiX OSN 6800 provides eight types of DCMs of eight compensation distance specifications: 5 km, 10 km, 20 km, 40 km, 60 km, 80 km, 100 km and 120 km.

Each DCM frame can hold two DCMs at most. The DCM frame is fixed onto the columns of the cabinet by mounting brackets and screws, as shown in Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1 DCM frame in the cabinet

2

1

1. Cabinet column

2. DCM frame 3. DCMs




3.2 CRPC FrameCRPC frame is used to place CRPC board, fan tray assembly and power supply box. The frame is installed into the cabinet.

Figure 3-2 shows the appearance of a CRPC frame. In the middle of the frame, the one with the front panel is the CRPC board. The fan tray assembly is at the left of the board. At the right are two power supplies as mutual backup.

Figure 3-1 Appearance of CRPC frame

1

2

3

1: Fan tray assembly

2: CRPC board 3: Power distribution box

Table 3-1 Mechanical specifications of the CRPC frame

Item Value

Mechanical Specifications 535 mm (W) × 257 mm (D) × 86 mm (H)

Weight 3 kg




4 Overview of Boards

4.1 Board Appearance and Dimensions4.1.1 Appearance and Dimensions

CAUTIONAlways wear an ESD wrist strap when holding the board, and make sure the ESD wrist strap is well grounded, thus to prevent the static from damaging the board.

Table 4-1 shows the board appearance and dimensions of the OptiX OSN 6800.

Table 4-1 The board appearance and dimensions

Board appearance

Board name

Number of slots occupied

Height (mm)

Width (mm)

Depth (mm)

L4G 1 264.6 25.4 220.0




Board appearance

Board name


Height (mm)

Width (mm)

Depth (mm)

OAU1 2 264.6 50.8 220.0

M40 3 264.6 76.2 220.0

AUX 1 107.6 28.4 220.0




Board appearance

Board name


Height (mm)

Width (mm)

Depth (mm)

LSXL 4 264.6 101.6 220.0

4.1.2 Laser Safety LabelLasers are of four safety levels according to the value of the output power.

WARNINGIt is strictly forbidden to stare into the optical interface during the installation and maintenance of the fiber, because the laser beam inside the optical fiber would hurt your eyes.

Table 4-2 shows the laser levels of the unit.

Table 4-1 Laser levels

Laser Level Label Reference Power Range

Class 1CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

<10.00 dBm (<10.00 mW)

Class 1M

CLASS 1M LASERPRODUCT

LASERRADIATION

DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLYWITH OPTICALINSTRUMENTS

10.00 dBm – 22.15 dBm (10.00 mW – 164 mW)




Laser Level Label Reference Power Range

Class 3B

CLASS 3B LASERPRODUCT

AVOID EXPOSURETO BEAM

LASERRADIATION

22.15 dBm – 27.00 dBm (164.00 mW – 500.00 mW)

Class 4 LASERRADIATION

AVOID EYE OR SKINEXPOSURE TO DIRECT OR

SCATTERED RADIATION

CLASS 4 LASERPRODUCT

>27.00 dBm (>500.00 mW)

4.2 Bar Code for BoardsThere is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board characteristic code.

4.2.1 OverviewThere is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board model number. The bar code of some of such boards also include a characteristic code. The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on.

Figure 4-1 and Figure 4-2 shows a bar code.

Figure 4-1 Description of the bar code (example 1)

2102313242 1059000003 19210PA

BOM

Deliveryinformation

Board version(TN11)

Boardname

Characteristiccode

TN1M1L4GY 01

Board modelnumber

Environmentalfriendliness flag

(Y: Environmentallyfriendly)




Figure 4-2 Description of the bar code (example 2)

030FBQ1073000001 -94509520

Last four numbers ofthe BOM

TN11MR4N 01


Deliveryinformation

Board name

Board version

Characteristiccode

Board modelnumber

(N: Environmentallyunfriendly)

4.2.2 Characteristic CodeFor the detailed description of the board characteristic code, refer to Appendix B.

4.3 Board CategoryThe OptiX OSN 6800 has 14 kinds of boards.

Optical transponder unit Optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit Optical add and drop multiplexing unit Reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit Tributary unit Line unit Cross-connect unit Optical amplifier unit Optical supervisory channel unit System control and communication unit Optical protection unit Spectrum analyzer unit Variable optical attenuator unit Dispersion compensation unit

Table 4-3 shows the board list.




Table 4-1 Board list

Board category Board name

Board description

Optical transponder unit

ECOM Enhanced communication interface unit

L4G Line wavelength conversion unit with 4xgigabit Ethernet line capacity

LDGS 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit,single fed and single receiving

LDGD 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit,dual fed and selective receiving

LOG 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit

LOM 8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board (AFEC)

LQMS 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, single fed and single receiving

LQMD 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, dual fed and selective receiving

LSX 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit

LSXL 40Gbit/s wavelength conversion board

LSXLR 40Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit

LSXR 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit

LWXS Arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit)

LWXD Arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (double transmit)

LWX2 Arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) dual-wavelength conversion board

TMX 4 channels STM-16/OTU1 asynchronism mux OTU-2 wavelength conversion board

Optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit

M40 40-channel multiplexing unit

D40 40-channel demultiplexing unit

M40V 40-channel multiplexing unit with VOA

D40V 40-channel demultiplexing unit with VOA

FIU Fiber interface unit





Board description

ITL Interleaver Board

Optical add and drop multiplexing unit

MR2 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit



CMR2 CWDM 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit

CMR4 CWDM 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit

DMR1 CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop multiplexing unit

SBM2 2-channel CWDM single-fiber bi-directional add/drop board

Reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit

ROAM Reconfigurable optical adding board

WSM9 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board

WSD9 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board

RMU9 9-Port ROADM multiplexing board

WSMD4 4-Port Wavelength Selective Switching Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board

Tributary unit TBE 10 Gigabit Ethernet tributary board

TDX 2 x 10G Tributary Service Processing Board

TQM 4 x multi-rate tributary service processing unit

TDG 2 x GE tributary service processing unit

TQS 4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing unit

Line unit NS2 4 x ODU1 multiplexing OTU2 optical interface unit

Cross-connect unit XCS Cross-connect and clock unit

Optical amplifier unit HBA High-power Booster Amplifier Board

OAU1 Optical amplifying unit

OBU1 Optical booster unit

OBU2 Optical booster unit





Board description

CRPC Case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for C-band

Optical supervisory channel unit

SC1 Unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit

SC2 Bi-directional optical supervisory channel unit

System control and communication unit

SCC System control and communication Unit

AUX System auxiliary interface unit

Optical protection unit

DCP 2-channel optical path Protection unit

OLP Optical line protection unit

SCS Sync optical channel separator unit

Spectrum analyzer unit

MCA4 4-channel spectrum analyzer unit

MCA8 8-channel spectrum analyzer unit

WMU Wavelength Monitored Unit

Variable optical attenuator unit

VA1 1-channel variable optical attenuator unit

VA4 4-channel variable optical attenuator unit

Dispersion compensation unit

DCU Dispersion Compensation Board




5 Optical Transponder Unit

5.1 ECOMECOM: enhanced communication interface unit

5.1.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the ECOM board is available, that is TN11.

5.1.2 ApplicationThe ECOM board is used to achieve the DCN communication between the OptiX OSN 6800 and the OptiX OSN 900A, and to converge/deconverge 8xFE services to/from 1xGE service.

Application Scenario 1: Achieving DCN Communication between the OptiX OSN 6800 and the OptiX OSN 900A

The management signal and service signal of the OptiX OSN 900A are together transmitted to the OptiX OSN 6800 over the line. The FIU board of the OptiX OSN 6800 separates the signal received into management signal and service signal. The service signal is processed by the OTU board. The management signal is accessed by the ECOM board through the FE port and then is transmitted to the SCC board through the backplane.

For the position of the ECOM in the network with the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 900A, see Figure 5-1.




Figure 5-1 Position of the ECOM in the network with the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 900A

ECOM

OptiX OSN900A

Service signalOTU

OTU

6800SCC

ETH×8

OptiX OSN900A

OptiX OSN×8

FIU

FIU

signalManagement

Service signal

signalManagement

NOTEEach FIU board of the OptiX OSN 6800 accesses the signals from only one OptiX OSN 900A.

Application Scenario 2: Converging/Deconverging 8xFE Services to/from 1xGE Services

When used for convergence or deconvergence, the ECOM board can be used only in the CWDM system. For the position of the ECOM in the WDM system, see Figure 5-2.

Figure 5-1 Position of the ECOM in the WDM system

MUX

DMUX

ECOM ECOM

1

8

1

8

FE

Client side

GE GE

FE

GEGE

Client side

DMUX

MUX

5.1.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the ECOM are cross-connection at the electrical layer and wavelength tunable.





Table 5-1 Functions and features of the ECOM


Description

Basic function Achieves the DCN communication between the OptiX OSN 6800and the OptiX OSN 900A.

Converges/deconverges 8xFE services to/from 1xGE services.

Client-side service type

FE

WDM specification Supports the CWDM specifications.

Cross-connect capabilities

Supports the transmission of one GE signal each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of one GE signal to the paired slots through the backplane.

Tunable wavelength function

Not Supported

Alarms and performance events monitoring

Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.

Provides the function of optical power detection and the function to report the alarms and performance events of the board.

ALS function Not Supported

eSFP Supports the enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical module on the client side.

Loopback WDM side Inloop Supported

Outloop Not Supported

Client side Inloop Supported

Outloop Supported

5.1.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe ECOM consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2 module, cross-connect module, and control and communication module.

Figure 5-3 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ECOM.




Figure 5-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the ECOM

SCC

8L2

module

RX1TX1RX8TX8

FE

INOUT

GE

FE

Cross-connectmodule

GEBackplane

Client-side

opticalmodule

WDM-side

opticalmodule

Control and communication module

In Transmit DirectionThe client-side optical module receives FE service signals. These FE signals are converted into electrical signals and sent to the L2 module.

The L2 module:

Sends the eight FE signals to the backplane. When the ECOM is used as an convergence board, the L2 module converges

the eight FE signals into one GE signal with a maximum bandwidth of 1.25 Gbit/s and sends it to the cross-connect module.

The cross-connect module:

Sends one GE signal to a WDM-side optical module. Sends one GE signals to cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot

through the backplane to realize the grooming of electrical signals. Receives the electrical signals sent from cross-connection board or a board in

the paired slot through the backplane, multiplexes the signals into one GE signal, and sends the signal to a WDM-side optical module.

The WDM-side optical module converts the electrical signal into the GE optical signal, and sends the optical signal to the WDM side.

In Receive DirectionThe WDM-side optical module receives one GE optical signal, converts it into an electrical signal, and sends the converted signal to the cross-connect and service processing module.

The cross-connect module:

Sends the GE signal to the L2 module. Sends the GE signal to cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot

through the backplane to realize the grooming of electrical signals. Receives the electrical signal sent from cross-connection board or a board in the

paired slot through the backplane and sends the signal to the L2 module.




The L2 module:

Demultiplexes the GE signal and sends the signals to the client-side optical module.

Sends the FE signals transmitted from the backplane to the corresponding FE port on the client-side optical module according to the VLAN ID.

The client-side optical module converts the electrical signals into optical signals and sends the converted signals to the client-side equipment by TXn.

Cross-Connect Module This module realizes the grooming of electrical signals between the ECOM and

the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. This module realizes the cross-connection of one service signal each through

the working/protection cross-connection boards respectively. This module realizes the cross-connection of one service signal between the

boards in paired slots.

Control and Communication ModuleThe control and communication module realizes the control, monitoring and communications management of each functional module of the board.

The control and communication module collects the information, such as the alarms and performance events, working status, and voltage detection, of each functional module of the board and reports to the SCC.

Receiving the commands from the SCC, the control and communication module controls and coordinates the functional modules of the board in working.

5.1.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the ECOM front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 5-4 shows the ECOM front panel.




Figure 5-1 ECOM front panel

ECOM

ECOM

STATACTPROGSRV

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

TX2

RX

2TX

3R

X3

TX4

RX

4TX

5R

X5

TX6

RX

6TX

1R

X1

INO

UT

TX7

RX

7TX

8R

X8

IndicatorsThere are four indicators on the front panel.

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) – green Board software status indicator (PROG) – dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) – triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

InterfacesThere are 18 optical interfaces on the ECOM front panel. Table 5-2 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 5-1 Types and functions of the ECOM interfaces

Interface

Type

Function

IN LC Receives the single-channel signal from the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.

OUT LC Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.

TX1-TX8 LC Transmits the service signal to the client-side equipment.

RX1-RX8 LC Receives the service signal from the client-side equipment.

Laser Safety LevelThe laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1.

The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

5.1.6 Valid SlotsThe ECOM occupies one slot. The valid slots for the ECOM are IU1–IU8 and IU11–IU16.

5.1.7 NM Configuration ReferenceNM configuration reference includes the reference information needed during the configuration of boards through the T2000.

Display of Optical InterfacesThe serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the panel of the board displayed on the NM are listed in Table 5-3.

Table 5-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ECOM displayed on the NM

Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM

IN/OUT 1

TX1/RX1 3

TX2/RX2 4

TX3/RX3 5

TX4/RX4 6

TX5/RX5 7

TX6/RX6 8

TX7/RX7 9





TX8/RX8 10

NOTEThe number of an interface displayed on the T2000 in fact indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.

Configuration ParametersPath Use Status

Optical Interface Loopback

Laser Status

Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)

Configure Band Type

LPT Enabled

5.1.8 Specifications of the ECOMSpecifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side

Table 5-1 Specifications of optical module at the client side(FE)

Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type 100BASE-FX1310 nm

100BASE-FX1310 nm

Line code format – NRZ NRZ

Target distance km 40 2

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S

Maximum mean launched power

dBm 0 –14

Minimum mean launched power

dBm –5 –19

Minimum extinction ratio dB 10 10

Operating wavelength range

nm 1310 1310

Eye pattern mask – IEEE802.3z-compliant IEEE802.3z-compliant




Item Unit

Value


100BASE-FX1310 nm

Receiver parameter specifications at point R

Receiver type – PIN PIN

Receiver sensitivity(EOL) dBm –30 –30

Minimum receiver overload

dBm –10 –14

Table 5-2 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side(FE)

Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM)






dBm 5 5


dBm 0 0

Minimum extinction ratio

dB 9 8.2


nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611

Central wavelength deviation

nm ±6.5 ±6.5

Maximum –20 dB spectral width

nm 1.0 1.0

Minimum side mode suppression ratio

dB 30 30

Eye pattern mask – IEEE802.3z-compliant G.957-compliant


Receiver type – PIN APD


nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620




Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



Receiver sensitivity dBm -19 –28


dBm -3 –9

Maximum reflectance

dB –27 –27

Specifications of Optical Module at the CWDM Side

Table 5-1 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the CWDM side

Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type







nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611


dBm 5 5


dBm 0 0


dB 9 8.2


nm ±6.5 ±6.5


nm 1 1


dB 30 30







Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type




nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620

Receiver sensitivity dBm -19 –28


dBm -3 –9

Maximum reflectance

dB –27 –27

Mechanical Specifications Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) Weight: 2.43 lb (1.01 kg)

Power Consumption The maximum power consumption at 25 : 19.6 W The maximum power consumption at 55 : 21.6 W

5.2 L4GL4G: line wavelength conversion unit with 4xGigabit Ethernet line capacity

5.2.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the L4G board is available, that is TN11.

5.2.2 ApplicationThe L4G is a type of optical transponder unit. The L4G realizes the conversion between six GE signals and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.

For the position of the L4G in the WDM system, see Figure 5-5.




Figure 5-1 Position of the L4G in the WDM system

Client side WDM side

MUX

DMUX

L4G

DMUX

MUX

L4G

1

6

1

6

G.694.1 G.694.1

GE

GE GE

GE

WDM side Client side

NOTEThe client-side six pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s.

5.2.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the L4G are wavelength conversion, cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.


Table 5-1 Functions and features of the L4G


Description

Basic function Converges up to six non-full bandwidth GE service signals into four GE service signals and multiplexes these four signals into an OTU 5G/FEC 5G signal. Converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process is similar.


GE


Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of four GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane.

OTN function Provides the OTU5G interface on WDM-side. Supports the mapping of GE signals into OTU1 signals. Supports SM and PM functions for OTU5G and ODU5G. Supports TCM function for ODU5G.

WDM specification

Supports the DWDM and CWDM specifications.


Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output at the WDM side within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz.





Description

ESC function Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the service signal.

FEC encoding Adopts FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.


Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate the failures of the line.

Provides the WDM-side monitoring of the items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well as the optical power.

Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.

ALS function Provides the ALS function. With the ALS function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically shut down if no signals are received.

Protection scheme

Supports the SW SNCP. Supports the VLAN SNCP. Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection. Supports the OWSP protection.



Outloop Supported

Client side MAC Supported

PHY Supported

5.2.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe L4G consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2 module, cross-connect and service processing module, control and communication module.

Figure 5-6 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the L4G.




Figure 5-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the L4G

OTN 5G

WDM-side

opticalmodule


SCC

Client side WDM sideBackplane

GE

Cross-connect and

serviceprocessing

module

Client-side

opticalmodule

6

6

L2module

4

4

GE

GE

OTU 5G/FEC 5G

OTU 5G/FEC 5G

RX1

TX1

OUT

IN

RX6

TX6

In Transmit DirectionThe client-side optical module receives a maximum of six non-full bandwidth GE service signals. These GE signals are converted into electrical signals and sent to the L2 module.

The L2 module converges the six signals into four GE signals with a maximum bandwidth of 1.25 Gbit/s and sends them to the cross-connect and service processing module.

The cross-connect and service processing module monitors the performance of client-side services, then

Multiplexes the four signals into one OTU 5G/FEC 5G signal and sends the signal to a WDM-side optical module, or

Sends the four signals to cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane to realize the grooming of electrical signals, or

Receives the electrical signals sent from cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane, multiplexes the signals into one OTU 5G/FEC 5G signal, and sends the signal to a WDM-side optical module.

The WDM-side optical module converts the OTN electrical signal into the OTN optical signal, ITU-T Recommendation-compliant DWDM signal, and sends the optical signal to the WDM side.

In Receive DirectionThe WDM-side optical module receives an OTU 5G/FEC 5G optical signal, converts it into an electrical signal, and sends the converted signal to the cross-connect and service processing module.

The cross-connect and service processing module extracts and processes the overhead bytes, monitors the WDM-side performance, and demultiplexes the OTN optical signal into four 1.25 Gbit/s GE signals. Then, this module

Sends the four signals to the L2 module, or




Sends the four signals to cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane to realize the grooming of electrical signals, or

Receives the electrical signal sent from cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane and sends the signal to the L2 module.

The L2 module demultiplexes the four signals into six client-side signals of corresponding rates and sends the signals to the client-side optical module.

The client-side optical module converts the six electrical signals into optical signals and sends the converted signals to the client-side equipment.

Cross-Connect and Service Processing Module This module realizes the grooming of electrical signals between the L4G and the

board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. This module realizes the cross-connection of four service signals each through

the working/protection cross-connection boards respectively. This module realizes the cross-connection of four service signals between the

boards in paired slots. This module extracts and processes overhead bytes. This module monitors the performance of services. This module multiplexes and demultiplexes services. This module implements the encapsulation of OTN signals.




5.2.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the L4G front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 5-7 shows the L4G front panel.




Figure 5-1 L4G front panel

L4G

L4G

STATACTPROGSRV

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

TX2

RX

2TX

3R

X3

TX4

RX

4TX

5R

X5

TX6

RX

6O

UT

INTX

1R

X1



InterfacesThere are 14 optical interfaces on the L4G front panel. Table 5-8 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 5-1 Types and functions of the L4G interfaces

Interface

Type

Function



TX1–TX6 LC Transmits the service signal to the client-side equipment.

RX1–RX6 LC Receives the service signal from the client-side equipment.



5.2.6 Valid SlotsThe L4G occupies one slot. The valid slots for the L4G are IU1–IU8 and IU11–IU16.

5.2.7 Characteristic Code for the L4GThe board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on.

For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.



Table 5-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the L4G displayed on the NM


IN/OUT 1

TX1/RX1 3

TX2/RX2 4

TX3/RX3 5





TX4/RX4 6

TX5/RX5 7

TX6/RX6 8




Laser Status

Automatic Laser Shutdown

Service Mode

FEC Working State


Configure Band Type

LPT Enabled

5.2.9 Specifications of the L4GSpecifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.


Table 5-1 Specifications of GE optical module at the client side

Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type

2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate

1000 BASE-LX-10 km

1000 BASE-LX-40 km

1000 BASE-ZX-80 km

Line code format – NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ

Target distance km 0.5 10 40 80





Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type


1000 BASE-LX-10 km

1000 BASE-LX-40 km

1000 BASE-ZX-80 km


nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580


dBm –2.5 –3 0 5


dBm –9.5 –11.5 –4.5 –2

Minimum extinction ratio dB 9 9 9 9

Eye pattern mask – IEEE802.3z-compliant


Receiver type – PIN PIN PIN PIN


nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580

Receiver sensitivity dBm –17 –19 –20 –22


dBm 0 –3 –3 –3

Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side

Table 5-1 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical module at the client side

Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM)-40km






nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611


dBm 5 5


dBm 0 0




Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type




dB 9 8.2


nm ±6.5 ±6.5


nm 1.0 1.0


dB 30 30





nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620

Receiver sensitivity dBm –19 –28


dBm –3 –9

Maximum reflectance

dB –27 –27

Specifications of Optical Module at the DWDM Side

Table 5-1 Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side

Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type 3400 ps/nm

6400 ps/nm

3400 ps/nm- tunable

Line code format – NRZ NRZ NRZ



dBm 2 –1 4


dBm –2 –5 0

Minimum extinction ratio dB 10 10 10

Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00




Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type 3400 ps/nm

6400 ps/nm

3400 ps/nm- tunable

Central frequency deviation GHz ±10


nm 0.3 0.3 0.3


dB 35 35 35

Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 3400 6400 3400


Receiver type – APD APD APD

Operating wavelength range nm 1200 to 1650

Receiver sensitivity dBm –25 –25 –25

Minimum receiver overload dBm –9 –9 –9

Maximum reflectance dB –27 –27 –27


Table 5-1 Specifications of optical module at the CWDM side

Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type 5G CWDM

Line code format – NRZ


Maximum mean launched power dBm 5

Minimum mean launched power dBm 2.5

Minimum extinction ratio dB 5

Central wavelength nm 1271 to 1451

Central wavelength deviation nm ±6.5

Maximum –20 dB spectral width nm 0.3

Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 35

Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 400


Receiver type – APD




Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type 5G CWDM


Receiver sensitivity dBm –25

Minimum receiver overload dBm –9

Maximum reflectance dB –27


Power ConsumptionBoard Optical Module

TypeThe maximum power consumption at 25

The maximum power consumption at 55

TN11L4G NRZ-fixed(D)(5G)(3400 ps/nm6400 ps/nm)

50.0 55.0

NRZ-fixed(C)(5G)(3400 ps/nm)

45.0 50.0

NRZ-tunable(5G)(3400 ps/nm)

53.0 58.0

5.3 LDGDLDGD:2xGigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving

5.3.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the LDGD board is available, that is TN11.

5.3.2 ApplicationThe LDGD is a type of optical transponder unit. The LDGD realizes the conversion between two GE signals and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.

For the position of the LDGD in the WDM system, see Figure 5-8.




Figure 5-1 Position of the LDGD in the WDM system

MUX

DMUX

LDGD

DMUX

MUX

LDGD

1

2

1

2

G.694.1/G.694.2

G.694.1/G.694.2

GE

GE GE

GEDMUX

MUX

DMUX

MUX

Client side WDM side WDM side Client side

5.3.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the LDGD are wavelength conversion, cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.


Table 5-1 Functions and features of the LDGD


Description

Basic function Multiplexes two GE optical signals into one OTU1/STM-16 signal and converts the signal into standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process is similar.

Realizes the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.


GE


Supports the grooming of two channels of GE services each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of two GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane.

OTN function Provides the OTU1 interface on WDM-side. Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing

by referring to the ITU-T G.709. Supports the mapping of GE signals into OTU1 signals. The

mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709. Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1. Supports TCM function for ODU1.

WDM specification Supports the DWDM and the CWDM specifications.





Description










Protection scheme Supports the SW SNCP. Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection.



Outloop Supported


Outloop Supported

5.3.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe LDGD consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, cross-connect and service processing module, and control and communication module.

Figure 5-9 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDGD.




Figure 5-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDGD


SCC

Backplane

GE

Cross-connect andservice processing

module

Client-side

opticalmodule

WDM-side

opticalmodule


STM-16/OTU1

STM-16/OTU1

GE

GE

RX1

TX1

OUT1

IN1

RX2

TX2

OUT2

IN2

In Transmit DirectionThe client-side optical module receives two GE service signals compliant with IEEE 802.3z. These GE signals are converted into electrical signals and sent to the cross-connect and service processing module.


Multiplexes the two signals into one STM-16 or OTU1 signal and sends the signal to a WDM-side optical module, or

Sends the two signals to cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane to realize the grooming of electrical signals, or

Receives the electrical signals sent from cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane, multiplexes the signals into one STM-16 or OTU1 signal, and sends the signal to a WDM-side optical module.

The WDM-side optical module converts the electrical signal into ITU-T G.694.1-compliant standard DWDM signal or ITU-T G.694.2-compliant standard CWDM signal. The module divides the signal into two and then sends the two signals to the WDM side.

In Receive DirectionThe WDM-side optical module receives two OTU1 or STM-16 optical signals and converts them into electrical signals.

The cross-connect and service processing module selects one signal and demultiplexes it into two 1.25 Gbit/s GE signals. The module extracts and processes the overhead bytes and monitors the WDM-side performance at the same time. Then this module

Sends the two signals to the client-side optical module, or Sends the two signals to cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot

through the backplane to realize the grooming of electrical signals, or




Receives the electrical signal sent from cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane and sends the signal to the client-side optical module.

The client-side optical module converts the two electrical signals into optical signals and then sends the signals to the client-side equipment.

Cross-Connect and Service Processing Module This module realizes the grooming of electrical signals between the LDGD and

the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. This module realizes the cross-connection of two service signals each through

the working/protection cross-connection boards respectively. This module realizes the cross-connection of two service signals between the

boards in paired slots. This module selects the services. This module extracts and processes overhead bytes. This module monitors the performance of services. This module multiplexes and demultiplexes services. This module implements the encapsulation of OTN signals.




5.3.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LDGD front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 5-10 shows the LDGD front panel.




Figure 5-1 LDGD front panel

LDGD

LDGD

STATACTPROGSRV

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

OU

T1IN

1O

UT2

IN2

TX1

RX

1TX

2R

X2



InterfacesThere are eight optical interfaces on the LDGD front panel. Table 5-15 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 5-1 Types and functions of the LDGD interfaces

Interface Type

Function

IN1–IN2 LC Receives the single-channel signal from the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.

OUT1–OUT2 LC Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.





5.3.6 Valid SlotsThe LDGD occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LDGD are IU1–IU8 and IU11–IU16.

5.3.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGDThe characteristic code for the LDGD consists of eight digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side.

The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table 5-16.

Table 5-1 Characteristic code for the LDGD

Code Meaning Description

The first four digits

The frequency of forth optical signal

The last four digits of the frequency value of the first channel of signals on the WDM side.

The last four digits


The last four digits of the frequency value of the second channel of signals on the WDM side.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LWX2 is 92109220.

"9210" indicates the frequency of the first channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 192.10 THz.

"9220" indicates the frequency of the second channel of optical signals on the WDM side is 192.20 THz.






Table 5-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDGD displayed on the NM


IN1/OUT1 1

IN2/OUT2 2

TX1/RX1 3

TX2/RX2 4




Laser Status


Service Mode

FEC Working State


Configure Band Type

Maximum Packet Length

Ethernet Working Mode

LPT Enabled

5.3.9 Specifications of the LDGDSpecifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.






Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate

1000 BASE-LX-10 km

1000 BASE-LX-40 km

1000 BASE-ZX-80 km




Operating wavelength range nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580


dBm –2.5 –3 0 5


dBm –9.5 –11.5 –4.5 –2







Minimum receiver overload dBm 0 –3 –3 –3



Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type







nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611




Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type




dBm 5 5


dBm 0 0


dB 9 8.2


nm ±6.5 ±6.5


nm 1.0 1.0


dB 30 30





nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620



dBm –3 –9

Maximum reflectance

dB –27 –27



Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type 12800 ps/nm- PIN

12800 ps/nm-APD

6500 ps/nm- PIN

3200 ps/nm- 2mW- APD

12800 ps/nm- tunable

Line code format – NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ





Item Unit Value


12800 ps/nm-APD

6500 ps/nm- PIN




dBm –4 –4 0 0 0


dBm –8 –8 –5 –5 –5

Minimum extinction ratio dB 10 10 8.2 8.2 10


Central frequency deviation

GHz ±10


nm 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.2


dB 35 35 30 30 35

Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 12800 12800 6500 3200 12800

Eye pattern mask – G.957 - compliant


Receiver type – PIN APD PIN APD APD


nm 1200 to 1650

Receiver sensitivity dBm –18 –25 –18 –25 –30


dBm 0 –9 0 –9 –9

Maximum reflectance dB –27 –27 –27 –27 –27



Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type 1600 ps/nm-4mW







Item Unit Value


Minimum mean launched power dBm –0.5

Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2


Central wavelength deviation nm ≤±6.5

Maximum –20 dB spectral width nm 1



Eye pattern mask –











TN11LDGD Fixed(2.5G) 12800 ps/nm-PIN12800 ps/nm-APD6500 ps/nm-PIN3200 ps/nm-2mW-APD

34.0 37.4

Tunable(2.5G) (12800 ps/nm)

36.0 39.6




5.4 LDGSLDGS:2xGigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving

5.4.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the LDGS board is available, that is TN11.

5.4.2 ApplicationThe LDGS is a type of optical transponder unit. The LDGS realizes the conversion between two GE signals and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.

For the position of the LDGS in the WDM system, see Figure 5-11.

Figure 5-1 Position of the LDGS in the WDM system

MUX

DMUX

LDGS

DMUX

MUX

LDGS

1

2

1

2

G.694.1/G.694.2

G.694.1/G.694.2

GE

GE GE

GE


5.4.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the LDGS are wavelength conversion, cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.


Table 5-1 Functions and features of the LDGS


Description

Basic function Multiplexes two GE optical signals into one 2.5 Gbit/s OTU1/STM-16 signal and converts the signal into standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process is similar.


Supports the grooming of two channels of GE services each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of two GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane.





Description


by referring to the ITU-T G.709. Supports the mapping of GE signals into OTU1 signals. The

mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709. Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1. Supports TCM function for ODU1.

WDM specification

Supports the DWDM and the CWDM specifications.










Protection scheme

Supports the SW SNCP. Supports the client-side 1+1 protection.



Outloop Supported


Outloop Supported




5.4.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe LDGS consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, cross-connect and service processing module, and control and communication module.

Figure 5-12 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDGS.

Figure 5-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDGS

OTN 5G

WDM-side

opticalmodule


SCC

Backplane

GE


module

Client-side

opticalmodule


STM-16/OTU1

STM-16/OTU1

GE

GE

RX1

TX1

OUT

IN

RX2

TX2



Multiplexes the two signals into one STM-16 or OTU1 signal and sends the signal to a WDM-side optical module, or

Sends the two signals to the cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane to realize the grooming of electrical signals, or

Receives the electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane, multiplexes the signals into one STM-16 or OTU1 signal, and sends the signal to a WDM-side optical module.

The WDM-side optical module converts the electrical signal into ITU-T G.694.1-compliant standard DWDM signal or ITU-T G.694.2-compliant standard CWDM signal and sends the signal to the WDM side.

In Receive DirectionThe WDM-side optical module receives one OTU1 or STM-16 optical signal and converts it into an electrical signal.




The cross-connect and service processing module demultiplexes the signal into two 1.25 Gbit/s GE signals, extracts and processes the overhead bytes, and monitors the WDM-side performance. Then, the module

Sends the two signals to the client-side optical module, or Sends the two signals to the cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot

through the backplane to realize the grooming of electrical signals, or Receives the electrical signal sent from the cross-connection board or a board in

the paired slot through the backplane and sends the signal to the client-side optical module.

The client-side optical module converts the two electrical signals into optical signals and then sends the signals to the client-side equipment.

Cross-Connect and Service Processing Module This module realizes the grooming of electrical signals between LDGS and the

board in paired slot or with the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. This module realizes the cross-connection of two service signals each through

the working/protection cross-connection boards respectively. This module realizes the cross-connection of two service signals between the





5.4.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LDGS front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 5-13 shows the LDGS front panel.




Figure 5-1 LDGS front panel

LDGS

LDGS

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

STATACTPROGSRV

TX1

RX

1TX

2R

X2

OU

TIN



InterfacesThere are six optical interfaces on the LDGD front panel. Table 5-23 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 5-1 Types and functions of the LDGS interfaces

Interface

Type

Function







5.4.6 Valid SlotsThe LDGS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LDGS are IU1–IU8 and IU11–IU16.

5.4.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGSThe board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on.




Table 5-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDGS displayed on the NM


IN/OUT 1

TX1/RX1 3

TX2/RX2 4







Laser Status


Service Mode

FEC Working State


Configure Band Type



LPT Enabled

5.4.9 Specifications of the LDGSSpecifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.



Item Unit

Value


1000 BASE-LX-10 km

1000 BASE-LX-40 km

1000 BASE-ZX-80 km






dBm –2.5 –3 0 5


dBm –9.5 –11.5 –4.5 –2




Item Unit

Value


1000 BASE-LX-10 km

1000 BASE-LX-40 km

1000 BASE-ZX-80 km








Specifications of eSFP CWDM oOptical Module at the Client Side


Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type







nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611


dBm 5 5


dBm 0 0


dB 9 8.2


nm ±6.5 ±6.5


nm 1.0 1.0


dB 30 30




Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type







nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620



dBm –3 –9

Maximum reflectance

dB –27 –27



Item Unit Value


12800 ps/nm-APD

6500 ps/nm- PIN






dBm –1 –1 3 3 3


dBm –5 –5 –2 –2 –2





nm 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.2


dB 35 35 30 30 35





Item Unit Value


12800 ps/nm-APD

6500 ps/nm- PIN



Eye pattern mask – G.957-compliant





Minimum receiver overload dBm 0 –9 0 –9 –9




Item Unit Value




















Item Unit Value








TN11LDGS Fixed(2.5G) (12800 ps/nm-PIN12800 ps/nm-APD6500 ps/nm-PIN3200 ps/nm-2mW-APD)

32.0 35.2


34.0 37.4

5.5 LOGLOG: 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit

5.5.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the LOG board is available, that is TN11.

5.5.2 ApplicationThe LOG is a type of optical transponder unit. It is applied for conversion between eight channels of GE service optical signals and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant OTU2 optical signals.

For the position of the LOG in the WDM system, see Figure 5-14.




Figure 5-1 Position of the LOG in the WDM system


MUX

DMUX

LOG

DMUX

MUX

LOG

1

8

1

8

G.694.1 G.694.1


GE GE

5.5.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the LOG are wavelength conversion, cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.


Table 5-1 Functions and features of the LOG


Description

Basic function Multiplexes eight channels of GE service optical signals into one channel of OTU2 optical signals and converse them to DWDM standard wavelength that comply with ITU-T Recommendation G.694.1. It can also perform the reverse process.


GE


Supports the grooming of eight channels of GE services each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of eight GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane.


by referring to the ITU-T G.709. Supports the mapping of GE signals into OTU2/OTU2V

signals. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709.

Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. Supports TCM function for ODU2.

WDM specification Supports the DWDM specifications.





Description


Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output at the WDM side within the range of: 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100

GHz 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50

GHz


FEC encoding Supports FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975 and AFEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.1.






Protection scheme Supports the SW SNCP. Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection. Supports the OWSP protection.



Outloop Supported


Outloop Supported

5.5.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe LOG consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, cross-connect and service processing module, and control and communication module.

Figure 5-15 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LOG.




Figure 5-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the LOG

OTU2

OTU2


SCC

Backplane


module

Client-side

opticalmodule

WDM-side

opticalmodule

8

8

8

8


GE

GE

GE

In Transmit DirectionThe client-side optical module receives eight GE signals with IEEE 802.3z feature. It converts the optical signals into electrical signals and sends them to the cross-connect and service processing module.


Multiplexes the eight signals into one OTU2 signal and sends the signal to a WDM-side optical module, or

Sends the eight signals to the cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane to realize the grooming of electrical signals, or

Receives the electrical signals sent from cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane, multiplexes the signals into one OTU2 signal, and sends the signal to a WDM-side optical module.

The WDM-side optical module converts the electrical signal into ITU-T G.694.1-compliant standard DWDM signal and sends the signal to the WDM side.

In Receive DirectionThe WDM-side optical module receives a OTU2 optical signal and converts the it into electrical signal.

The cross-connect and service processing module extracts and processes the overhead bytes, monitors the WDM-side performance, and demultiplexes the signal into eight GE signals at 1.25 Gbit/s rate. Then, the module

Sends the eight signals to the client-side optical module, or Sends the eight signals to the cross-connection board or a board in the paired

slot through the backplane to realize the grooming of electrical signals, or Or it receives the electrical signals sent from cross-connection board or a board

in the paired slot through the backplane, multiplexes the signals into optical signals, and sends the signals to a WDM-side optical module.




The client-side optical module converts the eight electrical signals into optical signals and then sends the signals to the client side.

Cross-Connect and Service Processing Module This module realizes the grooming of electrical signals between the LOG and the

board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. This module realizes the cross-connection of eight service signals each through

the working/protection cross-connection boards respectively. This module realizes the cross-connection of eight service signals between the

boards in paired slots. This module extracts and processes overhead bytes. This module monitors the performance of services. This module multiplexes and demultiplexes GE services. This module implements the encapsulation of OTN signals.




5.5.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LOG front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 5-16 shows the LOG front panel.




Figure 5-1 LOG front panel

STATACTPROGSRV

TX2

RX

2TX

3R

X3

TX4

RX

4TX

5R

X5

TX6

RX

6TX

1R

X1

TX7

RX

7TX

8R

X8

OU

TIN

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

LOG

LOG



InterfacesThere are 18 optical interfaces on the LOG front panel.Table 5-30 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 5-1 Types and functions of the LOG interfaces

Interface

Type

Function







5.5.6 Valid SlotsThe LOG occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LOG are IU1–IU8 and IU11–IU16.

5.5.7 Characteristic Code for the LOGThe board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on.




Table 5-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LOG displayed on the NM


IN/OUT 1

TX1/RX1 3

TX2/RX2 4

TX3/RX3 5





TX4/RX4 6

TX5/RX5 7

TX6/RX6 8

TX7/RX7 9

TX8/RX8 10




Laser Status


FEC Working State

FEC Type


Configure Band Type



5.5.9 Specifications of the LOGSpecifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.




Specifications of optical module at the client side


Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type 2.125G Multirate

1000 BASE-LX-10 km

1000 BASE-LX-40 km

1000 BASE-ZX-80 km





Maximum mean launched power dBm –2.5 –3 0 5

Minimum mean launched power dBm –9.5 –11.5 –4.5 –2









Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM)-40km

2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate(eSFP CWDM)-80km




Operating wavelength range nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611

Maximum mean launched power dBm 5 5

Minimum mean launched power dBm 0 0

Minimum extinction ratio dB 9 8.2




Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM)-40km


Central wavelength deviation nm ±6.5 ±6.5

Maximum –20 dB spectral width nm 1 1


dB 30 30






Minimum receiver overload dBm –3 –9

Maximum reflectance dB –27 –27

Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side

Table 5-1 Specifications of fixed optical module at the DWDM side

Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type

800 ps/nm 1600 ps/nm 800 ps/nm

Line code format – NRZ- 40 channels fixed

NRZ- 40 channels fixed




dBm 2 4 2


dBm –3 0 –3


dB 10 9 10



GHz ±10 ±10 ±5


nm 0.3 0.3 0.3




Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type



dB 35 35 35



Receiver type – PIN APD PIN


nm 1200 to 1650

Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL

dBm –16 –26 –16


dBm 0 –9 0


Table 5-2 Specifications of tunable optical module at the DWDM side

Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type 1200 ps/nm - tunable- PIN

1200 ps/nm - tunable- APD

4800 ps/nm -ODB- tunable

800 ps/nm- DRZ-tunable

Line code format – NRZ- 80 channels tunable

NRZ- 80 channels tunable

ODB- 80 channels tunable

DRZ- 80 channels tunable



dBm 2 2 2 2


dBm –3 –3 –3 –3

Minimum extinction ratio dB 10 10 NAa 10



GHz ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5


nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3




Item Unit Value






dB 35 35 35 35

Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 1200 1200 4800 800


Receiver type – PIN APD APD PIN


nm 1200 to 1650


dBm –16 –26 –26 –16


dBm 0 –9 –9 0

Maximum reflectance dB –27 –27 –27 –27

a: The ODB code pattern has three levels, and thus extinction ratio is not needed.


Power ConsumptionBoard Optical Module Type The maximum

power consumption at 25


TN11LOG NRZ-fixed(10G)(800 ps/nm-40 channels fixed1600 ps/nm-40 channels fixed

49.5 54.5

NRZ-tunable(10G)(1200 ps/nm-PIN-80 channels tunable1200 ps/nm-APD-80 channels tunable)

50.0 55.0

DRZ-tunable(10G) (800 ps/nm-80 channels tunable)

51.2 56.1




ODB-tunable(10G) (4800 ps/nm-80 channels tunable)

55.0 60.5

5.6 LOMLOM: 8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board (AFEC)

5.6.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the LOM board is available, that is TN11.

5.6.2 ApplicationThe LOM is a type of optical transponder unit. The LOM multiplexes a maximum of eight GE/FC100/FICON, four FC200/FICON 2G, or two FC400 signals into one OTU2 signal. It also realizes conversion between these signals and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals. The LOM board supports FC extension and ensures that the signal width does not decrease during long-haul transmission of FC services.

For the position of the LOM in the WDM system, see Figure 5-17.

Figure 5-1 Position of the LOM in the WDM system


MUX

DMUX

LOM

DMUX

MUX

LOM

1

8

1

8

G.694.1 G.694.1


GE/FC100/FC200/FC400/FICON/FICON 2G


NOTE For GE, FC100, and FICON services, the eight pairs of optical interfaces on the client side

are all available. For FICON 2G and FC200 services, though any optical interface can access the FICON 2G

or FC200 services, only any two of the first and last four optical interfaces can access the FICON 2G or FC200 services at the same time.

For FC400 services, the client-side TX1/RX1 and TX5/RX5 are available.

5.6.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the LOM are wavelength conversion, OTN interfaces and ESC.





Table 5-1 Functions and features of the LOM


Description

Basic function Multiplexes eight channels of GE/FC100/FICON services, four FC200/FICON 2G services, or two FC400 service optical signals into one channel of OTU2 optical signals and converse them to DWDM standard wavelength that comply with ITU-T Recommendation G.694.1. It can also perform the reverse process.

Supports hybrid transmission of the services mentioned above. The overall bandwidth of the first and last four optical interfaces should be equal to or less than 4 Gbit/s, respectively.

The LOM board supports FC extension and ensures that the data width does not decrease during long-haul transmission of FC services. For FC100/FC200/FC400 services, the maximum transmission distance of the WDM side is 3000 km.



OTN function Provides the OTU2 interface on WDM-side. Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by

referring to the ITU-T G.709. Supports the mapping of GE/FC100/FC200/FC400 signals into

OTU2/OTU2V signals. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709.


WDM specification

Supports the DWDM specifications.



GHz 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz









Description


Protection scheme

Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection. Supports the OWSP protection.



Outloop Supported


Outloop Supported

5.6.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe LOM consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service processing module, and control and communication module.

Figure 5-18 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LOM.

Figure 5-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the LOM

WDM-side

opticalmodule


SCC

Serviceprocessing

module

Client-side

opticalmodule

OTU2


8

8

8

8 OTU2









In Transmit DirectionThe client-side optical module receives eight GE/FC100/FICON signals, four FC200/FICON 2G signals, or two FC400 services. It converts the optical signals into electrical signals and sends them to the service processing module.

The service processing module monitors the performance of client-side services. Then it multiplexes the signals into one OTU2 signal and sends the signal to a WDM-side optical module.


In Receive DirectionThe WDM-side optical module receives a OTU2 optical signal and converts the it into electrical signal.

The service processing module extracts and processes the overhead bytes, monitors the WDM-side performance, and demultiplexes the signal into eight GE/FC100/FICON signals, or four FC200/FICON 2G signals, or two FC400 service electrical signals.


Service Processing Module This module extracts and processes overhead bytes. This module monitors the performance of services. This module multiplexes and demultiplexes services. This module implements the encapsulation of OTN signals. This module provides FC distance extension.







5.6.5 Front PanelThere are indicators and interfaces on the LOM front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 5-19 shows the LOM front panel.

Figure 5-1 LOM front panel

WSD9

WSD9

LASERRADIATION



STATACTPROGSRV

DM

1D

M2

DM

3D

M4

EX

PO

IND

M5

DM

6M

ON

OM

ON

ID

M7

DM

8

WSD9

WSD9

LASERRADIATION



STATACTPROGSRV

DM

1D

M2

DM

3D

M4

EX

PO

IND

M5

DM

6M

ON

OM

ON

ID

M7

DM

8

WSD9

WSD9

LASERRADIATION



STATACTPROGSRV

DM

1D

M2

DM

3D

M4

EX

PO

IND

M5

DM

6M

ON

OM

ON

ID

M7

DM

8

WSD9

WSD9

LASERRADIATION



STATACTPROGSRV

DM

1D

M2

DM

3D

M4

EX

PO

IND

M5

DM

6M

ON

OM

ON

ID

M7

DM

8

WSD9

WSD9

LASERRADIATION



STATACTPROGSRV

DM

1D

M2

DM

3D

M4

EX

PO

IND

M5

DM

6M

ON

OM

ON

ID

M7

DM

8

WSD9

WSD9

LASERRADIATION



STATACTPROGSRV

DM

1D

M2

DM

3D

M4

EX

PO

IND

M5

DM

6M

ON

OM

ON

ID

M7

DM

8

LOM

LOM

STATACTPROGSRV

RX

2TX

3R

X3

TX4

RX

4TX

1R

X1

TX2

TX5

RX

5TX

6R

X6

TX7

RX

7TX

8R

X8

LINK/ACT1LINK/ACT2LINK/ACT3LINK/ACT4LINK/ACT5LINK/ACT6LINK/ACT7LINK/ACT8

OU

TIN

IndicatorsThere are twelve indicators on the front panel.





Data port connection/data transceive indicator (LINK/ACTn) – green

InterfacesThere are 18 optical interfaces on the LOM front panel. Table 5-37 lists the type and function of each interface.

Table 5-1 Types and functions of the LOM interfaces

Interface

Type

Function











5.6.6 Valid SlotsThe LOM occupies two slots. The valid slots for the LOM are IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16 in the subrack.

The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the two occupied slots in the subrack, so the slot number of the LOM board displayed on the NM is the number of the left slot.

For example, if the LOM occupies slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the LOM displayed on the NM is IU1.

5.6.7 Characteristic Code for the LOMThe board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on.







Table 5-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LOM displayed on the NM


IN/OUT 1

TX1/RX1 3

TX2/RX2 4

TX3/RX3 5

TX4/RX4 6

TX5/RX5 7

TX6/RX6 8

TX7/RX7 9

TX8/RX8 10




Service Type

Laser Status


FEC Working State

FEC Type


Configure Band Type






FC Distance Extension

5.6.9 Specifications of the LOMSpecifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.



Item Unit

Value


1000 BASE-LX-10 km

1000 BASE-LX-40 km

1000 BASE-ZX-80 km





nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580


dBm –2.5 –3 0 5


dBm –9.5 –11.5 –4.5 –2






nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580






Table 5-2 Specifications of FC optical module at the client side

Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

FC400 Module FC100/FC200/FICON/FICON 2G module

Multimode

Single mode

Multimode Single mode


Target distance km 0.3 10 0.5 2



nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355

830 to 860 1266 to 1360


dBm –1 –2 –2.5 –3


dBm –9 –8 –9.5 –10

Eye pattern mask – Compliant with Fiber Channel-physical interface (FC-PI-2) parameter template




nm 770 to 860 1260 to 1600

770 to 860 1270 to 1580



dBm 0 0 0 0



Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type









Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type




nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611


dBm 5 5


dBm 0 0


dB 9 8.2


nm ±6.5 ±6.5


nm 1 1


dB 30 30





nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620

Receiver sensitivity

dBm –19 –28


dBm –3 –9

Maximum reflectance

dB –27 –27






Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type







dBm 2 4 2


dBm –3 0 –3


dB 10 9 10



GHz ±10 ±10 ±5


nm 0.3 0.3 0.3


dB 35 35 35





nm 1200 to 1650


dBm –16 –26 –16


dBm 0 –9 0






Item Unit Value











dBm 2 2 2 2


dBm –3 –3 –3 –3



Central frequency deviation GHz ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5


nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3


dB 35 35 35 35






dBm –16 –26 –26 –16

Minimum receiver overload dBm 0 –9 –9 0







Power ConsumptionBoard Optical Module Type The maximum

power consumption at 25


TN11LOM NRZ-fixed(10G)(800 ps/nm-40 channels fixed1600 ps/nm-40 channels fixed

92.7 101.7


92.9 101.9


93.4 102.7


98.2 108.0

5.7 LQMDLQMD: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, dual fed and selective receiving

5.7.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the LQMD board is available, that is TN11.

5.7.2 ApplicationThe LQMD is a type of optical transponder unit. The LQMD realizes the conversion between signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s–2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.

For the position of the LQMD in the WDM system, see Figure 5-20.




Figure 5-1 Position of the LQMD in the WDM system

LQMD LQMD

1

4

1

4100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

MUX

DMUX

DMUX

MUX

G.694.1/G.694.2

G.694.1/G.694.2

DMUX

MUX

DMUX

MUX


NOTE The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5

Gbit/s. There is only one pair of optical interface (TX1/RX1) that supports services at a maximum

rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.

5.7.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the LQMD are wavelength conversion, cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.


Table 5-1 Functions and features of the LQMD


Description

Basic function Multiplexes four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s into a 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal and converts it into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process is similar.

With this board, many services, such as the data services (Ethernet services), SAN services (ESCON, FC/FICON), video services (DVB), and voice services (SDH/SONET), can be transmitted by the same wavelength.



STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC200, FC100, GE, FE, ESCON, DVB-ASI, FICON, FICON 2G


Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane.





Description


referring to the ITU-T G.709. Supports the mapping and multiplexing of

GE/FC100/FC200/STM-1/OC-3/STM-4/OC-12/STM-16/OC-48/ESCON/ signals into OTU1 signals. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709.


WDM specification











Protection scheme

Supports the SW SNCP. Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection.



Outloop Supported


Outloop Supported




5.7.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe LQMD consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, cross-connect and service processing module, and control and communication module.

Figure 5-21 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LQMD.

Figure 5-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQMD


SCC

Backplane

100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s


module

Client-side

opticalmodule

WDM-side

opticalmodule

4

4


OTU1

OTU1100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

RX1

TX1

IN2

RX4

TX4

OUT1

OUT2IN1



rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.

In Transmit DirectionThe client-side optical module receives four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s. It converts the optical signals into electrical signals and sends them to the cross-connect and service processing module.


Multiplexes the four signals into one OTU1 signal and sends the signal to a WDM-side optical module, or

Sends the four signals to the board in the paired slot through the backplane to realize the grooming of electrical signals, or

Receives the electrical signals sent from the board in the paired slot through the backplane, multiplexes the signals into one OTU1 signal, and sends the signal to a WDM-side optical module.

The WDM-side optical module converts the electrical signal into ITU-T G.694.1-compliant standard DWDM signal or ITU-T G.694.2-compliant standard CWDM signal. This module divides the signal into two and sends the two signals to the WDM side.




In Receive DirectionThe WDM-side optical module receives two OTU1 signals at the rate of 2.5 Gbit/s and converts them into electrical signals.

The cross-connect and service processing module selects one signal and demultiplexes the signal into four signals, extracts and processes the overhead bytes, and monitors the WDM-side performance. Then, the module

Sends the four signals to the client-side optical module, or Sends the four signals to the board in the paired slot through the backplane to

realize the grooming of electrical signals, or Receives the electrical signal sent from the board in the paired slot through the

backplane and sends the signal to the client-side optical module.

The client-side optical module converts the four electrical signals into optical signals and then sends the signals to the client-side equipment.

Cross-Connect and Service Processing Module This module realizes the grooming of electrical signals between the LQMD and

the board in the paired slot through the backplane. The grooming service signals are client-side signals at the rate between 100

Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s. This module realizes the cross-connection of four service signals between the

boards in paired slots. This module selects the service. This module extracts and processes overhead bytes. This module monitors the performance of services. This module multiplexes and demultiplexes services. This module implements the encapsulation of OTN signals.




5.7.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LQMD front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 5-22 shows the LQMD front panel.




Figure 5-1 LQMD front panel

LQMD

LQMD

STATACTPROGSRV

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

TX2

RX

2TX

3R

X3

TX4

RX

4O

UT1

IN1

OU

T2IN

2TX

1R

X1



InterfacesThere are 12 optical interfaces on the LQMD front panel. Table 5-45 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 5-1 Types and functions of the LQMD interfaces

Interface Type

Function

IN1–IN2 LC Receives the single-channel signal from the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.

OUT1–OUT2 LC Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.





rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.



5.7.6 Valid SlotsThe LQMD occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LQMD are IU1–IU8 and IU11–IU16.

5.7.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMDThe characteristic code for the LQMD consists of eight digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side.


Table 5-1 Characteristic code for the LQMD








For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LQMD is 92109220.








Table 5-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LQMD displayed on the NM


IN1/OUT1 1

IN2/OUT2 2

TX1/RX1 3

TX2/RX2 4

TX3/RX3 5

TX4/RX4 6




Service Type

Laser Status


FEC Working State


Configure Band Type






LPT Enabled

5.7.9 Specifications of the LQMDSpecifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Specifications of SDH Optical Module at the Client SideNOTEI-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.

Table 5-1 Specifications of SDH optical module at the client side

Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2


Optical source type – MLM SLM SLM SLM

Target distance km 2 15 40 80



nm 1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm –3 0 3 3


dBm –10 –5 –2 –2

Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2


nm NA 1 1 1


dB NA 30 30 30



Receiver type – PIN PIN APD APD


nm 1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580





Item Unit

Value



dBm –3 0 –9 –9


Specifications of GE Optical Module at the Client SideNOTE2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.

NOTE1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.


Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type


1000 BASE-LX-10 km

1000 BASE-LX-40 km

1000 BASE-ZX-80 km





nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580


dBm –2.5 –3 0 5


dBm –9.5 –11.5 –4.5 –2


dB 9 9 9 9







Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type


1000 BASE-LX-10 km

1000 BASE-LX-40 km

1000 BASE-ZX-80 km


nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580



dBm 0 –3 –3 –3

Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client SideNOTE1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM4, ESCON, STM1, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM4, ESCON, STM1, FE, DVB-ASI.

NOTE2.5Gbit/sMulti-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access STM16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM4, ESCON, STM1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM4, ESCON, STM1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.


Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type







nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611


dBm 5 5


dBm 0 0


dB 9 8.2


nm ±6.5 ±6.5




Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type




nm 1.0 1.0


dB 30 30





nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620



dBm –3 –9

Maximum reflectance

dB –27 –27



Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type

12800 ps/nm- PIN

12800 ps/nm-APD

6500 ps/nm- PIN






dBm –4 –4 0 0 0


dBm –8 –8 –5 –5 –5


dB 10 10 8.2 8.2 10





Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type

12800 ps/nm- PIN

12800 ps/nm-APD

6500 ps/nm- PIN




GHz ±10


nm 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.2


dB 35 35 30 30 35


Eye pattern mask – G.957 - compliant




nm 1200 to 1650



dBm 0 –9 0 –9 –9




Item Unit Value













Item Unit Value















TN11LQMD Fixed(2.5G) (12800 ps/nm-PIN12800 ps/nm-APD6500 ps/nm-PIN3200 ps/nm-2mW-APD)

54.9 60.4


59.1 65.1

5.8 LQMSLQMS: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) wavelength conversion unit, single fed and single receiving




5.8.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the LQMS board is available, that is TN11.

5.8.2 ApplicationThe LQMS is a type of optical transponder unit. The LQMS realizes the conversion between signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s–2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.

For the position of the LQMS in the WDM system, see Figure 5-23.

Figure 5-1 Position of the LQMS in the WDM system

MUX

DMUX

LQMS

DMUX

MUX

LQMS

1

4

1

4

G.694.1/G.694.2

G.694.1/G.694.2

100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s 100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

Client side WDMside

WDMside Client side



rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.

5.8.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the LQMS are wavelength conversion, cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.


Table 5-1 Functions and features of the LQMS


Description

Basic function Multiplexes four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s into a 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal and converts it into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process is similar. With this board, many services, such as the data services (Ethernet services), SAN services (ESCON, FC/FICON), video services (DVB), and voice services (SDH/SONET), can be transmitted by the same wavelength.







Description


Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane.


referring to the ITU-T G.709. Supports the mapping and multiplexing of

GE/FC100/FC200/STM-1/OC-3/STM-4/OC-12/STM-16/OC-48/ESCON/ signals into OTU1 signals. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709.


WDM specification











Protection scheme

Supports the SW SNCP. Supports the client-side 1+1 protection.



Outloop Supported






Description

Outloop Supported

5.8.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe LQMS consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, cross-connect and service processing module, and control and communication module.

Figure 5-24 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LQMS.

Figure 5-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQMS


SCC

Backplane


module

Client-side

opticalmodule

WDM-side

opticalmodule

4

4

100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/sClient side WDM side

OTU1

OTU1100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

RX1

TX1IN

RX4

TX4

OUT



rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.

In Transmit DirectionThe client-side optical module receives four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s. It converts the optical signals into electrical signals and sends them to the cross-connect and service processing module.


Multiplexes the four signals into one OTU1 signal and sends the signal to a WDM-side optical module, or

Sends the four signals to the board in the paired slot through the backplane to realize the grooming of electrical signals, or




Receives the electrical signals sent from the board in the paired slot through the backplane, multiplexes the signals into one OTU1 signal, and sends the signal to a WDM-side optical module.

The WDM-side optical module converts the electrical signal into ITU-T G.694.1-compliant standard DWDM signal or ITU-T G.694.2-compliant standard CWDM signal and sends the signal to the WDM side.

In Receive DirectionThe WDM-side optical module receives a OTU1 optical signal at the rate of 2.5 Gbit/s and converts them into electrical signals.

The cross-connect and service processing module demultiplexes the signal into four signals, extracts and processes the overhead bytes, and monitors the WDM-side performance. Then, the module

Sends the four signals to the client-side optical module, or Sends the four signals to the board in the paired slot through the backplane to

realize the grooming of electrical signals, or Receives the electrical signal sent from the board in the paired slot through the

backplane and sends the signal to the client-side optical module.

The client-side optical module converts the four electrical signals into optical signals and then sends the signals to the client-side equipment.

Cross-Connect and Service Processing Module This module realizes the grooming of electrical signals between the LQMS and

the board in the paired slot through the backplane. The grooming service signals are client-side signals at the rate between 100

Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s. This module realizes the cross-connection of four service signals between the





5.8.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LQMS front panel.




Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 5-25 shows the LQMS front panel.

Figure 5-1 LQMS front panel

LQMS

LQMS

STATACTPROGSRV

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

RX

2TX

3R

X3

TX4

RX

4O

UT

INTX

1R

X1

TX2






InterfacesThere are 10 optical interfaces on the LQMS front panel. Table 5-54 lists the type and function of each interface.

Table 5-1 Types and functions of the LQMS interfaces

Interface

Type

Function







rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.



5.8.6 Valid SlotsThe LQMS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LQMS are IU1–IU8 and IU11–IU16.

5.8.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMSThe board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on.







Table 5-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LQMS displayed on the NM


IN/OUT 1

TX1/RX1 3

TX2/RX2 4

TX3/RX3 5

TX4/RX4 6




Service Type

Laser Status


FEC Working State


Configure Band Type



LPT Enabled

5.8.9 Specifications of the LQMSSpecifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Specifications of SDH Optical Module at the Client SideNOTEI-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.





Item Unit

Value







nm 1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm –3 0 3 3


dBm –10 –5 –2 –2



nm NA 1 1 1


dB NA 30 30 30





nm 1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580



dBm –3 0 –9 –9


Specifications of GE Optical Module at the Client SideNOTE2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.






Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type


1000 BASE-LX-10 km

1000 BASE-LX-40 km

1000 BASE-ZX-80 km





nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm –2.5 –3 0 5


dBm –9.5 –11.5 –4.5 –2


dB 9 9 9 9





nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm –17 –19 –20 –22


dBm 0 –3 –3 –3







Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type







nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611


dBm 5 5


dBm 0 0


dB 9 8.2


nm ±6.5 ±6.5


nm 1.0 1.0


dB 30 30





nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620



dBm –3 –9

Maximum reflectance

dB –27 –27






Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type

12800 ps/nm- PIN

12800 ps/nm-APD

6500 ps/nm- PIN






dBm –1 –1 3 3 3


dBm –5 –5 –2 –2 –2




GHz ±10


nm 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.2


dB 35 35 30 30 35






nm 1200 to 1650



dBm 0 –9 0 –9 –9







Item Unit Value


























TN11LQMS Fixed(2.5G) (12800 ps/nm-PIN12800 ps/nm-APD6500 ps/nm-PIN3200 ps/nm-2mW-APD)

53.2 58.5


57.8 63.6

5.9 LSXLSX: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit

5.9.1 Version DescriptionTwo functional versions of the LSX board are available: TN11 and TN12. The main difference between the two versions lies in whether the board of different versions supports the FC-1000 service.

Table 5-61lists the version description of the LSX.

Table 5-1 Version description of the LSX

Item Description

Functional version

Two functional versions of the LSX board are available: TN11 and TN12.

Similarity Supports to process the STM-64, OC-192, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN and OTU2 services.

Difference The TN12LSX board supports FC1200 service.

Replacement The TN12LSX board can replace the TN11LSX board, but after the replacement, the SCC software need be upgraded.The TN11LSX board, however, cannot replace the TN12LSX board.




5.9.2 ApplicationThe LSX is a type of optical transponder unit, serving to map one channel of 10 Gbit/s service signals into OTU2 or OTU2v signals and realizing the conversion between the 10 Gbit/s service signal and the ITU-T Recommendation-compliant.

For the position of the LSX in the WDM system, see Figure 5-26.

Figure 5-1 Position of the LSX in the WDM system

MUX

DMUX

LSX

DMUX

MUX

LSXG.694.1 G.694.1

10GE LAN /10GE WAN /STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/


FC1200

10GE LAN /10GE WAN /STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/FC1200

NOTE Client-side service type of the TN11LSX is 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192 and

OTU2. Client-side service type of the TN12LSX is 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192,

OTU2 and FC1200.

5.9.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the LSX are wavelength conversion, OTN interfaces and ESC.


Table 5-1 Functions and features of the LSX


Description

Basic function Serving to map one channel of 10 Gbit/s service signals into OTU2 or OTU2v signals and realizing the conversion between the 10Gbit/s service signal and the ITU-T Recommendation-compliant


TN11LSX: 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2TN12LSX: 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2, FC1200





Description


referring to the ITU-T G.709. Supports the mapping of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-

192/OTU2 into OTU2/OTU2V signals, and the transparence mapping of 10GE LAN into OTU2V signals.

Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. Supports TCM function for ODU2. Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU2.

WDM specification

Supports DWDM specifications.



GHz 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50 GHz






Protection scheme

Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection. Supports the OWSP protection.

XFP Supports the 10 Gbit/s small form-factor pluggable optical module on the client side.


Outloop Supported


Outloop Supported




5.9.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe LSX consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service processing module, and control and communication module.

Figure 5-27 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LSX.

Figure 5-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSX

WDM-side

opticalmodule


SCC

Serviceprocessing

module

Client-side

opticalmodule

Client side WDM side10GE LAN/10GE

WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2

OTU2/OTU2v

OTU2/OTU2v10GE LAN/10GE

WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2

RX

TX IN

OUT

FC1200

FC1200

NOTE Client-side service type of the tn11LSX is 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192 and

OTU2. Client-side service type of the tn12LSX is 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2

and FC1200.

In Transmit DirectionThe client-side optical module receives a 10 Gbit/s signal (for example, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2), and converts the signal into an electrical one before sending it to the service processing module.

The service processing module monitors the performance of the client-side services and converts the signal into the OTU2 or OTU2v signal needed by the client side, before sending it to the WDM-side optical module.

The WDM-side optical module converts the electrical signal into the standard DWDM signal compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 and sends the signal to the WDM side.

In Receive DirectionThe WDM-side optical module receives one OTU2 or OTU2v optical signal and converts it into an electrical signal.

The service processing module converts the signal into the 10 Gbit/s signal, extracts and processes the overhead bytes, and monitors the WDM-side performance. Then the signal is sent to the client-side optical module.

The client-side optical module converts the electrical signal into an optical signal and sends the converted signal to the client-side equipment.




Service Processing Module This module extracts and processes overhead bytes. This module monitors the performance of services. This module implements the encapsulation of OTN signals.




5.9.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LSX front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 5-28 shows the LSX front panel.




Figure 5-1 LSX front panel

LSX

LSX

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

STATACTPROGSRV

OU

TIN

TXR

X



InterfacesThere are four optical interfaces on the LSX front panel. Table 5-63 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 5-1 Types and functions of the LSX interfaces

Interface

Type

Function



TX LC Transmits the service signal to the client-side equipment.

RX LC Receives the service signal from the client-side equipment.



5.9.6 Valid SlotsThe LSX occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LSX are IU1–IU17.

5.9.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXThe board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on.




Table 5-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LSX displayed on the NM


IN/OUT 1

TX/RX 3







Service Type

Port Mapping

Laser Status


FEC Working State

FEC Type

PAUSE Frame Flow Control


Configure Band Type

LPT Enabled

5.9.9 Specifications of the LSXSpecifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Specifications of Optical Module at the Client SideNOTE10 Gbit/s Multi-rate -10km module and 10 Gbit/s Multi-rate -40km module can be used to access OC192, STM-64, 10GE, and OTU2 signals. The specifications listed following completely apply to OTU2 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OC192, STM-64, or 10GE signals.

Table 5-1 Specifications of optical module at the client side

Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

10 Gbit/s Multirate -10km


10Gbit/s Multirate -80km

10Gbit/s Single rate -0.3km

Line code format

– NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ

Optical source type

– SLM SLM SLM MLM




Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type



10Gbit/s Multirate -80km

10Gbit/s Single rate -0.3km

Target distance km 10 40 80 0.3



nm 1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1530 to 1565

840 to 860


dBm –1 2 4 –1.3


dBm –6 –1 0 –7.3


dB 6 8.2 9 3


nm NA NA NA NA


dB 30 30 30 30

Eye pattern mask

– G.691-compliant


Receiver type – PIN PIN APD PIN


nm 1290 to 1330

1530 to 1565

1270 to 1600

840 to 860


dBm –11 –14 –24 –7.5


dBm 0.5 –1 –7 –1

Maximum reflectance

dB NA NA NA NA






Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type







dBm 2 4 2


dBm –3 0 –3


dB 10 9 10



GHz ±10 ±10 ±5


nm 0.3 0.3 0.3


dB 35 35 35





nm 1200 to 1650


dBm –16 –26 –16


dBm 0 –9 0






Item Unit Value











dBm 2 2 2 2


dBm –3 –3 –3 –3



Central frequency deviation GHz ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5


nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3


dB 35 35 35 35






dBm –16 –26 –26 –16

Minimum receiver overload dBm 0 –9 –9 0







Power ConsumptionPower Consumption of TN11LSX

Board Optical Module Type The maximum power consumption at 25


TN11LSX NRZ-fixed(10G)(800 ps/nm-40 channels fixed1600 ps/nm-40 channels fixed

47.7 52.3


47.9 52.5


49.7 52.7


52.7 55.7

Power Consumption of TN12LSX

Board Optical Module Type The maximum power consumption at 25


TN12LSX NRZ-fixed(10G) (800 ps/nm-40 channels fixed1600 ps/nm-40 channels fixed

32.0 38.4

NRZ-tunable(10G) (1200 ps/nm-PIN-80 channels tunable1200 ps/nm-APD-80 channels tunable)

32.2 38.6


34.0 40.8


36.0 43.2




5.10 LSXLLSXL: 40Gbit/s wavelength conversion board

5.10.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the LSXL board is available, that is TN11.

5.10.2 ApplicationThe LSXL is a type of optical transponder unit. The LSXL realizes the conversion between one STM-256/OC-768 signal and ITU-T G.692 Recommendation-compliant OTU3 signal.

For the position of the LSXL in the WDM system, see Figure 5-29.

Figure 5-1 Position of the LSXL in the WDM system

Client sideWDM side

MUX

DMUX

LSXL

DMUX

MUX

LSXLG.692 G.692STM-256/OC-768

STM-256/OC-768


5.10.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the LSXL are tunable wavelength function, OTN interfaces and ESC function.


Table 5-1 Functions and features of the LSXL


Description

Basic function Maps one STM-256/OC-768 signal into one OTU3 optical signal and converts the signal into ITU-T G.692-compliant standard DWDM wavelength. It also performs the reverse process.


STM-256, OC-768





Description


by referring to the ITU-T G.709. Supports the mapping of STM-256/OC-768 signals into

OTU3/OTU3V signals. Supports SM and PM functions for OTU3 and ODU3. Supports TCM function for ODU3.




GHz 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 50

GHz


FEC encoding Adopts FEC encoding and AFEC encoding.






Protection scheme Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection. Supports the OWSP protection.

Loopback Client side Inloop Not supported

Outloop Not supported

WDM side Inloop Supported

Outloop Supported




5.10.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe LSXL consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service processing module, and control and communication module.

Figure 5-30 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LSXL.

Figure 5-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSXL

SCC


STM-256/OC-768 OTU3

OTU3 STM-256/OC-768

RX

TX IN

OUTClient-side

opticalmodule

serviceprocessing

module


WDM-side

opticalmodule

In Transmit DirectionThe client-side optical module receives one STM-256/OC-768 signal, and converts the signal into an electrical one before sending it to the service processing module.

The service processing module encodes the client-side services and monitors the performance of the services.

The WDM-side optical module converts the electrical signal into the standard DWDM signal compliant with ITU-T G.692 and sends the signal to the WDM side.

In Receive DirectionThe WDM-side optical module receives one OTU3 optical signal and converts it into an electrical signal.

The service processing module provides tunable dispersion compensation for the signal followed by a series of signal processing activities: FEC/AFEC correction, overhead processing and performance monitoring. Then it demaps the signal into one STM-256 signal at rate of 39.813 Gbit/s and sends the STM-256 signal to the client-side optical module.

The client-side optical module converts the electrical signal into an optical signal and sends the converted signal to the client-side equipment.

Service Processing Module Adds, drops and processes overhead. Monitors the performance of services. Maps and demaps STM-256/OC-768 services.







5.10.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LSXL front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 5-31 shows the LSXL front panel.

Figure 5-1 LSXL front panel

LSXL

LSXL

STATACTPROGSRV

TXR

X

OU

TIN

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT






InterfacesThere are 4 optical interfaces on the LSXL front panel. Table 5-69 lists the type and function of each interface.

Table 5-1 Types and functions of the LSXL interfaces

Interface

Type

Function







5.10.6 Valid SlotsThe LSXL occupies four slots. The valid slots for the LSXL are IU1–IU14 in the subrack.

The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot number of the LSXL board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the four occupied slots.

For example, if the LSXL occupies slots IU1, IU2, IU3 and IU4, the slot number of the LSXL displayed on the NM is IU1.

5.10.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXLThe board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on.







Table 5-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LSXL displayed on the NM


IN/OUT 1

TX/RX 3




Laser Status


Service Type

FEC Working State

FEC Type


Configure Band Type

5.10.9 Specifications of the LSXLSpecifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.




Specifications of Optical Module at the client Side


Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type Transponder





Minimum mean launched power dBm 0





Receiver type – PIN



Minimum receiver overload dBm 3




Item Unit Value


Line code format – ODB Tunable DRZ Tunable


Operating frequency range THz 192.10 to 196.05

192.10 to 196.00


Minimum mean launched power dBm –5 –5

Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2 8.2

Central frequency deviation GHz ±5 ±5




Item Unit Value


Maximum –20 dB spectral width nm 0.6 0.95


dB 35 NA

Dispersion tolerance ps/nm ±400 ±400




Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL dBm -14 -14

Minimum receiver overload (FEC on)

dBm 0 0


Mechanical SpecificationsThe LSXL consists of three main boards: board A, board B and board C. The mechanical dimension of each main board is provided below:

Board A: 235.0 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2.2 mm (T) Board B: 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) Board C: 73.5 mm (H) x 72 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 101.6 mm (W) Weight: 11.02 lb (5 kg)

Power ConsumptionBoard Optical Module Type The

maximum power consumption at 25


TN11LSXL DRZ-tunable(40G)(Transponder) 103.0 110.0

ODB-tunable(40G)(Transponder)

98.0 105.0




5.11 LSXLRLSXLR: 40Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit

5.11.1 Version DescriptionThe available hardware versions of the LSXLR is TN11.

5.11.2 ApplicationThe LSXLR is a type of optical transponder unit. Used in an electrical REG station in the system, the LSXLR realizes the electrical regeneration of the corresponding optical signal.

For the position of the LSXLR in the WDM system, see Figure 5-32.

Figure 5-1 Position of the LSXLR in the WDM system

WDM side

DMUX

MUX LSXLR

MUX

DMUX

G. 692 G. 692

LSXLR

WDM side

5.11.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the LSXLR are tunable wavelength function, OTN interfaces and ESC.


Table 5-1 Functions and features of the LSXLR


Description

Basic function The board is used in an electrical REG station in the system, realizing the electrical regeneration of corresponding optical signals.

Regenerating rate OTU3/OTU3V





Description

OTN function Provides the OTU3/OTU3V interface on WDM-side. Supports the OTN frame format and overhead

processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. Supports SM and PM functions for OTU3 and ODU3. Supports TCM function for ODU3. Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for

ODU3.



Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the board can tune the optical signal output at the WDM side within the range of: 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of

100 GHz 80 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of

50 GHz


FEC encoding Adopts FEC encoding and AFEC encoding.






Protection scheme Not supported

Loopback Not supported

5.11.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe LSXLR consists of WDM-side optical module, the electrical regenerating module, and control and communication module.

Figure 5-33 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LSXLR.




Figure 5-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSXLR

WDM side

SCC

Electricalregenerating

module

IN

OUT

WDM-side

opticalmodule

Control andcommunication module

Signal FlowAs a unidirectional electrical regenerating board, the LSXLR processes only one channel. The WDM-side optical module receives one standard DWDM OTU3 signal compliant with the ITU-T G.692 and converts it into an electrical signal.

Then, the electrical signal is reshaped, regenerated and retimed by the electrical regenerating module before being sent back to the WDM-side optical module. The WDM-side optical module converts the electrical signal into a standard DWDM OTU3 signal compliant with the ITU-T G.692 and sends the converted signal to the WDM side.

Electrical Regenerating ModuleThe electrical regenerating module reshapes, regenerates and retimes the electrical signal.




5.11.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LSXLR front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 5-34 shows the LSXLR front panel.




Figure 5-1 LSXLR front panel

LSXLR

LSXLR

STATACTPROGSRV

OU

TIN

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT



InterfacesThere are 2 optical interfaces on the LSXLR front panel. Table 5-74 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 5-1 Types and functions of the LSXLR interfaces

Interface

Type

Function





5.11.6 Valid SlotsThe LSXLR occupies four slots. The valid slots for the LSXLR are IU1–IU14 in the subrack.

The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot number of the LSXLR board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the four occupied slots.

For example, if the LSXLR occupies slots IU1, IU2, IU3 and IU4, the slot number of the LSXLR displayed on the NM is IU1.

5.11.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXLRThe board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on.




Table 5-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LSXLR displayed on the NM


IN 1

OUT 2






Laser Status


FEC Working State


Configure Band Type

5.11.9 Specifications of the LSXLRSpecifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.



Item Unit Value


Line code format – ODB Tunable DRZ Tunable


Operating frequency range THz 192.10 to 196.05

192.10 to 196.00


Minimum mean launched power dBm –5 –5

Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2 8.2

Central frequency deviation GHz ±5 ±5

Maximum –20 dB spectral width nm 0.6 0.95


dB 35 NA

Dispersion tolerance ps/nm ±400 ±400






Item Unit Value



Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL dBm -14 -14

Minimum receiver overload (FEC on)

dBm 0 0


Mechanical SpecificationsThe LSXLR consists of three main boards: board A, board B and board C. The mechanical dimension of each main board is provided below:

Board A: 235.0 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2.2 mm (T) Board B: 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) Board C: 73.5 mm (H) x 72 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 101.6 mm (W) Weight: 6.72 lb (3.05 kg)

Power Consumption The maximum power consumption at 25 : 82 W The maximum power consumption at 55 : 85 W

5.12 LSXRLSXR: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit

5.12.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the LSXR board is available, that is TN11.

5.12.2 ApplicationThe LSXR is a type of optical transponder unit. Used in an electrical REG station in the system, the LSXR realizes the electrical regeneration of the corresponding optical signal.

For the position of the LSXR in the WDM system, see Figure 5-35.




Figure 5-1 Position of the LSXR in the WDM system

DMUX

MUX LSXR

MUX

DMUX

G.694.1 G.694.1

LSXR

WDM side WDM side

WDM side WDM side

5.12.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the LSXR are wavelength conversion, OTN interfaces and ESC.


Table 5-1 Functions and features of the LSXR


Description

Basic function The board is used in an electrical REG station in the system, realizing the electrical regeneration of corresponding optical signals.

Regenerating rate OTU2/OTU2V

OTN function Provides the OTU2 interface on WDM-side. Supports the OTN frame format and overhead

processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. Supports TCM function for ODU2. Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for

ODU2.

WDM specification Supports DWDM specifications.




50 GHz






Description







Protection scheme Not supported

Loopback Not supported

5.12.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe LSXR consists of WDM-side optical module, the electrical regenerating module, and control and communication module.

Figure 5-36 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LSXR.

Figure 5-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSXR

WDM side


SCC

WDM-side

opticalmodule

Electricalregenerating

module

IN

OUT

Signal FlowAs a unidirectional electrical regenerating board, the LSXR processes only one channel. The WDM-side optical module receives one standard DWDM OTU2/OTU2v signal compliant with the ITU-T G.694.1 and converts it into an electrical signal.




Then, the electrical signal is reshaped, regenerated and retimed by the electrical regenerating module before being sent back to the WDM-side optical module. The WDM-side optical module converts the electrical signal into a standard DWDM OTU2/OTU2v signal compliant with the ITU-T G.694.1 and sends the converted signal to the WDM side.

Electrical Regenerating ModuleThe electrical regenerating module reshapes, regenerates and retimes the electrical signal.




5.12.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LSXR front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 5-37 shows the LSXR front panel.




Figure 5-1 LSXR front panel

LSXR

LSXR

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

STATACTPROGSRV

OU

TIN



InterfacesThere are two optical interfaces on the LSXR front panel. Table 5-78 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 5-1 Types and functions of the LSXR interfaces

Interface

Type

Function





5.12.6 Valid SlotsThe LSXR occupies one slot. Valid slots for the LSXR are IU1–IU17.

5.12.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXRThe board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on.




Table 5-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LSXR displayed on the NM


IN/OUT 1






Laser Status


FEC Working State


Configure Band Type

5.12.9 Specifications of the LSXRSpecifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.



Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type







dBm 2 4 2


dBm –3 0 –3


dB 10 9 10



GHz ±10 ±10 ±5


nm 0.3 0.3 0.3


dB 35 35 35






Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type




nm 1200 to 1650


dBm –16 –26 –16


dBm 0 –9 0



Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type

1200 ps/nm - tunable- PIN










dBm 2 2 2 2


dBm –3 –3 –3 –3




GHz ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5


nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3


dB 35 35 35 35







Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type






nm 1200 to 1650


dBm –16 –26 –26 –16


dBm 0 –9 –9 0




Power ConsumptionBoard Optical Module Type The

maximum power consumption at 25


TN11LSXR NRZ-fixed(10G)(800 ps/nm-40 channels fixed1600 ps/nm-40 channels fixed

34.8 38.3


35.0 38.5


36.8 40.3


39.8 43.3




5.13 LWX2LWX2: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) dual-wavelength conversion board

5.13.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the LWX2 board is available, that is TN11.

5.13.2 ApplicationThe LWX2 is a type of optical transponder unit. The LWX2 realizes the conversion between two optical signals at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s and the ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.

For the position of the LWX2 in the WDM system, see Figure 5-38.

Figure 5-1 Position of the LWX2 in the WDM system

16Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

16Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

LWX2 LWX2

1

2

1

2

16Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

16Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

G.694.1/G.694.2

G.694.1/G.694.2


MUX

DMUX

DMUX

MUX

DMUX

MUX

DMUX

MUX

5.13.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the LWX2 are wavelength conversion and ESC.


Table 5-1 Functions and features of the LWX2


Description

Basic function Receives two optical signals at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s and converts them into the standard DWDM wavelengths compliant with the ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelengths compliant with the ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process is similar.


STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, FC200, FC100, GE, FE, FDDI, ESCON, DVB-ASI/SDI, FICON, FICON 2G, HDTV





Description

WDM specification









Protection scheme

Supports the client-side 1+1 protection.



Outloop Supported


Outloop Supported

5.13.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe LWX2 consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service processing module, and control and communication module.

Figure 5-39 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LWX2.




Figure 5-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWX2

OTN 5G

WDM-side

opticalmodule


SCC

Serviceprocessing

module

Client-side

opticalmodule


16Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

16Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

16Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

16Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

RX1

TX1

OUT1

IN1OUT2

IN2

RX2

TX2

In Transmit DirectionThe client-side optical module receives two signals at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s and converts the signals into electrical ones before sending them to the service processing module.

The service processing module transmits the electrical signals transparently and monitors the performance of the client-side services. Then the module sends the signals to the WDM-side optical module.

The WDM-side optical module converts the electrical signals into the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM signals or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant CWDM signals and sends the signals to the WDM side.

In Receive DirectionThe WDM-side optical module receives two optical signals at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s and converts the signals into electrical ones before sending them to the service processing module.

The service processing module transmits the electrical signals transparently, extracts and processes the overhead bytes, and monitors the performance of the WDM-side services. Then the module sends the signals to the client-side optical module.

The client-side optical module converts the electrical signals into the required optical signals at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s and sends them to the client-side equipment.

Service Processing Module This module extracts and processes overhead bytes. This module monitors the performance of services. This module transmits services transparently.







5.13.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LWX2 front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 5-40 shows the LWX2 front panel.

Figure 5-1 LWX2 front panel

LWX2

LWX2

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

STATACTPROGSRV

TX1

RX

1TX

2R

X2

OU

T1IN

1O

UT2

IN2






InterfacesThere are 8 optical interfaces on the LWX2 front panel. Table 5-83 lists the type and function of each interface.

Table 5-1 Types and functions of the LWX2 interfaces

Interface Type

Function

IN1-IN2 LC Receives the single-channel signal from the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.

OUT1-OUT2 LC Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.





5.13.6 Valid SlotsThe LWX2 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LWX2 are IU1-IU17.

5.13.7 Characteristic Code for the LWX2The characteristic code for the LWX2 consists of eight digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side.





Table 5-1 Characteristic code for the LWX2













Table 5-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LWX2 displayed on the NM


IN1/OUT1 1

IN2/OUT2 3

TX1/RX1 5

TX2/RX2 6







Service Type

Client Service Bearer Rate (M)

Laser Status


Current Bearer Rate (M)


Configure Band Type

5.13.9 Specifications of the LWX2Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Specifications of Optical Module at the Client SideNOTEI-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.

NOTE2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module is used to access FC200, GE, FC100 and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.


Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type


I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2


Optical source type – MLM MLM SLM SLM




nm 830 to 860 1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1500 to 1580




Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type


I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2


dBm –2.5 –3 0 3


dBm –9.5 –10 –5 –2


dB 9 8.2 8.2 8.2


nm NA NA 1 1


dB NA NA 30 30



Receiver type – PIN PIN PIN APD


nm 770 to 860 1200 to 1650

1200 to 1650

1200 to 1650



dBm 0 –3 0 –9

Maximum reflectance

dB NA –27 –27 –27







Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type







nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611


dBm 5 5


dBm 0 0


dB 9 8.2


nm ±6.5 ±6.5


nm 1.0 1.0


dB 30 30





nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620



dBm –3 –9

Maximum reflectance

dB –27 –27




Table 5-2 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical module at the client side

Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type

2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP DWDM)


Target distance km 120


Operating frequency range

THz 192.1 to 196.0


dBm 3


dBm 0


dB 8.5


GHz ±12.5


nm NA


dB 30

Eye pattern mask – 5% margin are required for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and equivalent OTU1 services.





dBm –9







Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type

12800ps/nm-PINa

12800ps/nm-APDa

6500 ps/nm -PIN

3200 ps/nm -2mW-APD




dBm –1 –1 3 3


dBm –5 –5 –2 –2


dB 10 10 8.2 8.2



GHz ±10


nm 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5


dB 35 35 30 30




Receiver type – PIN APD PIN APD


nm 1200 to 1650



dBm 0 –9 0 –9

Maximum reflectance

dB –27 –27 –27 –27

a: The 12800ps/nm-PIN and 12800ps/nm-APD modules do not support pilot tone modulation mode.






Item Unit Value




















Power Consumption The maximum power consumption at 25 : 38.5 W The maximum power consumption at 55 : 42.4 W




5.14 LWXDLWXD: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (double transmit)

5.14.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the LWXD board is available, that is TN11.

5.14.2 ApplicationThe LWXD is a type of optical transponder unit. The LWXD realizes the conversion between the optical signal at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s and the ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signal, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.

For the position of the LWXD in the WDM system, see Figure 5-41.

Figure 5-1 Position of the LWXD in the WDM system

LWXD LWXD16Mbit/s

-2.5Gbit/s16Mbit/s

-2.5Gbit/sMUX

DMUX

DMUX

MUX

G.694.1/G.694.2

G.694.1/G.694.2

DMUX

MUX

DMUX

MUX


5.14.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the LWXD are wavelength conversion and ESC.


Table 5-1 Functions and features of the LWXD


Description

Basic function Receives a signal at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s and converts the signal into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with the ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with the ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process is similar.






Description



WDM specification









Protection scheme

Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection.



Outloop Supported


Outloop Supported

5.14.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe LWXD consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service processing module, and control and communication module.

Figure 5-42 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LWXD.




Figure 5-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWXD

OTN 5G

WDM-side

opticalmodule


SCC

Serviceprocessing

module

Client-side

opticalmodule


16Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

16Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

16Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

16Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

RX

TX

OUT1

IN1OUT2

IN2

In Transmit DirectionThe client-side optical module receives a signal at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s and converts the signal into an electrical one before sending it to the service processing module.

The service processing module transmits the electrical signal transparently and monitors the performance of the client-side services. Then the module sends the signal to the WDM-side optical module.

The WDM-side optical module converts the electrical signal into the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM signal or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant CWDM signal. The module divides the signal into two and sends them to the WDM side.

In Receive DirectionThe WDM-side optical module receives two optical signals at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s and converts the signals into electrical signals before sending them to the service processing module.

The service processing module selects one signal and transmit it transparently. At the same time, the module extracts and processes the overhead bytes, monitors the performance of the WDM-side services, and then sends the signal to the client-side optical module.

The client-side optical module converts the electrical signal into the required optical signal at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s and sends it to the client-side equipment.

Service Processing Module This module selects services. This module extracts and processes overhead bytes. This module monitors the performance of services. This module transmits services transparently.







5.14.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LWXD front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 5-43 shows the LWXD front panel.

Figure 5-1 LWXD front panel

LWXD

LWXD

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

STATACTPROGSRV

TX1

RX

1O

UT1

IN1

OU

T2IN

2






InterfacesThere are six optical interfaces on the LWXD front panel. Table 5-92 lists the type and function of each interface.

Table 5-1 Types and functions of the LWXD interfaces

Interface Type

Function

IN1-IN2 LC Receives the single-channel signal from the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.

OUT1-OUT2 LC Transmits the single-channel signal to the optical multiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.





5.14.6 Valid SlotsThe LWXD occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LWXD are IU1–IU17.

5.14.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXDThe characteristic code for the LWXD consists of eight digits, respectively indicating the frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side.





Table 5-1 Characteristic code for the LWXD













Table 5-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LWXD displayed on the NM


IN1/OUT1 1

IN2/OUT2 2

TX/RX 3







Service Type


Laser Status




Configure Band Type

5.14.9 Specifications of the LWXDSpecifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Specifications of optical module at the client sideNOTEI-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.



Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type


I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2






nm 830 to 860 1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1500 to 1580




Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type


I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2


dBm –2.5 –3 0 3


dBm –9.5 –10 –5 –2


dB 9 8.2 8.2 8.2


nm NA NA 1 1


dB NA NA 30 30





nm 770 to 860 1200 to 1650

1200 to 1650

1200 to 1650



dBm 0 –3 0 –9

Maximum reflectance

dB NA –27 –27 –27







Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type







nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611


dBm 5 5


dBm 0 0


dB 9 8.2


nm ±6.5 ±6.5


nm 1.0 1.0


dB 30 30





nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620



dBm –3 –9

Maximum reflectance

dB –27 –27





Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type






THz 192.1 to 196.0


dBm 3


dBm 0


dB 8.5


GHz ±12.5


nm NA


dB 30






dBm –9







Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type 12800ps/nm-PINa

12800ps/nm-APDa

6500 ps/nm -PIN

3200 ps/nm -2mW-APD





dBm –4 –4 0 0 0


dBm –8 –8 –5 –5 –5




GHz ±10


nm 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.2


dB 35 35 30 30 35






nm 1200 to 1650



dBm 0 –9 0 –9 –9








Item Unit Value




















Power Consumption The maximum power consumption at 25: 35.8 W The maximum power consumption at 55: 39.4 W




5.15 LWXSLWXS: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit)

5.15.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the LWXS board is available, that is TN11.

5.15.2 ApplicationThe LWXS is a type of optical transponder unit. The LWXS realizes the conversion between the optical signal at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s and the ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signal.

For the position of the LWXS in the WDM system, see Figure 5-44

Figure 5-1 Position of the LWXS in the WDM system

MUX

DMUX

LWXS

DMUX

MUX

LWXSG.694.1/G.694.2

G.694.1/G.694.2

16Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

16Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

Client side WDMside

WDMside Client side

5.15.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the LWXS are wavelength conversion and ESC.


Table 5-1 Functions and features of the LWXS


Description

Basic function Receives a signal at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s and converts the signal into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with the ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with the ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process is similar.



WDM specification Supports the DWDM and CWDM specifications.





Description








Protection scheme Supports the client-side 1+1 protection.



Outloop Supported


Outloop Supported

5.15.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe LWXS consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service processing module, and control and communication module.

Figure 5-45 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LWXS.




Figure 5-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWXS

OTN 5G

WDM-side

opticalmodule


SCC

Serviceprocessing

module

Client-side

opticalmodule


16Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

16Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

16Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

16Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

RX

TX

OUT

IN

In Transmit DirectionThe client-side optical module receives a signal at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s and converts the signal into an electrical one before sending it to the service processing module.

The service processing module transmits the electrical signal transparently and monitors the performance of the client-side services. Then the module sends the signal to the WDM-side optical module.

The WDM-side optical module converts the electrical signal into the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM signal or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant CWDM signal and sends the signal to the WDM side.

In Receive DirectionThe WDM-side optical module receives an optical signal at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s and converts the signal into an electrical signal before sending it to the service processing module.

The service processing module transparently transmits the signal, extracts and processes the overhead bytes, and monitors the performance of the WDM-side services. Then, the module sends the signal to the client-side optical module.

The client-side optical module converts the electrical signal into the required optical signal at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s and sends it to the client-side equipment.

Service Processing Module This module extracts and processes overhead bytes. This module monitors the performance of services. This module transmits services transparently.







5.15.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the LWXS front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 5-46 shows the LWXS front panel.

Figure 5-1 LWXS front panel

LWXS

LWXS

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

STATACTPROGSRV

OU

TIN

TX1

RX

1






InterfacesThere are four optical interfaces on the LWXS front panel. Table 5-101 lists the type and function of each interface.

Table 5-1 Types and functions of the LWXS interfaces

Interface

Type

Function







5.15.6 Valid SlotsThe LWXS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the LWXS are IU1–IU17.

5.15.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXSThe board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on.







Table 5-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LWX2 displayed on the NM


IN/OUT 1

TX/RX 3




Service Type


Laser Status




Configure Band Type

5.15.9 Specifications of the LWXSSpecifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Specifications of Optical Module at the Client SideNOTEI-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.






Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type


I-16 S-16.1 L-16.2






nm 830 to 860 1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1500 to 1580


dBm –2.5 –3 0 3


dBm –9.5 –10 –5 –2


dB 9 8.2 8.2 8.2


nm NA NA 1 1


dB NA NA 30 30





nm 770 to 860 1200 to 1650

1200 to 1650

1200 to 1650



dBm 0 –3 0 –9

Maximum reflectance

dB NA –27 –27 –27







Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type







nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611


dBm 5 5


dBm 0 0


dB 9 8.2


nm ±6.5 ±6.5


nm 1.0 1.0


dB 30 30





nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620





Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type




dBm –3 –9

Maximum reflectance

dB –27 –27


Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type






THz 192.1 to 196.0


dBm 3


dBm 0


dB 8.5


GHz ±12.5


nm NA


dB 30






dBm –9




Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type








Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type 12800ps/nm-PINa

12800ps/nm-APDa

6500 ps/nm -PIN

3200 ps/nm -2mW-APD





dBm –1 –1 3 3 3


dBm –5 –5 –2 –2 –2





nm 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.2


dB 35 35 30 30 35







Minimum receiver overload dBm 0 –9 0 –9 –9








Item Unit Value
























5.16 TMXTMX: 4 channels STM-16/OTU1 asynchronism mux OTU-2 wavelength conversion board

5.16.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the TMX board is available, that is TN11.

5.16.2 ApplicationThe TMX is a type of optical transponder unit. The TMX multiplexes four STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 service signals into one OTU2 signal. It also realizes conversion between these signals and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.

For the position of the L4G in the WDM system, see Figure 5-47.

Figure 5-1 Position of the TMX in the WDM system


MUX

DMUX

TMX

DMUX

MUX

TMX

1

4

1

4

G.694.1 G.694.1


STM-16/OC-48/OTU1

STM-16/OC-48/OTU1

5.16.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the TMX are wavelength conversion, OTN interfaces and ESC.


Table 5-1 Functions and features of the TMX


Description

Basic function Multiplexes four channels of STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 service optical signals into one channel of OTU2 optical signals and converse them to DWDM standard wavelength that comply with ITU-T Recommendation G.694.1. It can also perform the reverse process.


STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 (without FEC)





Description


processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. Supports 4×ODU1 asynchronous multiplexing into

ODU2. Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1. Supports TCM function for ODU1. Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for

ODU1.





50 GHz








Protection scheme Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection. Supports the OWSP protection.



Outloop Supported






Description

Outloop Supported

5.16.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe TMX consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service processing module, and control and communication module.

Figure 5-48 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TMX.

Figure 5-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the TMX

WDM-side

opticalmodule


SCC

Serviceprocessing

module

Client-side

opticalmodule

OTU2


4

4

4

4 OTU2

STM-16/OC-48/OTU1

STM-16/OC-48/OTU1

In Transmit DirectionThe client-side optical module receives four STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 service optical signals. It converts the optical signals into electrical signals and sends them to the service processing module.

The service processing module monitors the performance of client-side services. Then it multiplexes the signals into one OTU2 signal and sends the signal to a WDM-side optical module.


In Receive DirectionThe WDM-side optical module receives one OTU2 optical signal and converts the it into electrical signal.

The service processing module extracts and processes the overhead bytes, monitors the WDM-side performance, and demultiplexes the signal into four STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 service electrical signals.





Service Processing Module This module extracts and processes overhead bytes. This module monitors the performance of services. This module multiplexes and demultiplexes services. This module implements the encapsulation of OTN signals.




5.16.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TMX front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 5-49 shows the TMX front panel.




Figure 5-1 TMX front panel

STATACTPROGSRV

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

TX1

RX

1TX

2R

X2

TX3

RX

3TX

4R

X4

OU

TIN

TMX

TMX



InterfacesThere are 10 optical interfaces on the TMX front panel.Table 5-109 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 5-1 Types and functions of the TMX interfaces

Interface

Type

Function







5.16.6 Valid SlotsThe TMX occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TMX are IU1–IU17.

5.16.7 Characteristic Code for the TMXThe board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on.




Table 5-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TMX displayed on the NM


IN/OUT 1

TX1/RX1 3

TX2/RX2 4

TX3/RX3 5




TX4/RX4 6




Service Type

Laser Status


FEC Working State

FEC Type


Configure Band Type

5.16.9 Specifications of the TMXSpecifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Specifications of optical module at the client side


Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type I-16 S-16.1

L-16.1 L-16.2






1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm –3 0 3 3




Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type I-16 S-16.1

L-16.1 L-16.2


dBm –10 –5 –2 –2



nm NA 1 1 1


dB NA 30 30 30





1270 to 1580

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


Minimum receiver overload dBm –3 0 –9 –9


Remark - These modules access STM-16 and OTU1 services. The indexes listed in the table above are applicable for the STM-16 services. When the module accesses OTU1 services, the indexes are slightly different.


Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate (eSFP CWDM)











Item Unit

Value




dB 30








Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type






THz 192.1 to 196.0


dBm 3


dBm 0


dB 8.5


GHz ±12.5


nm NA


dB 30





Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type






dBm –9


Specifications of optical module at the DWDM side


Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type







dBm 2 4 2


dBm –3 0 –3


dB 10 9 10



GHz ±10 ±10 ±5


nm 0.3 0.3 0.3


dB 35 35 35







Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type



nm 1200 to 1650


dBm –16 –26 –16


dBm 0 –9 0



Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type











dBm 2 2 2 2


dBm –3 –3 –3 –3


dB 10 10 NAa 10



GHz ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5


nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3


dB 35 35 35 35







Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type






nm 1200 to 1650


dBm –16 –26 –26 –16


dBm 0 –9 –9 0










TN11TMX NRZ-fixed(10G) (800 ps/nm-40 channels fixed1600 ps/nm-40 channels fixed

40.3 44.3


42.1 46.4


42.4 46.6


46.5 51.2




6 Tributary Unit and Line Unit

6.1 NS2NS2: 4 x ODU1 multiplexing OTU2 optical interface unit

6.1.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the NS2 board is available, that is TN11.

6.1.2 ApplicationThe NS2 is a type of line unit. The NS2 realizes the conversion between four cross-connect ODU1 signals and the ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM OTU2 signals.

For the position of the NS2 in the WDM system, see Figure 6-1.

Figure 6-1 Position of the NS2 in the WDM system

MUX

DMUX

NS2

DMUX

MUX

1

4

1

4

G.694.1 G.694.1TQS NS2 TQS

1

4

1

4


6.1.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the NS2 are cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.





Table 6-1 Functions and features of the NS2

Function and feature

Description

Basic function Maps four ODU1 signals sent from the cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot into an OTU2 signal and converts the signal into a standard DWDM signal compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.


Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals between the NS2 and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot.


processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. Supports 4×ODU1 asynchronous multiplexing into

ODU2. Supports SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2. Supports TCM function for ODU1 and ODU2. Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for

ODU1.





50 GHz


FEC encoding Adopts FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975 and AFEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.1.






Protection scheme Supports the ODUk SNCP.




Function and feature

Description


Outloop Supported

Client side Not supported

Path Loopback Supported

6.1.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe NS2 consists of the WDM-side optical module, cross-connect and service processing module, and control and communication module.

Figure 6-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the NS2.

Figure 6-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the NS2

WDM-side

opticalmodule


SCC

Backplane

ODU1


module

WDM side

OTU2

OTU2OUT

IN

In Transmit DirectionThe WDM-side optical module receives one OTU2 optical signal and converts it into an electrical signal before sending it to the cross-connect and service processing module.

The cross-connect and service processing module monitors the performance of the services. Then, it demultiplexes the OTU2 signal into four ODU1 signals and sends them to the cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane to realize the grooming of electrical signals.

In Receive DirectionThe cross-connect and service processing board receives the electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot, extracts and processes overhead bytes, and monitors the performance of signals. Then, the signals are multiplexed into an OTU2 electrical signal and sent to the WDM-side optical module.




The WDM-side optical module converts the electrical signal into an optical signal and outputs the standard DWDM signal compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM signal compliant with ITU-T G.694.2.

Cross-Connect and Service Processing Module This module realizes the grooming of electrical signals between the NS2 and the

board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1 signals. This module realizes the cross-connection of four service signals. This module extracts and processes overhead bytes. This module monitors the performance of services. This module multiplexes and demultiplexes services. This module implements the encapsulation of OTN signals.




6.1.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the NS2 front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 6-3 shows the NS2 front panel.




Figure 6-1 NS2 front panel

NS2

NS2

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

STATACTPROGSRV

OU

TIN



InterfacesThere are two optical interfaces on the NS2 front panel. Table 6-2 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 6-1 Types and functions of the NS2 interfaces

Interface

Type

Function





6.1.6 Valid SlotsThe NS2 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the NS2 are IU1–IU8 and IU11–IU16.

6.1.7 Characteristic Code for the NS2The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on.

For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.3 Characteristic Code for Line Unit.



Table 6-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the NS2 displayed on the NM


IN/OUT 1







Laser Status


FEC Working State

FEC Type


Configure Band Type

Path Loopback

6.1.9 Specifications of the NS2Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.



Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type







dBm 2 4 2


dBm –3 0 –3


dB 10 9 10



GHz ±10 ±10 ±5


nm 0.3 0.3 0.3




Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type



dB 35 35 35





nm 1200 to 1650


dBm –16 –26 –16


dBm 0 –9 0



Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type











dBm 2 2 2 2


dBm –3 –3 –3 –3


dB 10 10 NAa 10



GHz ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5


nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3




Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type






dB 35 35 35 35





nm 1200 to 1650


dBm –16 –26 –26 –16


dBm 0 –9 –9 0

Maximum reflectance

dB –27 –27 –27 –27






TN11NS2 NRZ-fixed(10G) (800 ps/nm-40 channels fixed1600 ps/nm-40 channels fixed)

38.0 41.8


39.0 42.9




Board Optical Module Type




41.0 45.1


44.0 48.4

6.2 TBETBE: 10 Gigabit Ethernet tributary board

6.2.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the TBE board is available, that is TN11.

6.2.2 ApplicationThe TBE is a type of tributary unit. Converges eight GE services and a maximum of 16 cross-connect GE services into one 10GE service and deconverges one 10GE service into multiple GE services; converges multiple flat-rate GE services into one full-rate GE service; realizes transparent transmission of GE-GE services.

Application Scenario 1: Converging/Deconverging 8xGE Services and a Maximum of 16 Cross-Connect GE Services to/from One 10GE Services

For the position of the TBE in the WDM system, see Figure 6-4.




Figure 6-1 Position of the TBE in the WDM system

TBE8×GEGE

GE

10GE

OADM A OADM B

Local client side

GE

Application Scenario 2: Transparent Transmission of GE-GE ServicesFor the position of the TBE in the WDM system, see Figure 6-5.

Figure 6-1 Position of the TBE in the WDM system

4

G.694.1GE

GE

TBE

L4G

L4G

GE

G.694.1 GE

TBE

L4G

L4G

GE

8

GE1

8

11

GE GE

Client side WDM sideWDM side Client side

MUX

DMUX

DMUX

MUX4

1

4

1

4

1

6.2.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main function and feature supported by the TBE is cross-connection at the electrical layer and ALS.





Table 6-1 Functions and features of the TBE


Description

Basic function Converges eight GE services and a maximum of 16 cross-connect GE services into one 10GE service and deconverges one 10GE service into multiple GE services.

Converges multiple flat-rate GE services into one full-rate GE service.

Realizes transparent transmission of GE-GE services.The reverse process is similar.


FE optical signal, FE electric signal, GE optical signal, GE electric signal, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN


Supports cross-connecting eight GE signals to the central working/protection cross-connect board.

Supports the cross-connection of eight GE signals between the TBE and the board in the paired slot through the backplane.


Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the 10GE WAN.


QinQ Supports Stacking VLAN.

QoS (Quality of Service)

Supports CAR (committed access rate) and CoS (class of service).

ETH OAM Supports IEEE802.1ah-compliant ETH OAM protocol.

LAG (Link Aggregation Group)

Supports the aggregation group protocol to aggregate services from IP port to Trunk port; supports manual and static link aggregation; supports payload equalization and non-payload equalization.

VLAN broadcast Supports VLAN-based service group broadcast.

CVLAN group port Supports a group of CVLAN to be used as one VLAN.

Layer 2 switching Supports the MAC address learning and aging.

Flow control Supports IEEE802.3X-compliant Ethernet flow control protocol and flow control termination.

EPL (Ethernet Private Line)

Provides point-to-point EPL dedicated line.

EVPL (Ethernet Virtual Private Line)

Provides point-to-multipoint EVPL dedicated line and supports VLAN-based switching.





Description

Port working mode

10GE optical interface: 10GE-LAN, 10GE-WANGE optical interface: 1000MFULL, auto-negotiationGE electric interface: auto-negotiationFE optical interface: 100MFULLFE electric interface: 10MHALF, 10MFULL, 100MHALF, 100MFULL, auto-negotiation

Protection scheme Supports the intra-board 1+1 protection. Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the SW SNCP. Supports the VLAN SNCP. 10GE optical interface /GE optical interface /FE optical

interface: Supports the BPS protection.



Loopback 10GE optical interface

MAC Inloop Supported

Outloop Supported

PHY Inloop Supported

Outloop Supported

GE optical interface





GE electric interface




Outloop Supported

FE optical interface





FE electric interface







Description


Outloop Supported

6.2.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe TBE consists of the client-side GE module, client-side 10GE module, L2 module, GE service cross-connect module, and control and communication module.

Figure 6-6 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TBE.

Figure 6-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the TBE

SCC

Backplane

GE

GE servicecross-

connectmodule

Client-side GEmodule

10GE

GE8

8 L2module

16

16

RX1TX1RX8TX8

RXTX

10GEside 10GE

module

16

Client-


Client side

In Transmit DirectionThe client-side optical module receives eight GE service signals. These GE signals are converted into electrical signals and sent to the L2 module.

The GE service cross-connect module receives a maximum of 24 GE electrical signals, and then transmits the electrical signals to the L2 module.

The L2 module multiplexes the electrical signals into one 10GE signal and then transmits the 10GE signal to the client-side 10GE module; or the L2 board converges multiple channels into one GE signal and then transmits it to the client-side GE optical module or GE service cross-connect module.

The WDM-side GE module converts the GE electrical signal into the GE optical signal, and sends the optical signal to the WDM side through TX1-TX8, or the WDM-side 10GE module converts the 10GE electrical signal into the 10GE optical signal, and sends the optical signal to the WDM side through TX.




In Receive DirectionThe client-side 10GE module receives an 10GE optical signal, converts it into an electrical signal, and sends the converted signal to the L2 module.

The L2 module demultiplexes the electrical signal into multiple channels of GE signals and then transmits them to the GE service cross-connect module or the client-side GE optical module.

The GE service cross-connect module transmits the GE signals to the cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane.

The client-side GE module converts eight GE electrical signals into optical signals and sends them to the client-side equipment.

GE Service Cross-Connect Module This module realizes the grooming of electrical signals between the TBE and the

cross-connect board or the boards in paired slots through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals. This module realizes the cross-connection of eight GE signals between the

boards in paired slots. This module realizes cross-connecting eight GE signals to the central

working/protection cross-connect board through the backplane.




6.2.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TBE front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 6-7 shows the TBE front panel.




Figure 6-1 TBE front panel

TBE

TBE

STATACTPROGSRV

RX

2TX

3R

X3

TX4

RX

4TX

1R

X1

TX2

RX

6TX

7R

X7

TX8

RX

8TX

5R

X5

TX6

TXR

X

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT



InterfacesThere are eighteen optical interfaces on the TBE front panel. Table 6-7 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 6-1 Types and functions of the TBE interfaces

Interface

Type

Function

TX1-TX8 LC Transmits the GE service signal to the client-side equipment.

TX LC Transmits the 10 GE service signal to the client-side equipment.

RX1-RX8 LC Receives the GE service signal from the client-side equipment.

RX LC Receives the 10 GE service signal from the client-side equipment.



6.2.6 Valid SlotsThe TBE occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TBE are IU1–IU8 and IU11–IU16.



Table 6-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TBE displayed on the NM


TX1/RX1 3

TX2/RX2 4

TX3/RX3 5

TX4/RX4 6

TX5/RX5 7

TX6/RX6 8

TX7/RX7 9

TX8/RX8 10





TX/RX 11


Configuration ParametersLaser Status



Configure Band Type

LPT Enabled

6.2.8 Specifications of the TBESpecifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.


Table 6-1 Specifications of optical module at the client side(FE)

Item Unit

Value


100BASE-FX1310 nm





dBm 0 –14


dBm –5 –19

Minimum extinction ratio dB 10 10


nm 1310 1310

Eye pattern mask – IEEE802.3z-compliant IEEE802.3z-compliant





Item Unit

Value


100BASE-FX1310 nm


Receiver sensitivity(EOL) dBm –30 –30


dBm –10 –14


Item Unit

Value


1000 BASE-LX-10 km

1000 BASE-LX-40 km

1000 BASE-ZX-80 km





Maximum mean launched power dBm –2.5 –3 0 5

Minimum mean launched power dBm –9.5 –11.5 –4.5 –2








NOTEWhen accessing 1000 BASE-T services, the specifications of the electrical interface comply with the IEEE Std 802.3.





Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type







nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611


dBm 5 5


dBm 0 0


dB 9 8.2


nm ±6.5 ±6.5


nm 1 1


dB 30 30





nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620


dBm –19 –28


dBm –3 –9

Maximum reflectance

dB –27 –27




Table 6-4 Specifications of XFP optical module at the client side

Item Unit Value

Optical Module Type 10Gbit/s Multirate-10km

10Gbit/s Multirate-40km


10Gbit/s Multirate-0.3km


Optical source type – SLM SLM SLM MLM



Operating wavelength range nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565

840 to 860


dBm –1 2 4 –1.3


dBm –6 –1 0 –7.3

Minimum extinction ratio dB 6 8.2 9 3


nm NA NA NA NA


dB 30 30 30 30




Operating wavelength range nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1270 to 1600

840 to 860

Receiver sensitivity dBm –11 –14 –24 –7.5

Minimum receiver overload dBm 0.5 –1 –7 –1

Maximum reflectance dB NA NA NA NA






6.3 TDGTDG: 2 x GE tributary service processing unit

6.3.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the TDG board is available, that is TN11.

6.3.2 ApplicationThe TDG is a type of tributary unit. The TDG realizes the conversion between two GE optical signals and two GE electrical signals or one ODU1 electrical signal through cross-connection.

For the position of the TDG in the WDM system, see Figure 6-8.

Figure 6-1 Position of the TDG in the WDM system

MUX

DMUX

NS2

DMUX

MUX

G.694.1 G.694.1

GE

GE

TDG NS2 TDG

GE

GE

Client sideWDMside

WDMside Client side

6.3.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main function and feature supported by the TDG is cross-connection at the electrical layer.


Table 6-1 Functions and features of the TDG


Description

Basic function Realizes the conversion between two GE optical signals and two GE electrical signals or one ODU1 electrical signal through the cross-connect board or with the board in the paired slot.


GE


Supports the cross-connection of an ODU1 signal and two GE signals between the TDG and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot through the backplane.








Description


Protection scheme Supports the SW SNCP. Supports the ODUk SNCP. Supports the client-side 1+1 protection.


Loopback WDM side Not supported


Outloop Supported

6.3.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe TDG consists of the client-side optical module, cross-connect and service processing module, and control and communication module.

Figure 6-9 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TDG.

Figure 6-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the TDG

GE


SCC

Backplane


module

Client-side

opticalmodule

ODU1Client side

GE

RX1

TX1RX2

TX2






Sends the two signals to the cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane to realize the grooming of electrical signals, or

Multiplexes the two signals into one OTU1 signal and sends the signal to the cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane to realize the grooming of electrical signals.

In Receive DirectionThe cross-connect and service processing module receives the signal sent from the cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane, extracts and processes overhead bytes, and monitors the performance of signals. Then,

If the signals are two GE signals, they are sent to the client-side optical module. If the signal is an ODU1 signal, it is demultiplexed into two GE signals before

being sent to the client-side optical module.

The client-side optical module converts two GE electrical signals into optical signals and sends them to the client-side equipment.

Cross-Connect and Service Processing Module This module realizes the grooming of electrical signals through the cross-

connect board or between the boards in paired slots. This module realizes the cross-connection of one ODU1 signal. This module realizes the cross-connection of two GE signals between the





6.3.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TDG front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 6-10 shows the TDG front panel.




Figure 6-1 TDG front panel

TDG

TDG

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

STATACTPROGSRV

TX1

RX

1TX

2R

X2



InterfacesThere are four optical interfaces on the TDG front panel. Table 6-14 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 6-1 Types and functions of the TDG interfaces

Interface

Type

Function





6.3.6 Valid SlotsThe TDG occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TDG are IU1–IU8 and IU11–IU16.



Table 6-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TDG displayed on the NM


TX1/RX1 3

TX2/RX2 4







Laser Status




LPT Enabled

6.3.8 Specifications of the TDGSpecifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.



Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type


1000 BASE-LX-10 km

1000 BASE-LX-40 km

1000 BASE-ZX-80 km





nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm –2.5 –3 0 5


dBm –9.5 –11.5 –4.5 –2


dB 9 9 9 9







Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type


1000 BASE-LX-10 km

1000 BASE-LX-40 km

1000 BASE-ZX-80 km


nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580



dBm 0 –3 –3 –3



Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type







nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611


dBm 5 5


dBm 0 0


dB 9 8.2


nm ±6.5 ±6.5


nm 1.0 1.0


dB 30 30






Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type





nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620



dBm –3 –9

Maximum reflectance

dB –27 –27



6.4 TDXTDX: 2 x 10G Tributary Service Processing Board

6.4.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the TDX board is available, that is TN11.

6.4.2 ApplicationThe TDX is a type of tributary unit. The TDX realizes the conversion between two 10GE LAN/STM-64/OC-192 optical signals and eight 2.5Gbit/s ODU1 virtual concatenation electrical signals through cross-connection.

For the position of the TDX in the WDM system, see Figure 6-11.




Figure 6-1 Position of the TDX in the WDM system

MUX

DMUX

NS2

G.694.1 G.694.1

STM-6410GE LAN

TDX TDX

STM-6410GE LAN

STM-6410GE LAN

STM-6410GE LAN

NS2

NS2

NS2

4

4

4

4

OC-192

OC-192 OC-192

OC-192

Client side WDM side Client sideWDM side

MUX

DMUX

6.4.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main function and feature supported by the TDX is cross-connection at the electrical layer.


Table 6-1 Functions and features of the TDX


Description

Basic function Realizes the conversion between two 10GE LAN/STM-64/OC-192 optical signals and eight ODU1 virtual concatenation electrical signals.


10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192


Supports the cross-connection of eight ODU1 signals between the TDX and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot through the backplane.





Protection scheme Supports the ODUk SNCP. Supports the client-side 1+1 protection. Supports the ODUk SPRing protection.








Description

Outloo[ Supported

6.4.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe TDX consists of the client-side optical module, cross-connect and service processing module, and control and communication module.

Figure 6-12 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TDX.

Figure 6-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the TDX

SCC

ODU1

10G LAN

RX1

TX1RX2

TX2

STM-64

10G LANSTM-64

810G WAN

10G WAN

BackplaneClient side


module


Client-side

opticalmodule

In Transmit DirectionThe client-side optical module receives two 10Gbit/s service signals. These signals are converted into electrical signals and sent to the cross-connect and service processing module.

The cross-connect and service processing module monitors the performance of client-side services, then maps the two electrical signals into eight 0DU1 signals, and sends the eight ODU1 signals to the cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane to realize the grooming of electrical signals.

In Receive DirectionThe cross-connect and service processing module receives the signal sent from the cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane, extracts and processes overhead bytes, and monitors the performance of signals. Then, multiplex the ODU1 signal into two 10GE signal, and sent them to the client-side optical module.

The client-side optical module converts two 10GE electrical signals into optical signals and sends them to the client-side equipment.




Cross-Connect and Service Processing Module This module realizes the grooming of electrical signals through the cross-

connect board or between the boards in paired slots. This module realizes the cross-connection of eight ODU1 signals. This module extracts and processes overhead bytes. This module monitors the performance of services. This module multiplexes and demultiplexes services. This module implements the encapsulation of OTN signals.




6.4.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TDX front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 6-13 shows the TDX front panel.




Figure 6-1 TDX front panel

TDX

TDX

LASERRADIATION



STATACTPROGSRV

TX1

RX

1TX

2R

X2



InterfacesThere are four optical interfaces on the TDX front panel.Table 6-19 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 6-1 Types and functions of the TDX interfaces

Interface

Type

Function





6.4.6 Valid SlotsThe TDX occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TDX are IU1–IU8 and IU11–IU16.



Table 6-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TDX displayed on the NM


TX1/RX1 3

TX2/RX2 4




Service Type

Laser Status





PAUSE Frame Flow Control


Configure Band Type


LPT Enabled

6.4.8 Specifications of the TDXSpecifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.


Table 6-1 Specifications of XFP optical module at the client side

Item Unit

Value






Optical source type – SLM SLM SLM MLM




nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 840 to 860


dBm –1 2 4 –1.3


dBm –6 –1 0 –7.3

Minimum extinction ratio dB 6 8.2 9 3


nm NA NA NA NA


dB 30 30 30 30







Item Unit

Value






nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1270 to 1600 840 to 860

Receiver sensitivity dBm –11 –14 –24 –7.5

Minimum receiver overload dBm 0.5 –1 –7 –1

Maximum reflectance dB NA NA NA NA



6.5 TQMTQM: 4 x multi-rate tributary service processing unit

6.5.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the TQM board is available, that is TN11.

6.5.2 ApplicationThe TQM is a type of tributary unit. The TQM realizes the conversion between four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s and four client-side electrical signals or one ODU1 electrical signal through cross-connection.

For the position of the TQM in the WDM system, see Figure 6-14.

Figure 6-1 Position of the TQM in the WDM system

MUX

DMUX

NS2

DMUX

MUX

1

4

1

4

G.694.1 G.694.1

100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

TQM NS2 TQM

100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s







rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.

6.5.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main function and feature supported by the TQM is cross-connection at the electrical layer.


Table 6-1 Functions and features of the TQM


Description

Basic function Converts four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s into four client-side electrical signals or one ODU1 electrical signal and sends the signals to the backplane for further cross-connection.




Supports the cross-connection of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s between the boards in paired slots.

Supports the cross-connection of one ODU1 signal between the TQM and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot.


Provides the monitoring of the BIP8 bit error count so as to help to locate the failures of the line.Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the OTN.


Protection scheme Supports the SW SNCP. Supports the ODUk SNCP. Supports the client-side 1+1 protection.




Outloop Supported




6.5.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe TQM consists of the client-side optical module, cross-connect and service processing module, and control and communication module.

Figure 6-15 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TQM.

Figure 6-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the TQM


SCC

Backplane

Cross-connect and serviceprocessing module

Client-side

opticalmodule

100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s ODU1

4

4

Client side

100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s

RX1

TX1RX4

TX4 100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s



rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.

In Transmit DirectionThe client-side optical module receives four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s and converts them into electrical signals before sending them to the cross-connect and service processing module.

The cross-connect and service processing module monitors the performance of the client-side services, then

Sends the four signals to the cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane to realize the grooming of electrical signals, or

Multiplexes the four signals into one ODU1 signal and sends the signal to the cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane to realize the grooming of electrical signals.

In Receive DirectionThe cross-connect and service processing module receives the signal sent from the cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane, extracts and processes overhead bytes, and monitors the performance of signals. Then,




If the signals are four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s, they are sent to the client-side optical module.

If the signal is an ODU1 signal, it is demultiplexed into four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s the client side needed before being sent to the client-side optical module.

The client-side optical module converts four electrical signals into optical signals and sends them to the client-side equipment.

Cross-Connect and Service Processing Module This module realizes the grooming of electrical signals between the boards in

paired slots or with the cross-connect board through the backplane. This module realizes the cross-connection of four signals at the rate between

100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s between the boards in paired slots. This module realizes the cross-connection of one ODU1 signal through the

cross-connect board or between the boards in paired slots. This module extracts and processes overhead bytes. This module monitors the performance of services. This module multiplexes and demultiplexes services. This module implements the encapsulation of OTN signals.




6.5.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TDG front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 6-16 shows the TQM front panel.




Figure 6-1 TQM front panel

TQM

TQM

STATACTPROGSRV

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

RX

2TX

3R

X3

TX4

RX

4TX

1R

X1

TX2



InterfacesThere are eight optical interfaces on the TQM front panel. Table 6-23 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 6-1 Types and functions of the TQM interfaces

Interface

Type

Function





rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.



6.5.6 Valid SlotsThe TQM occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TQM are IU1–IU8 and IU11–IU16.



Table 6-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TQM displayed on the NM


TX1/RX1 3

TX2/RX2 4

TX3/RX3 5

TX4/RX4 6







Service Type

Laser Status




LPT Enabled

6.5.8 Specifications of the TQMSpecifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Specifications of SDH optical module at the client sideNOTEI-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.


Item Unit

Value







nm 1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm –3 0 3 3


dBm –10 –5 –2 –2





Item Unit

Value



nm NA 1 1 1


dB NA 30 30 30





nm 1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580



dBm –3 0 –9 –9


Specifications of GE Optical Module at the Client SideNOTE2.125Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.



Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type


1000 BASE-LX-10 km

1000 BASE-LX-40 km

1000 BASE-ZX-80 km







Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type


1000 BASE-LX-10 km

1000 BASE-LX-40 km

1000 BASE-ZX-80 km


nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580


dBm –2.5 –3 0 5


dBm –9.5 –11.5 –4.5 –2


dB 9 9 9 9





nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355

1270 to 1355

1500 to 1580



dBm 0 –3 –3 –3




Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type







Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type






nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611


dBm 5 5


dBm 0 0


dB 9 8.2


nm ±6.5 ±6.5


nm 1.0 1.0


dB 30 30





nm 1270 to 1620 1270 to 1620



dBm –3 –9

Maximum reflectance

dB –27 –27


Power Consumption The maximum power consumption at 25: 50.8 W




The maximum power consumption at 55: 55.9 W

6.6 TQSTQS: 4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing unit

6.6.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the TQS board is available, that is TN11.

6.6.2 ApplicationThe TQS is a type of tributary unit. The TQS realizes the conversion between four STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 optical signals and four ODU1 electrical signals.

For the position of the TQS in the WDM system, see Figure 6-17.

Figure 6-1 Position of the TQS in the WDM system

STM-16/OC-48/OTU1

STM-16/OC-48/OTU1

MUX

DMUX

NS2

DMUX

MUX

1

4

1

4

G.694.1 G.694.1TQS NS2 TQS

1

4

1

4


STM-16/OC-48/OTU1

STM-16/OC-48/OTU1

6.6.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the TQS are cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.


Table 6-1 Functions and features of the TQS


Description

Basic function Converts four STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 optical signals into ODU1 signals and sends the signals to the backplane for further cross-connection. The reverse process is similar.


STM-16, OC-48, OTU1


Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals between the TQS and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot.

OTN function Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709.





Description







Protection scheme Supports the ODUk SNCP. Supports the client-side 1+1 protection.




Outloop Supported

6.6.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe TQS consists of the client-side optical module, cross-connect and service processing module, and control and communication module.

Figure 6-18 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TQS.

Figure 6-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the TQS

ODU1


SCC

Backplane


module

Client-side

opticalmodule

4

4

Client side

STM-16/OC-48/OTU1

STM-16/OC-48/OTU1

RX1

TX1RX4

TX4




In Transmit DirectionThe client-side optical module receives four STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 optical signals and converts them into electrical signals before sending them to the cross-connect and service grooming module.

The cross-connect and service processing module monitors the performance of the client-side services and maps the four signals into four ODU1 signals. Then, the signals are sent to the cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot to realize the grooming of electrical signals.

In Receive DirectionThe cross-connect and service processing module receives the signals sent from the cross-connection board or a board in the paired slot through the backplane, extracts and processes overhead bytes, and monitors the performance of signals. Then, the signal is converted to signals that the client-side needed and sent to the client-side optical module.

The client-side optical module converts the four electrical signals into optical signals and sends them to the client-side equipment.

Cross-Connect and Service Processing Module This module realizes the grooming of electrical signals between the boards in

paired slots or with the cross-connect board through the backplane. This module realizes the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals. This module extracts and processes overhead bytes. This module monitors the performance of services. This module implements the encapsulation of OTN signals.




6.6.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the TQS front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 6-19 shows the TQS front panel.




Figure 6-1 TQS front panel

TQS

TQS

STATACTPROGSRV

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

RX

2TX

3R

X3

TX4

RX

4TX

1R

X1

TX2



InterfacesThere are eight optical interfaces on the TQS front panel. Table 6-29 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 6-1 Types and functions of the TQS interfaces

Interface

Type

Function





6.6.6 Valid SlotsThe TQS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the TQS are IU1–IU8 and IU11–IU16.



Table 6-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TQS displayed on the NM


TX1/RX1 3

TX2/RX2 4

TX3/RX3 5

TX4/RX4 6







Service Type

Laser Status


FEC Working State

6.6.8 Specifications of the TQSSpecifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Specifications of SDH Optical Module at the Client SideNOTEThis module is used to access STM-16 and OTU1 signals. The specificaions listed above completely apply to STM-16 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1 signals.


Item Unit

Value







nm 1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580


dBm –3 0 3 3


dBm –10 –5 –2 –2



nm NA 1 1 1


dB NA 30 30 30




Item Unit

Value






nm 1266 to 1360

1260 to 1360

1280 to 1335

1500 to 1580



dBm –3 0 –9 –9


Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client SideNOTE2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access STM16, OC-48, OTU1 signals. The specifications listed above completely apply to OTU1 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are STM16, OC-48.


Item Unit

Value










Maximum –20 dB spectral width nm 1.0


dB 30





Item Unit

Value









Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type






THz 192.1 to 196.0


dBm 3


dBm 0


dB 8.5


GHz ±12.5


nm NA


dB 30







Item Unit

Value

Optical Module Type




dBm –9







7 Cross-connect Unit

7.1 XCSXCS: cross-connect and clock unit

7.1.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the XCS board is available, that is TN11.

7.1.2 ApplicationThe XCS is a type of cross-connect unit. The XCS realizes the cross-connection of services.

For the position of the XCS in the WDM system, see Figure 7-1.

Figure 7-1 Position of the XCS in the WDM system

OTU

OA

OA

OTU

M40

D40

OTU

OTU

OA

OA

D40

M40

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

1

1

40

1

40

1

40

XCS

XCS

XCS40

XCS

7.1.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main function and feature of the XCS is the cross-connection at the electrical layer.





Table 7-1 Functions and features of the XCS


Description

Basic function Grooms services.

Cross-connect function

Supports the integrated grooming of ODU1 signals or GE services.Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 320 Gbit/s for ODU1 signals. Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 160 Gbit/s for GE services.

Active/standby backup

Provides the 1+1 hot backup.

Switching mode Supports the manual switching and auto switching.Supports only the non-revertive switching.

7.1.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe XCS consists of the cross-connect module and the control and communication module.

Figure 7-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the XCS.

Figure 7-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCS

Cross-connectmodule

SCC

Backplane

Control and communicationmodule

Cross-Connect ModuleThe cross-connect module receives the data of each service board from the backplane. It performs the grooming of ODU1 signals or GE granules at the electrical layer, then sends the signals to each service board and implements the cross-connection.







7.1.5 Front PanelThere are indicators on the XCS front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 7-3 shows the XCS front panel.

Figure 7-1 XCS front panel

XCS

XCS

STATACTPROGSRV






InterfacesThe XCS does not provide external interfaces.

7.1.6 Valid SlotsThe XCS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the XCS are IU9 and IU10.

7.1.7 Specifications of the XCSSpecifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.


Power Consumption The maximum power consumption at 25:20.0 W The maximum power consumption at 55:22.0 W




8 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit

8.1 D40D40: 40-channel demultiplexing unit

8.1.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the D40 board is available, that is TN11.

8.1.2 ApplicationThe D40 is a type of optical demultiplexer unit. The D40 realizes the demultiplexing of one optical signal into a maximum of 40 ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.

For the position of the D40 in the WDM system, see Figure 8-1.

Figure 8-1 Position of the D40 in the WDM system

OTUOA

OA

OTUM40

D40OTU

OTU

OA

OA

D40

M40

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

1

40

1

40

1

40

1

40

8.1.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the D40 are demultiplexing, online optical performance monitoring, alarms and performance events monitoring.

For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 8-1




Table 8-1 Functions and features of the D40


Description

Basic function Demultiplexes main path signal to a maximum of 40 channels of service. Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels. Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.

Online optical performance monitoring

Provides the online monitoring interface. A small amount of optical signal can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer unit through the interface so as to monitor the spectrum and optical performance of the multi-channel signal without interrupting the services.



8.1.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe D40 consists of the optical splitter, demultiplexing module and control and communication module.

Figure 8-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the D40.

Figure 8-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the D40

D02D01

D40


SCC

Demultiplexingmodule

Opticalsplitter

MONIN

Optical SplitterThe optical splitter divides a signal into two signals at different power. The primary signal is sent to the demultiplxing module. The other signal is sent to the MON interface for optical spectrum detection and monitoring.

The optical power of the MON interface is 10/90 of the optical power of the OUT interface, that means the optical power of the MON interface is lower than that of the OUT interface by 10 dB.




Demultiplexing ModuleThe signal is demultiplexed into 40 wavelengths by the demultiplexing module and then sent to the OTU.




8.1.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the D40 front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 8-3 shows the D40 front panel.




Figure 8-1 D40 front panel

D40

D40

STATACTPROGSRV

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

D01D02D03D04D05D06D07D08D09D10

D11D12D13D14D15D16D17D18D19D20

D21D22D23D24D25D26D27D28D29D30

D31D32D33D34D35D36D37D38D39D40

196.00195.90195.80195.70195.60195.50195.40195.30195.20195.10

195.00194.90194.80194.70194.60194.50

194.20194.10

194.40194.30

194.00193.90193.80193.70193.60193.50

193.20193.10

193.40193.30

193.00192.90192.80192.70192.60192.50

192.20192.10

192.40192.30

D15

D16

D17

D18

D19

D20

D21

D22

D23

D24

D13

D25

D26

D14

D01

D02

D03

D04

D05

D06

D07

D08

D09

D10

MO

ND

11D

12IN

D29

D30

D31

D32

D33

D34

D35

D36

D37

D38

D28

D39

D40

D27

NOTEThere is a table indicating the mapping relationship between interfaces and frequencies pasted onto the front panel.






InterfacesThere are 42 optical interfaces on the D40 front panel. Table 8-2 lists the type and function of each interface.

Table 8-1 Types and functions of the D40 interfaces

Interface

Type

Function

IN LC Connected to an optical amplifier or ITL, receives the signals to be demultiplexed.

D01–D40 LC Transmit demultiplexed signals to the connected "IN" interface of the OTUs.

MON LC Connected to the input interface of the MCA4 or MCA8, accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum.The MON port is a 10/90 tap of the total composite signal at the IN port (10dB lower than the actual signal power).

There are 40 output interfaces on the D40 front panel. Table 8-3, Table 8-4 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the D40 board.

Table 8-2 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the D40 board (even)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

D01 196.00 1529.55 D21 194.00 1545.32

D02 195.90 1530.33 D22 193.90 1546.12

D03 195.80 1531.12 D23 193.80 1546.92

D04 195.70 1531.90 D24 193.70 1547.72

D05 195.60 1532.68 D25 193.60 1548.51

D06 195.50 1533.47 D26 193.50 1549.32

D07 195.40 1534.25 D27 193.40 1550.12

D08 195.30 1535.04 D28 193.30 1550.92

D09 195.20 1535.82 D29 193.20 1551.72

D10 195.10 1536.61 D30 193.10 1552.52

D11 195.00 1537.40 D31 193.00 1553.33

D12 194.90 1538.19 D32 192.90 1554.13

D13 194.80 1538.98 D33 192.80 1554.94

D14 194.70 1539.77 D34 192.70 1555.75




Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

D15 194.60 1540.56 D35 192.60 1556.55

D16 194.50 1541.35 D36 192.50 1557.36

D17 194.40 1542.14 D37 192.40 1558.17

D18 194.30 1542.94 D38 192.30 1558.98

D19 194.20 1543.73 D39 192.20 1559.79

D20 194.10 1544.53 D40 192.10 1560.61

Table 8-3 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the D40 board (odd)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

D01 196.05 1529.16 D21 194.05 1544.92

D02 195.95 1529.94 D22 193.95 1545.72

D03 195.85 1530.72 D23 193.85 1546.52

D04 195.75 1531.51 D24 193.75 1547.32

D05 195.65 1532.29 D25 193.65 1548.11

D06 195.55 1533.07 D26 193.55 1548.91

D07 195.45 1533.86 D27 193.45 1549.72

D08 195.35 1534.64 D28 193.35 1550.52

D09 195.25 1535.43 D29 193.25 1551.32

D10 195.15 1536.22 D30 193.15 1552.12

D11 195.05 1537.00 D31 193.05 1552.93

D12 194.95 1537.79 D32 192.95 1553.73

D13 194.85 1538.58 D33 192.85 1554.54

D14 194.75 1539.37 D34 192.75 1555.34

D15 194.65 1540.16 D35 192.65 1556.15

D16 194.55 1540.95 D36 192.55 1556.96

D17 194.45 1541.75 D37 192.45 1557.77

D18 194.35 1542.54 D38 192.35 1558.58

D19 194.25 1543.33 D39 192.25 1559.39




Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

D20 194.15 1544.13 D40 192.15 1560.20



8.1.6 Valid SlotsThe D40 occupies three slots. The valid slots for the D40 are IU1–IU15 in the subrack.

The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot number of the D40 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the three occupied slots.

For example, if the D40 occupies slots IU1, IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the D40 displayed on the NM is IU1.

8.1.7 Characteristic Code for the D40The characteristic code for the D40 consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even wavelengths.


Table 8-1 Characteristic code for the D40


The first character

Band Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band.

The second character

Odd/Even wavelengths

Indicates whether the wavelengths that bear signals are odd or even wavelengths. The value E represents even wavelengths; the value O represents odd wavelengths.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40 is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.

NOTEThe OptiX OSN 6800 products now support only even wavelengths in C band.






Table 8-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the D40 displayed on the NM


IN 1

D01-D40 2-41

MON 42

Configuration ParametersThreshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)

8.1.9 Specifications of the D40Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight and power consumption.

Optical SpecificationsTable 8-7 lists the optical specifications of the D40.

Table 8-1 Optical specifications of the D40

Item Unit Value

Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100

Insertion loss dB ≤6.5

Optical return loss dB >40

Operating wavelength range nm 1529–1561

Adjacent channel isolation dB >25

Non-adjacent channel isolation dB >30

Polarization dependent loss dB ≤0.5

Temperature characteristics nm/ <0.002




Item Unit Value

Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB ≤3

-0.5 dB bandwidth nm >0.2

-1 dB bandwidth nm >0.4

-20 dB bandwidth nm <1.4



8.2 D40VD40V: 40-channel demultiplexing unit with VOA

8.2.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the D40V board is available, that is TN11.

8.2.2 ApplicationThe D40V is a type of optical demultiplexer unit. The D40V realizes the demultiplexing of one signal into a maximum of 40 ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals and adjusts the output optical power of each channel.

For the position of the D40V in the WDM system, see Figure 8-4.

Figure 8-1 Position of the D40V in the WDM system

OTUOA

OA

OTUM40

D40VOTU

OTU

OA

OA

D40V

M40

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

1

40

1

40

1

40

1

40




8.2.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the D40V are demultiplexing, online optical performance monitoring, alarms and performance events monitoring and optical power adjustment.


Table 8-1 Functions and features of the D40V


Description

Basic function Demultiplexes one signal into a maximum of 40 signals and adjusts the input optical power of each channel. Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels. Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.





Optical power adjustment

Adjusts the optical power of each signal after demultiplexing.

8.2.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe D40V consists of the optical splitter, demultiplexing module, VOA module and the control and communication module.

Figure 8-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the D40V.




Figure 8-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the D40V


SCC

Opticalsplitter

MONIN


VOA

VOA

VOA

D01

D02

D40

Optical SplitterThe optical splitter divides one input signal into two signals at different power. The main signal is sent to the demultiplexing module. The other signal is sent to the MON interface for the detection and monitoring of optical spectrum.


Demultiplexing ModuleThe demultiplexing module receives the signal sent from the optical splitter and demultiplexes it into 40 signals, then sends them to the VOA module.

VOA ModuleThe D40V has 40 VOA modules. Each module adjusts the power for one of the 40 channels and sends the adjusted optical signal to the OTU.




8.2.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the D40V front panel.




Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 8-6 shows the D40V front panel.

Figure 8-1 D40V front panel

D40V

D40V

STATACTPROGSRV

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

D01D02D03D04D05D06D07D08D09D10

D11D12D13D14D15D16D17D18D19D20

D21D22D23D24D25D26D27D28D29D30

D31D32D33D34D35D36D37D38D39D40

196.00195.90195.80195.70195.60195.50195.40195.30195.20195.10

195.00194.90194.80194.70194.60194.50

194.20194.10

194.40194.30

194.00193.90193.80193.70193.60193.50

193.20193.10

193.40193.30

193.00192.90192.80192.70192.60192.50

192.20192.10

192.40192.30

D15

D16

D17

D18

D19

D20

D21

D22

D23

D24

D13

D25

D26

D14

D01

D02

D03

D04

D05

D06

D07

D08

D09

D10

MO

ND

11D

12IN

D29

D30

D31

D32

D33

D34

D35

D36

D37

D38

D28

D39

D40

D27







InterfacesThere are 42 optical interfaces on the D40V front panel. Table 8-9 lists the type and function of each interface.

Table 8-1 Types and functions of the D40V interfaces

Interface

Type

Function

IN LC Connected to an optical amplifier or ITL, receives the signals to be demultiplexed.

D01–D40 LC Connected to the "IN" interface of the OTUs, transmit demultiplexed signals.

MON LC Connected to the input interface of the MCA4 or MCA8, accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum.The MON port is a 10/90 tap of the total composite signal at the IN port (10dB lower than the actual signal power).

There are 40 output interfaces on the D40V front panel. Table 8-10, Table 8-11 show the mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the D40V board.

Table 8-2 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the D40V board (even)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

D01 196.00 1529.55 D21 194.00 1545.32

D02 195.90 1530.33 D22 193.90 1546.12

D03 195.80 1531.12 D23 193.80 1546.92

D04 195.70 1531.90 D24 193.70 1547.72

D05 195.60 1532.68 D25 193.60 1548.51

D06 195.50 1533.47 D26 193.50 1549.32

D07 195.40 1534.25 D27 193.40 1550.12

D08 195.30 1535.04 D28 193.30 1550.92

D09 195.20 1535.82 D29 193.20 1551.72

D10 195.10 1536.61 D30 193.10 1552.52

D11 195.00 1537.40 D31 193.00 1553.33

D12 194.90 1538.19 D32 192.90 1554.13

D13 194.80 1538.98 D33 192.80 1554.94




Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

D14 194.70 1539.77 D34 192.70 1555.75

D15 194.60 1540.56 D35 192.60 1556.55

D16 194.50 1541.35 D36 192.50 1557.36

D17 194.40 1542.14 D37 192.40 1558.17

D18 194.30 1542.94 D38 192.30 1558.98

D19 194.20 1543.73 D39 192.20 1559.79

D20 194.10 1544.53 D40 192.10 1560.61

Table 8-3 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the D40V board (odd)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

D01 196.05 1529.16 D21 194.05 1544.92

D02 195.95 1529.94 D22 193.95 1545.72

D03 195.85 1530.72 D23 193.85 1546.52

D04 195.75 1531.51 D24 193.75 1547.32

D05 195.65 1532.29 D25 193.65 1548.11

D06 195.55 1533.07 D26 193.55 1548.91

D07 195.45 1533.86 D27 193.45 1549.72

D08 195.35 1534.64 D28 193.35 1550.52

D09 195.25 1535.43 D29 193.25 1551.32

D10 195.15 1536.22 D30 193.15 1552.12

D11 195.05 1537.00 D31 193.05 1552.93

D12 194.95 1537.79 D32 192.95 1553.73

D13 194.85 1538.58 D33 192.85 1554.54

D14 194.75 1539.37 D34 192.75 1555.34

D15 194.65 1540.16 D35 192.65 1556.15

D16 194.55 1540.95 D36 192.55 1556.96

D17 194.45 1541.75 D37 192.45 1557.77

D18 194.35 1542.54 D38 192.35 1558.58




Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

D19 194.25 1543.33 D39 192.25 1559.39

D20 194.15 1544.13 D40 192.15 1560.20



8.2.6 Valid SlotsThe D40V occupies three slots. The valid slots for the D40V are IU1–IU15 in the subrack.

The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot number of the D40v board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the three occupied slots.

For example, if the D40v occupies slots IU1, IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the D40 displayed on the NM is IU1.

8.2.7 Characteristic Code for the D40VThe characteristic code for the D40V consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even wavelengths.


Table 8-1 Characteristic code for the D40V


The first character





For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40V is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.






Table 8-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the D40v displayed on the NM


IN 1

D01-D40 2-41

MON 42

Configuration ParametersOptical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)

Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)

8.2.9 Specifications of the D40VSpecifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical SpecificationsTable 8-14 lists the optical specifications of the D40V.

Table 8-1 Optical specifications of the D40V

Item Unit Value


Insertion loss dB ≤8a





Attenuation range dB 0–15




Item Unit Value

Loss accuracy dB ≤1



a: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.



8.3 FIUFIU: fiber interface unit

8.3.1 Version DescriptionTwo functional versions of the FIU board are available: TN11 and TN12. There is no difference between the two versions in terms of functionality.

Table 8-15lists the version description of the FIU.

Table 8-1 Version description of the FIU

Item Description

Functional version

Two functional versions of the FIU board are available: TN11 and TN12.

Similarity The TN12FIU works in the same way as the TN11FIU.

Difference None

Replacement The TN11FIU and TN12FIU boards share the same functionality and can be replaced with each other. But after the TN11FIU board is replaced with the TN12FIU board, the SCC software need be upgraded.

8.3.2 ApplicationThe FIU is a type of optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit. The FIU realizes the multiplexing and demultiplexing of the signals transmitted by the main optical path and the optical supervisory channel.




For the position of the FIU in the WDM system, see Figure 8-7.

Figure 8-1 Position of the FIU in the WDM system

OTUOA

OA

OTUMUX

DMUXOTU

OTU

OA

OA

SC1 FIU FIU SC1

DMUX

MUX

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

8.3.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the FIU are multiplexing, demultiplexing and online optical performance monitoring.


Table 8-1 Functions and features of the FIU


Description

Basic function Realizes the multiplexing and demultiplexing of signals transmitted by the main path and the optical supervisory channel.



8.3.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe FIU consists of the demultiplexing module, multiplexing module, optical splitter and the control and communication module.

Figure 8-8 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the FIU.




Figure 8-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the FIU


OUT

IN

Multiplexingmodule

TMTC

RCRM Optical

splitter MON


SCC

Line opticalsignal

Supervisorychannel

Main path

Main path

Supervisorychannel

Line opticalsignal

Demultiplexing Module The optical signal from the line is demultiplexed into the main path and the supervisory channel, then output through the TC interface and TM interface respectively.

Multiplexing ModuleThe main path signal input from the RC interface and the supervisory channel signal input from the RM interface are multiplexed by the multiplexing module, and then are sent to the optical splitter.

Optical SplitterThe optical splitter receives the signal from the multiplexing module and divides it into two signals at different power. The main signal is output through the OUT interface and transmitted on the line. The other signal is output to the MON interface for the detection and monitoring of optical spectrum.








8.3.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the FIU front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 8-9 shows the FIU front panel.

Figure 8-1 FIU front panel

FIU

FIU

STATACTPROGSRV

MO

NO

UT

INTC

RC

TMR

M

LASERRADIATION








InterfacesThere are seven optical interfaces on the FIU front panel. Table 8-17 lists the type and function of each interface.

Table 8-1 Types and functions of the FIU interfaces

Interface

Type

Function

IN LC Receives the line signal.

OUT LC Transmits the line signal.

TC LC Transmits the main path signal.

RC LC Receives the main path signal.

TM LC Transmits the 1510nm optical supervisory channel signal.

RM LC Receives the 1510nm optical supervisory channel signal.

MON LC Connected to the input interface of the MCA4 or MCA8, accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum.The MON port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (20dB lower than the actual signal power).

Laser Safety LevelThe laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M.

The maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (164 mW).

8.3.6 Valid SlotsThe FIU occupies one slot. The valid slots for the FIU are IU1–IU17.

8.3.7 Characteristic Code for the FIUThe characteristic code for the FIU consists of one character, indicating the band adopted by the board.


Table 8-1 Characteristic code for the FIU

Code Meaning

Description

The first character

Band Indicates the multiplexing solution adopted by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band.




For example, the characteristic code for the TN11FIU is C, indicating that the optical signals are in C band.



Table 8-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the FIU displayed on the NM


IN/OUT 1

RM/TM 2

RC/TC 3

MON 4



8.3.9 Specifications of the FIUSpecifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical Specifications

Table 8-1 Optical specifications of the FIU

Interface

Item Unit

Value

– Operating wavelength range nm 1529–1561

– Operating wavelength range of optical supervisory channel

nm 1500–1520

– Optical return loss dB >40




Interface

Item Unit

Value

IN-TMRM-OUT


IN-TCRC-OUT

Insertion loss dB ≤1

IN-TM Isolation dB >40

IN-TC Isolation dB >12



8.4 ITLITL: Interleaver Board

8.4.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the ITL board is available, that is TN11.

8.4.2 ApplicationThe ITL is a type of optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit. It multiplexes/demultiplexes optical signals with the channel spacing of 100 GHz into one optical signals with the channel spacing of 50 GHz.

For the position of the ITL in the WDM system, see Figure 8-10.




Figure 8-1 Position of the ITL in the WDM system

OA

OA

1

40

1

40

1

40

1

40

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

D40

D40

M40

40

140

1

M40

40

1

40

1

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

D40

D40

OA

OA

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

M40

M40

C_EVEN

C_ODD

C_EVEN

C_ODD

C_EVEN

C_ODD

C_EVEN

C_ODD

ITLITL

8.4.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the ITL are multiplexing, demultiplexing and detection of the online spectrum.


Table 8-1 Functions and features of the ITL


Description

Basic function Multiplexes /demultiplexes optical signals with the channel spacing of 100 GHz into one optical signals with the channel spacing of 50 GHz in the 80 channels system.

Detection and monitoring of the online spectrum


8.4.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe ITL consists of interleaver, multiplexing module and optical splitter.

Figure 8-11 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ITL.




Figure 8-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the ITL

InterleaverINTE

TO100 GHz

Multiplexingmodule

OUTRE

RO100 GHz

50 GHz

50 GHz

MON

Opticalsplitter

InterleaverThe interleaver processes the input signals at 50 GHz channel spacing and converts them into optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing. Then the optical signals are output through the TO and TE interface, respectively.

Multiplexing moduleThe multiplexing module multiplexes the ODD optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing that is input through the RO interface and the EVEN optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing that is input through the RE interface into one optical signals at 50 GHz channel spacing. Then the signals are sent to the optical splitter.

The optical splitter receives the signal from the multiplexing module and divides it into two signals at different power. The main signal is output through the OUT interface and transmitted on the line. The other signal is output to the MON interface for the detection and monitoring of optical spectrum.


8.4.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the ITL front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 8-12 shows the ITL front panel.




Figure 8-1 ITL front panel

ITL

ITL

STAT

MO

NO

UT

INTO

RO

TER

E

LASERRADIATION




Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – dual-colored (red, green)

InterfacesThere are seven optical interfaces on the ITL front panel.Table 8-22 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 8-1 Types and functions of the ITL interfaces

Interface

Type

Function

IN LC Accesses the optical signals at 50 GHz channel spacing (C_ODD and C_EVEN multiplexed signals).

OUT LC Outputs the optical signals at 50 GHz channel spacing (C_ODD and C_EVEN multiplexed signals).

TE LC Outputs the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing (C_EVEN multiplexed signals).

RE LC Accesses the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing (C_EVEN multiplexed signals).

TO LC Outputs the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing (C_ODD multiplexed signals).

RO LC Accesses the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing (C_ODD multiplexed signals).

MON LC Connects to the input port on the MCA4 or the MCA8 board so that the MCA4 or the MCA8 board can detect the optical spectrum in service.The optical power at the MON interface is 10/90 of the optical power at the OUT interface, that is, the optical power at the MON interface is 10 dB lower than the optical power at the OUT interface.



8.4.6 Valid SlotsThe ITL occupies one slot. The valid slots for the ITL are IU1–IU17.

8.4.7 Characteristic Code for the ITLThe characteristic code for the FIU consists of one character, indicating the band adopted by the board.





Table 8-1 Characteristic code for the ITL

Code Meaning

Description

The first character


For example, the characteristic code for the ITL is C, indicating that the optical signals are in C band



Table 8-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ITL displayed on the NM


IN/OUT 1

RE/TE 2

RO/TO 3

MON 4


8.4.9 Specifications of the ITLSpecifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.


Table 8-1 Optical specifications of the ITL

Interface Item Unit Value

– Input channel spacinga GHz 100

– Output channel spacinga GHz 50





RE-OUTRO-OUT

Insertion loss dB <4.5

IN-TEIN-TO

Insertion loss dB <2.5

RE/RO-OUTIN-TE/TO

Maximum difference of insertion loss dB <1

IN-TEIN-TO

Isolation dB >25


– Directivity dB >45

– PMD ps <0.5

– Polarization dependent loss dB <0.5

– Input optical power range dBm ≤26

a: The input and output ends are defined based on the multiplexing process of the interleaver.

Mechanical Specifications Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) Weight: 0.9kg

Power Consumption The maximum power consumption at 25: 0.2W The maximum power consumption at 55: 0.3W

8.5 M40M40: 40-channel multiplexing unit

8.5.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the M40 board is available, that is TN11.

8.5.2 ApplicationThe M40 is a type of optical multiplexer unit. The M40 realizes the multiplexing of a maximum of 40 ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals into one fiber.

For the position of the M40 in the WDM system, see Figure 8-13.




Figure 8-1 Position of the M40 in the WDM system

OTUOA

OA

OTUM40

D40OTU

OTU

OA

OA

D40

M40

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

1

40

1

40

1

40

1

40

8.5.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the M40 are multiplexing, online optical performance monitoring, alarms and performance events monitoring.


Table 8-1 Functions and features of the M40


Description

Basic function Multiplexes a maximum of 40 channels into one fiber. Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path. Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.





8.5.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe M40 consists of the multiplexing module, optical splitter and the control and communication module.

Figure 8-14 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the M40.




Figure 8-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the M40


SCC

Multiplexingmodule Optical

splitter

M02

M01

M40OUT

MON

Multiplexing ModuleThe multiplexing module multiplexes 40 signals into one signal and sends the signal to the optical splitter.

Optical SplitterThe optical splitter receives the signal from the multiplexing module and divides it into two signals at different power. The main signal is output through the OUT interface and transmitted by the main path. The other signal is output to the MON interface for optical spectrum detection and monitoring.





8.5.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the M40 front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 8-15 shows the M40 front panel.




Figure 8-1 M40 front panel

M40

M40

STATACTPROGSRV

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

M01M02M03M04M05M06M07M08M09M10

M11M12M13M14M15M16M17M18M19M20

M21M22M23M24M25M26M27M28M29M30

M31M32M33M34M35M36M37M38M39M40

196.00195.90195.80195.70195.60195.50195.40195.30195.20195.10

195.00194.90194.80194.70194.60194.50

194.20194.10

194.40194.30

194.00193.90193.80193.70193.60193.50

193.20193.10

193.40193.30

193.00192.90192.80192.70192.60192.50

192.20192.10

192.40192.30

M15

M16

M17

M18

M19

M20

M21

M22

M23

M24

M13

M25

M26

M14

M01

M02

M03

M04

M05

M06

M07

M08

M09

M10

MO

NM

11M

12O

UT

M29

M30

M31

M32

M33

M34

M35

M36

M37

M38

M28

M39

M40

M27







InterfacesThere are 42 optical interfaces on the M40 front panel. Table 8-27 lists the type and function of each interface.

Table 8-1 Types and functions of the M40 interfaces

Interface

Type

Function

M01–M40 LC Connected to the "OUT" interface of the OTUs, receive the signals to be multiplexed.

OUT LC Connected to an optical amplifying board or ITL, transmits multiplexed signals.


There are 40 output interfaces on the M40 front panel. Table 8-28 and Table 8-29 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the M40 board.

Table 8-2 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the M40 board (even)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

M01 196.00 1529.55 M21 194.00 1545.32

M02 195.90 1530.33 M22 193.90 1546.12

M03 195.80 1531.12 M23 193.80 1546.92

M04 195.70 1531.90 M24 193.70 1547.72

M05 195.60 1532.68 M25 193.60 1548.51

M06 195.50 1533.47 M26 193.50 1549.32

M07 195.40 1534.25 M27 193.40 1550.12

M08 195.30 1535.04 M28 193.30 1550.92

M09 195.20 1535.82 M29 193.20 1551.72

M10 195.10 1536.61 M30 193.10 1552.52

M11 195.00 1537.40 M31 193.00 1553.33

M12 194.90 1538.19 M32 192.90 1554.13

M13 194.80 1538.98 M33 192.80 1554.94




Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

M14 194.70 1539.77 M34 192.70 1555.75

M15 194.60 1540.56 M35 192.60 1556.55

M16 194.50 1541.35 M36 192.50 1557.36

M17 194.40 1542.14 M37 192.40 1558.17

M18 194.30 1542.94 M38 192.30 1558.98

M19 194.20 1543.73 M39 192.20 1559.79

M20 194.10 1544.53 M40 192.10 1560.61

Table 8-3 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the M40 board (odd)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

M01 196.05 1529.16 M21 194.05 1544.92

M02 195.95 1529.94 M22 193.95 1545.72

M03 195.85 1530.72 M23 193.85 1546.52

M04 195.75 1531.51 M24 193.75 1547.32

M05 195.65 1532.29 M25 193.65 1548.11

M06 195.55 1533.07 M26 193.55 1548.91

M07 195.45 1533.86 M27 193.45 1549.72

M08 195.35 1534.64 M28 193.35 1550.52

M09 195.25 1535.43 M29 193.25 1551.32

M10 195.15 1536.22 M30 193.15 1552.12

M11 195.05 1537.00 M31 193.05 1552.93

M12 194.95 1537.79 M32 192.95 1553.73

M13 194.85 1538.58 M33 192.85 1554.54

M14 194.75 1539.37 M34 192.75 1555.34

M15 194.65 1540.16 M35 192.65 1556.15

M16 194.55 1540.95 M36 192.55 1556.96

M17 194.45 1541.75 M37 192.45 1557.77

M18 194.35 1542.54 M38 192.35 1558.58




Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

M19 194.25 1543.33 M39 192.25 1559.39

M20 194.15 1544.13 M40 192.15 1560.20



8.5.6 Valid SlotsThe M40 occupies three slots. The valid slots for the M40 are IU1–IU15 in the subrack.

The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot number of the M40 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the three occupied slots.

For example, if the M40 occupies slots IU1, IU2, and IU3, the slot number of the M40 displayed on the NM is IU1.

8.5.7 Characteristic Code for the M40The characteristic code for the M40 consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even wavelengths.


Table 8-1 Characteristic code for the M40


The first character





For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40 is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.






Table 8-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the M40 displayed on the NM


OUT 1

M01-M40 2-41

MON 42

8.5.9 Specifications of the M40Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical SpecificationsTable 8-32 lists the optical specifications of the M40.

Table 8-1 Optical specifications of the M40

Item Unit Value







Polarization dependence loss dB ≤0.5

Temperature characteristics nm/ ≤0.002


Mechanical Specifications Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T)




Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 76.2 mm (W) Weight: 4.84 lb (2.2 kg)


8.6 M40VM40V: 40-channel multiplexing unit with VOA

8.6.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the M40V board is available, that is TN11.

8.6.2 ApplicationThe M40V is a type of optical multiplexer unit. The M40V realizes the multiplexing of a maximum of 40 ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals into one fiber and adjusts the input optical power of each channel.

For the position of the M40V in the WDM system, see Figure 8-16.

Figure 8-1 Position of the M40V in the WDM system

OTUOA

OA

OTUM40V

D40OTU

OTU

OA

OA

D40

M40V

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

1

40

1

40

1

40

1

40

8.6.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the M40V are multiplexing, online optical performance monitoring, alarms and performance events monitoring and optical power adjustment.





Table 8-1 Functions and features of the M40V


Description

Basic function Multiplexes a maximum of 40 signals into one fiber and adjusts the input optical power of each channel. Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path. Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.






Adjusts the optical power of each signal before multiplexing.

8.6.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe M40V consists of the VOA module, multiplexing module, optical splitter and the control and communication module.

Figure 8-17 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the M40V.

Figure 8-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the M40V


SCC

Opticalsplitter

OUT

MON

Multiplexingmodule

VOA

VOA

VOA

M02

M01

M40

VOA ModuleThe M40V has 40 VOA modules. Each module adjusts the power for one of the 40 channels and sends the adjusted optical signals to the multiplexing module.




Multiplexing ModuleThe multiplexing module multiplexes the adjusted 40 signals into one signal, then sends it to the optical splitter.

Optical SplitterThe optical splitter divides the signal sent from the multiplexing module into two signals at different power. The main signal is output through the OUT interface and transmitted by the main optical path. The other signal is sent to the MON interface for the detection and monitoring of optical spectrum.





8.6.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the M40V front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 8-18 shows the M40V front panel.




Figure 8-1 M40V front panel

M40V

M40V

STATACTPROGSRV

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

M01M02M03M04M05M06M07M08M09M10

M11M12M13M14M15M16M17M18M19M20

M21M22M23M24M25M26M27M28M29M30

M31M32M33M34M35M36M37M38M39M40

196.00195.90195.80195.70195.60195.50195.40195.30195.20195.10

195.00194.90194.80194.70194.60194.50

194.20194.10

194.40194.30

194.00193.90193.80193.70193.60193.50

193.20193.10

193.40193.30

193.00192.90192.80192.70192.60192.50

192.20192.10

192.40192.30

M15

M16

M17

M18

M19

M20

M21

M22

M23

M24

M13

M25

M26

M14

M01

M02

M03

M04

M05

M06

M07

M08

M09

M10

MO

NM

11M

12O

UT

M29

M30

M31

M32

M33

M34

M35

M36

M37

M38

M28

M39

M40

M27







InterfacesThere are 42 optical interfaces on the M40V front panel.Table 8-34 lists the type and function of each interface.

Table 8-1 Types and functions of the M40V interfaces

Interface

Type

Function

M01–M40 LC Connected to the "OUT" interface of the OTUs, receives the signals to be multiplexed.

OUT LC Connected to an optical amplifier or ITL, transmits the multiplexed signals.


There are 40 output interfaces on the M40V front panel. Table 8-35 and Table 8-36 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the M40V board.

Table 8-2 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the M40V board (even)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

M01 196.00 1529.55 M21 194.00 1545.32

M02 195.90 1530.33 M22 193.90 1546.12

M03 195.80 1531.12 M23 193.80 1546.92

M04 195.70 1531.90 M24 193.70 1547.72

M05 195.60 1532.68 M25 193.60 1548.51

M06 195.50 1533.47 M26 193.50 1549.32

M07 195.40 1534.25 M27 193.40 1550.12

M08 195.30 1535.04 M28 193.30 1550.92

M09 195.20 1535.82 M29 193.20 1551.72

M10 195.10 1536.61 M30 193.10 1552.52

M11 195.00 1537.40 M31 193.00 1553.33

M12 194.90 1538.19 M32 192.90 1554.13

M13 194.80 1538.98 M33 192.80 1554.94




Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

M14 194.70 1539.77 M34 192.70 1555.75

M15 194.60 1540.56 M35 192.60 1556.55

M16 194.50 1541.35 M36 192.50 1557.36

M17 194.40 1542.14 M37 192.40 1558.17

M18 194.30 1542.94 M38 192.30 1558.98

M19 194.20 1543.73 M39 192.20 1559.79

M20 194.10 1544.53 M40 192.10 1560.61

Table 8-3 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the M40V board (odd)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

M01 196.05 1529.16 M21 194.05 1544.92

M02 195.95 1529.94 M22 193.95 1545.72

M03 195.85 1530.72 M23 193.85 1546.52

M04 195.75 1531.51 M24 193.75 1547.32

M05 195.65 1532.29 M25 193.65 1548.11

M06 195.55 1533.07 M26 193.55 1548.91

M07 195.45 1533.86 M27 193.45 1549.72

M08 195.35 1534.64 M28 193.35 1550.52

M09 195.25 1535.43 M29 193.25 1551.32

M10 195.15 1536.22 M30 193.15 1552.12

M11 195.05 1537.00 M31 193.05 1552.93

M12 194.95 1537.79 M32 192.95 1553.73

M13 194.85 1538.58 M33 192.85 1554.54

M14 194.75 1539.37 M34 192.75 1555.34

M15 194.65 1540.16 M35 192.65 1556.15

M16 194.55 1540.95 M36 192.55 1556.96

M17 194.45 1541.75 M37 192.45 1557.77

M18 194.35 1542.54 M38 192.35 1558.58




Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

M19 194.25 1543.33 M39 192.25 1559.39

M20 194.15 1544.13 M40 192.15 1560.20



8.6.6 Valid SlotsThe M40V occupies three slots. The valid slots for the M40V are IU1–IU15 in the subrack.

The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot number of the M40V board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the three occupied slots.

For example, if the M40V occupies slots IU1, IU2, and IU3, the slot number of the M40V displayed on the NM is IU1.

8.6.7 Characteristic Code for the M40VThe characteristic code for the M40V consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even wavelengths.


Table 8-1 Characteristic code for the M40V


The first character





For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40V is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.






Table 8-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the M40V displayed on the NM


OUT 1

M01-M40 2-41

MON 42


8.6.9 Specifications of the M40VSpecifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical SpecificationsTable 8-39 lists the optical specifications of the M40V.

Table 8-1 Optical specifications of the M40V

Item Unit Value


Insertion loss dB ≤8a






Loss accuracy dB ≤0.5 ( 0 to 10 )




≤1 ( >10dB )



a: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.






9 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

9.1 CMR2CMR2: CWDM 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit

9.1.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the CMR2 board is available, that is TN11.

9.1.2 ApplicationThe CMR2 is a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit. The CMR2 realizes the adding/dropping and multiplexing of two signals.

For the position of the CMR2 in the CWDM system, see Figure 9-1.

Figure 9-1 Position of the CMR2 in the CWDM system

CMR2 CMR2

OTU OTU OTU OTU

Client side Client side

9.1.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the CMR2 are adding/dropping and multiplexing of signals, wavelength query, and providing a cascade interface.





Table 9-1 Functions and features of the CMR2


Description

Basic function Adds/Drops and multiplexes two signals to/from the multiplexed signals.

WDM specification

Supports the CWDM specification.

Cascade interface

Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop multiplexing board to achieve the expansion.

Wavelength query

Supports the query of the wavelengths for the added/dropped signals.

9.1.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe CMR2 consists of the OADM optical module.

Figure 9-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CMR2.

Figure 9-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the CMR2

OADM opticalmodule

IN

OUT

MOMI

D1 D2 A1 A2

In Channel-Adding DirectionThe MI interface receives the signal transmitted by the main path. This signal is multiplexed with two signals added through the A1 and the A2 interfaces by the OADM optical module. Then, the multiplexed signal is transmitted through the OUT interface.

In Channel-Dropping DirectionThe IN interface receives the multiplexed signal sent from the upstream station. The OADM optical module separates two channels from the main path and these two channels are dropped through the D1 and the D2 interfaces. The rest channels are transmitted through the MO interface.




9.1.5 Front PanelThere is an indicator and eight interfaces on the CMR2 front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 9-3 shows the CMR2 front panel.

Figure 9-1 CMR2 front panel

CMR2

CMR2

STAT

LASERRADIATION



OU

TIN

MO

MI

D1

A1

D2

A2






InterfacesThere are eight optical interfaces on the CMR2 front panel. Table 9-2 lists the type and function of each interface.

Table 9-1 Types and functions of the CMR2 interfaces

Interface

Type

Function

A1–A2 LC Receives the signal sent from the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment.

D1–D2 LC Transmits the signal to the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment.

IN LC Receives the multiplexed signal.

OUT LC Transmits the multiplexed signal.

MI LC Cascade input interface, connected to the output interface of another OADM board.

MO LC Cascade output interface, connected to the input interface of another OADM board.



9.1.6 Valid SlotsThe CMR2 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the CMR2 are IU1–IU17 in the chassis.

9.1.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR2The characteristic code for the CMR2 consists of eight digits, indicating the two wavelengths that bear the signals processed by the board.


Table 9-1 Characteristic code for the CMR2



The first wavelength that bears optical signals

Indicate the first wavelength that bears the optical signals processed by the board.





The second wavelength that bears optical signals

Indicate the second wavelength that bears the optical signals processed by the board.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR2 is 14711571.

"1471" indicates that the first wavelength is 1471 nm. "1571" indicates that the second wavelength is 1571 nm.



Table 9-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CMR2 displayed on the NM


A1/D1 1

A2/D2 2

MI/MO 3

IN/OUT 4


Configuration ParametersConfigure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)

9.1.9 Specifications of the CMR2Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical SpecificationsTable 9-5 lists the optical specifications of the CMR2.




Table 9-1 Optical specifications of the CMR2

Corresponding interfaces

Item Unit

Value


– Adjacent channel spacing nm 20

IN-D1IN-D2

0.5 dB spectral width nm ≥±6.5

Drop channel insertion loss dB ≤1.5



A1-OUTA2-OUT


Add channel insertion loss dB ≤1.5

IN-MOMI-OUT


Isolation dB >13


Rules of Adding/Dropping WavelengthThe CMR2 adds/drops and multiplexes two signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are five groups of wavelengths:

Table 9-1 Rules of adding/dropping wavelength of the CMR2

Group Wavelength (nm)

A1/D1 A2/D2

1 1271 1371

2 1471 1491

3 1511 1531

4 1551 1571

5 1591 1611









9.2 CMR4CMR4: CWDM 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit

9.2.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the CMR4 board is available, that is TN11.

9.2.2 ApplicationThe CMR4 is a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit. The CMR4 realizes the adding/dropping and multiplexing of four signals.

For the position of the CMR4 in the CWDM system, see Figure 9-4.

Figure 9-1 Position of the CMR4 in the CWDM system

CMR4 CMR4

OTU 4 4OTU OTU OTU


9.2.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the CMR4 are adding/dropping and multiplexing of signals, wavelength query, and providing a cascade interface.


Table 9-1 Functions and features of the CMR4


Description

Basic function Adds/Drops and multiplexes four signals to/from the multiplexed signals.

WDM specification

Supports the CWDM specification.

Cascade interface


Wavelength query





9.2.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe CMR4 consists of the OADM optical module.

Figure 9-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CMR4.

Figure 9-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the CMR4

OADM opticalmodule

IN

OUT

MOMI

D1 D4 A1 A4

4 4

In Channel-Adding DirectionThe MI interface receives the signal transmitted by the main path. This signal is multiplexed with four signals added through the A1–A4 interfaces by the OADM optical module. Then, the multiplexed signal is transmitted through the OUT interface.

In Channel-Dropping DirectionThe IN interface receives the multiplexed signal sent from the upstream station. The OADM optical module separates four channels from the main path and these four channels are dropped through the D1–D4 interfaces. The rest channels are transmitted through the MO interface.

9.2.5 Front PanelThere is an indicator and 12 interfaces on the CMR4 front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 9-6 shows the CMR4 front panel.




Figure 9-1 CMR4 front panel

CMR4

CMR4

STAT

LASERRADIATION



OU

TIN

MO

MI

D1

A1

D2

A2

D3

A3

D4

A4



InterfacesThere are 12 optical interfaces on the CMR4 front panel. Table 9-8 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 9-1 Types and functions of the CMR4 interfaces

Interface

Type

Function









9.2.6 Valid SlotsThe CMR4 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the CMR4 are IU1–IU17.

9.2.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR4The characteristic code for the CMR4 consists of eight digits, indicating the four wavelengths that bear the signals processed by the board.


Table 9-1 Characteristic code for the CMR4


The first and the second digits


Indicate the middle two digits of the first wavelength that bears the optical signals processed by the board.

The third and the fourth digits


Indicate the middle two digits of the second wavelength that bears the optical signals processed by the board.

The fifth and the sixth digits

The third wavelength that bears optical signals

Indicate the middle two digits of the third wavelength that bears the optical signals processed by the board.





The seventh and the eighth digits

The fourth wavelength that bears optical signals

Indicate the middle two digits of the fourth wavelength that bears the optical signals processed by the board.


"47" indicates that the first wavelength is 1471 nm. "49" indicates that the second wavelength is 1491 nm. "59" indicates that the third wavelength is 1591 nm. "61" indicates that the fourth wavelength is 1611 nm.



Table 9-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CMR4 displayed on the NM


A1/D1 1

A2/D2 2

A3/D3 3

A4/D4 4

MI/MO 5

IN/OUT 6






9.2.9 Specifications of the CMR4Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical SpecificationsTable 9-11 lists the optical specifications of the CMR4.

Table 9-1 Optical specifications of the CMR4


Item Unit

Value

– Operating wavelength range

nm 1291–1611 (1371 nm not included)

– Adjacent channel spacing

nm 20

IN-D1IN-D2IN-D3IN-D4


Drop channel insertion loss

dB ≤2

Adjacent channel isolation

dB >25

Non-adjacent channel isolation

dB >35

A1-OUTA2-OUTA3-OUTA4-OUT


Add channel insertion loss

dB ≤2

IN-MOMI-OUT


Isolation dB >13


Rules of Adding/Dropping WavelengthThe CMR4 adds/drops and multiplexes four signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are four groups of wavelengths:




Table 9-1 Rules of adding/dropping wavelength of the CMR4


A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4

1 1291 1311 1331 1351

2 1391 1411 1431 1451

3 1471 1491 1591 1611

4 1511 1531 1551 1571



9.3 DMR1DMR1: CWDM 1-channel Bidirectional optical add/drop multiplexing board

9.3.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the DMR1 board is available, that is TN11.

9.3.2 ApplicationThe DMR1 board is used to add/drop and multiplex a 1310nm wavelength on the east and west directions.

For the position of the DMR1 in the CWDM system, see Figure 9-7.




Figure 9-1 Position of the DMR1 in the CWDM system

OTU OTU

DMR1

OADM

OADM

DMR1

WA ED

WIN

WOUT

WD EA

WMO

WMI EMO

EMIOA OA

OAOA

1310nm

1310nm

1310nm

1310nm

EIN

EOUT

NOTEThe DMR1 board is able to process signals from two directions. In the figure, the two DRM1 boards are actually one physical board.

9.3.3 Functions and FeaturesThe DMR1 board supports add/drop multiplexing, port concatenation and wavelength query.

Table 9-13 provides the detailed features and functions of the DMR1 board.

Table 9-1 Functions and features of the DMR1 board


Description

Basic functions Adds/drops and multiplexes a 1310nm wavelength on the east and west directions.

WDM specification Supports the CWDM specification.

Supports port concatenation.


Supports wavelength query.


9.3.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe DMR1 board consists of OADM optical modules.

Figure 9-8 shows the functional modules of the DMR1 board.




Figure 9-1 Functional modules of the DMR1 board

OADM

WIN

WOUT EIN

EOUT

WA

WD EA

EDWMI

WMO EMI

EMO

WIN receives signals from west main path. OADM module extracts 1310nm signals from the received signals. The extracted signals are dropped through WD. The remaining signals are connected to other OADM equipment through WMO. Local 1310nm signals are added through EA, and other signals are added through EMI. After multiplexed by OADM module, the signals are sent to east main path by EOUT.

Similarly, EIN receives signals from east main path. OADM module extracts 1310nm signals from the received signals. The extracted signals are dropped through ED. The remaining signals are connected to other OADM equipment through EMO. Local 1310nm signals are added through WA, and other signals are added through WMI. After multiplexed by OADM module, the signals are sent to west main path by WOUT.

9.3.5 Front PanelThere are interfaces on the front panel of the board.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 9-9 shows the DMR1 front panel.




Figure 9-1 DMR1 front panel

DMR1

DMR1

STAT

WO

UT

WM

OW

MI

EM

OE

MI

WD

WA

LASERRADIATION



ED

EA

EO

UT

WIN

EIN



InterfacesThere are 12 optical interfaces on the DMR1 board. Table 9-14 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 9-1 Types and functions of the DMR1 interfaces

Interface Type

Function

EA/WA LC Receives the 1310nm optical signals that west and east client-side equipment transmits.

ED/WD LC Transmits 1310nm optical signals to west and east client-side equipment.

EIN/WIN LC Receives the multiplexed signals on west and east main paths.

EOUT/WOUT LC Transmits multiplexed signals to west and east main paths.

EMI/WMI LC Serves as concatenation input optical interface. It connects to the output interfaces on other boards.

EMO/WMO LC Serves as concatenation output optical interface. It connects to the input interfaces on other boards.



9.3.6 Valid SlotsThe DMR1 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the DMR1 are IU1–IU17 in the subrack.


Interface DisplayTable 9-15 lists the number on the NM indicating each optical interface on the board.

Table 9-1 Number on the NM indicating each optical interface on the DMR1 board

Interface on Front Panel Number on the NM

WA/WD 1

EA/ED 2

WMI/WMO 3

WIN/WOUT 4

EMI/EMO 5




Interface on Front Panel Number on the NM

EIN/EOUT 6


Board Parameter ConfigurationConfigure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)

9.3.8 SpecificationsSpecifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.


Table 9-1 Optical specifications of the DMR1


Item Unit

Value

EA/ED/WA/WD Operating wavelength range nm 1260–1360

EIN-EDWIN-WD

Drop channel insertion loss dB ≤1

Isolation dB >40

EA-EOUTWA-WOUT

Add channel insertion loss dB ≤1

EIN-EMOEMI-EOUTWIN-WMOWMI-WOUT


Isolation dB ≥25


Rules of Adding/Dropping WavelengthThe DMR1 board adds/drops and multiplexes a 1310nm wavelength on the east and west directions from the multiplexed signals.





Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) Weight: 0.7 kg


9.4 MR2MR2: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit

9.4.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the MR2 board is available, that is TN11.

9.4.2 ApplicationThe MR2 is a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit. The MR2 realizes the adding/dropping and multiplexing of two signals.

For the position of the MR2 in the DWDM system, see Figure 9-10.

Figure 9-1 Position of the MR2 in the DWDM system

MR2OA OA

OA OAMR2

OTU OTU OTU OTU


9.4.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the MR2 are adding/dropping and multiplexing of signals, wavelength query, and providing a cascade interface.





Table 9-1 Functions and features of the MR2


Description

Basic function Adds/Drops and multiplexes random two signals to/from the multiplexed signals.

WDM specification

Supports the DWDM specification.

Cascade interface


Wavelength query


9.4.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe MR2 consists of the OADM optical module.

Figure 9-11 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MR2.

Figure 9-1 Functional modules and signal flow of MR2

OADM opticalmodule

IN

OUT

MOMI

D1 D2 A1 A2

In Channel-Adding DirectionThe MI interface receives the signal transmitted by the main path. The signal is multiplexed with the two signals added through the A1 and A2 interfaces by the OADM optical module. Then, the multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface.

In Channel-Dropping DirectionThe IN interface receives the multiplexed signal sent from the upstream station. The OADM optical module separates two channels from the main path and the two channels are dropped through the D1 and D2 interfaces. The rest channels are transmitted through the MO interface.




9.4.5 Front PanelThere is an indicator and eight interfaces on the MR2 front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 9-12 shows the MR2 front panel.

Figure 9-1 MR2 front panel

MR2

MR2

STAT

LASERRADIATION



OU

TIN

MO

MI

D1

A1

D2

A2






InterfacesThere are eight optical interfaces on the MR2 front panel. Table 9-18 lists the type and function of each interface.

Table 9-1 Types and functions of the MR2 interfaces

Interface

Type

Function









9.4.6 Valid SlotsThe MR2 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the MR2 are IU1–IU17.

9.4.7 Characteristic Code for the MR2The characteristic code for the MR2 consists of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the two signals processed by the board.


Table 9-1 Characteristic code for the MR2



The frequency of the first optical signal

Indicate the last four digits of the frequency that bears the first optical signal.


The frequency of the second optical signal

Indicate the last four digits of the frequency that bears the second optical signal.




For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR2 is 93609370.

"9360" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 193.60 THz. "9370" indicates that the frequency of the second optical signal is 193.70 THz.



Table 9-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR2 displayed on the NM


A1/D1 1

A2/D2 2

MI/MO 3

IN/OUT 4



9.4.9 Specifications of the MR2Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical SpecificationsTable 9-21 lists the optical specifications of the MR2.

Table 9-1 Optical specifications of the MR2


Item Unit

Value






Item Unit

Value

– Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100

IN-D1IN-D2





A1-OUTA2-OUT



IN-MOMI-OUT


Isolation dB >13


Rules of Adding/Dropping WavelengthThe MR2 adds/drops and multiplexes random two signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are no rules of adding/dropping wavelength.





9.5.2 ApplicationThe MR4 is a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit. The MR4 realizes the adding/dropping and multiplexing of four signals.






MR4OA OA

OA OAMR4

OTU 4 4OTU OTU OTU






Description

Basic function Adds/Drops and multiplexes consecutive four signals to/from the multiplexed signals.

WDM specification


Cascade interface


Wavelength query







Figure 9-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR4

OADM opticalmodule

IN

OUT

MOMI

D1 D4 A1 A4

4 4

In Channel-Adding DirectionThe MI interface receives the signal transmitted by the main path. The signal is multiplexed with the four signals added through the A1–A4 interfaces by the OADM optical module. Then, the multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface.

In Channel-Dropping DirectionThe IN interface receives the multiplexed signal sent from the upstream station. The OADM optical module separates four channels from the main path and the four channels are dropped through the D1–D4 interfaces. The rest channels are transmitted through the MO interface.

9.5.5 Front PanelThere is an indicator and 12 interfaces on the MR4 front panel.






MR4

MR4

STAT

LASERRADIATION



OU

TIN

MO

MI

D1

A1

D2

A2

D3

A3

D4

A4



InterfacesThere are 12 optical interfaces on the MR4 front panel. Table 9-23 lists the type and function of each interface.





Interface

Type

Function









9.5.6 Valid SlotsThe MR4 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the MR4 are IU1–IU17.

9.5.7 Characteristic Code for of MR4The characteristic code for the MR4 consists of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the first and the fourth signals processed by the board.





The frequency of first optical signal

Indicate the last four digits of the frequency that bears the first optical signal processed by the board.



Indicate the last four digits of the frequency that bears the fourth optical signal processed by the board.


"9210" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 192.10 THz.




"9240" indicates that the frequency of the fourth optical signal is 192.40 THz.

Since the four optical signals processed by the MR4 are in sequence, it is inferred that:

The frequency of the second optical signal is 192.20 THz. The frequency of the third optical signal is 192.30 THz.





A1/D1 1

A2/D2 2

A3/D3 3

A4/D4 4

MI/MO 5

IN/OUT 6










Item Unit

Value



IN-D1IN-D2IN-D3IN-D4





A1-OUTA2-OUTA3-OUTA4-OUT



IN-MOMI-OUT


Isolation dB >13


Rules of Adding/Dropping WavelengthThe MR4 adds/drops and multiplexes consecutive four signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are ten groups of wavelengths:

Table 9-1 Rules of adding/dropping wavelength of the MR4


A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4

1 1560.61 1559.79 1558.98 1558.17

2 1557.36 1556.55 1555.75 1554.94

3 1554.13 1553.33 1552.52 1551.72

4 1550.92 1550.12 1549.32 1548.51

5 1547.72 1546.92 1546.12 1545.32

6 1544.53 1543.73 1542.94 1542.14

7 1541.35 1540.56 1539.77 1538.95

8 1538.19 1537.40 1536.61 1535.82

9 1535.04 1534.25 1533.47 1532.68





A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4

10 1531.90 1531.12 1530.33 1529.55





9.6.2 ApplicationThe MR8 is a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit. The MR8 realizes the adding/dropping and multiplexing of eight signals.



MR8OA OA

OA OAMR8

OTU 8 8OTU OTU OTU









Description

Basic function Adds/Drops and multiplexes eight signals to/from the multiplexed signals.

WDM specification Supports the DWDM specification.

Cascade interface Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop multiplexing board to achieve the expansion.

Wavelength query Supports the query of the wavelengths for the added/dropped signals.



Figure 9-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR8

OADM opticalmodule

IN

OUT

MOMI

D1 D8 A1 A8

88

In Channel-Adding DirectionThe MI interface receives the signal transmitted by the main path. The signal is multiplexed with the eight signals added through the A1–A8 interfaces by the OADM optical module. Then, the multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface.

In Channel-Dropping DirectionThe IN interface receives the multiplexed signal sent from the upstream station. The OADM optical module separates eight channels from the main path and the eight channels are dropped through the D1–D8 interfaces. The rest channels are transmitted through the MO interface.

9.6.5 Front PanelThere is an indicator and 20 interfaces on the MR8 front panel.






MR8

MR8

LASERRADIATION



STAT

D6

A6

D7

A7

D5

A5

D4

A4

D8

A8

D1

A1

D2

A2

MO

MI

OU

TIN

D3

A3



InterfacesThere are 20 optical interfaces on the MR8 front panel. Table 9-29 lists the type and function of each interface.





Interface

Type

Function









9.6.6 Valid SlotsThe MR8 occupies two slots.The valid slots for the MR8 are IU1–IU16 in the subrack.

The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot number of the MR8 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two occupied slots.

For example, if the MR8 occupies slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the MR8 displayed on the NM is IU1.

9.6.7 Characteristic Code for the MR8The characteristic code for the MR8 consists of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the first and the eighth signals processed by the board.











The frequency of the eighth optical signal

Indicate the last four digits of the frequency that bears the eighth optical signal processed by the board.


"9210" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 192.10 THz. "9280" indicates that the frequency of the eighth optical signal is 192.80 THz.

Since the eight optical signals processed by the MR8 are in sequence, it is inferred that:

The frequency of the second optical signal is 192.20 THz. The frequency of the third optical signal is 192.30 THz. Inferred from it, the frequency of the seventh signal is 192.70 THz.





A1/D1 1

A2/D2 2

A3/D3 3

A4/D4 4

A5/D51 5

A6/D6 6

A7/D7 7

A8/D8 8

MI/MO 9

IN/OUT 10










Item Unit

Value



IN-D1IN-D2IN-D3IN-D4IN-D5IN-D6IN-D7IN-D8





A1-OUTA2-OUTA3-OUTA4-OUTA5-OUTA6-OUTA7-OUTA8-OUT



IN-MROMRI-OUT


Isolation dB >13


Rules of Adding/Dropping WavelengthThe MR8 adds/drops and multiplexes eight signals to/from the multiplexed signals. There are five groups of wavelengths:




Table 9-1 Rules of adding/dropping wavelength of the MR8


A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4 A5/D5 A6/D6 A7/D7 A8/D8

1 1560.61 1559.79 1558.98 1558.17 1557.36 1556.55 1555.75 1554.94

2 1554.13 1553.33 1552.52 1551.72 1550.92 1550.12 1549.32 1548.51

3 1547.72 1546.92 1546.12 1545.32 1544.53 1543.73 1542.94 1542.14

4 1541.35 1540.56 1539.77 1538.98 1538.19 1537.40 1536.61 1535.82

5 1535.04 1534.25 1533.47 1532.68 1531.90 1531.12 1530.33 1529.55



9.7 SBM2SBM2: 2-channel CWDM Single-fiber Bi-Directional Add/Drop board

9.7.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the SBM2 board is available, that is TN11.

9.7.2 ApplicationThe SBM2 board drops two signals from the multiplexed signals, and at the same time adds another two signals to the multiplexed signals.

For the position of the SBM2 in the CWDM system, see Figure 9-19.




Figure 9-1 Position of the SBM2 in the CWDM system

SBM2 SBM2

OTU

Client side

OTU OTU OTU

Client side

9.7.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the SBM2 are adding/dropping and multiplexing of signals and providing a cascade interface.


Table 9-1 Functions and features of the SBM2


Description

Basic function Drops two signals from the multiplexed signals and add other two signals into the multiplexed signals. The added and dropped optical signals must be of different wavelengths.

WDM specification Supports only the single-fiber dual fed CWDM system.

Cascade interface Provides a cascade optical interface to cascade other single-fiber bi-directional OADM boards.

9.7.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe SBM2 consists of the OADM optical module.

Figure 9-20 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SBM2.

Figure 9-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the SBM2

OADM opticalmodule

EXT LINE

D1 D2A1 A2




Signal FlowThe board receives the multiplexed signals through the LINE interface. After the optical module processes the multiplexed signals. Then, the board separates the multiplexed signals into two channels of optical signals and outputs them through the D1 and D2 optical interfaces to the OTU board or integrated client-side equipment. The board also receives two channels of optical signals through the A1 and A2 interfaces and couples them to the multiplexed signals and outputs the coupled signals through the LINE interface.

The EXT interface is used as a cascade interface. It transmits the multiplexed signals to other single-fibre bi-directional OADM boards to add/drop the rest channels of the multiplexed signals.

9.7.5 Front PanelThere are interfaces on the SBM2 front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 9-21 shows the SBM2 front panel.




Figure 9-1 SBM2 front panel

SBM2

SBM2

EX

TD

1A

1

STAT

LASERRADIATION



LINE

D2

A2



InterfacesThere are six optical interfaces on the SBM2 front panel.Table 9-35 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 9-1 Types and functions of the SBM2 interfaces

Interface

Type

Function

A1/A2 LC Receives the signal sent from the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment.

D1/D2 LC Transmits the signal to the OTU or the integrated client-side equipment.

LINE LC Receives and transmits multiplexed signals.

EXT LC Cascade interface, transmits the multiplexed signals to other single-fiber bi-directional OADM boards to add/drop the rest channels of the multiplexed signals.



9.7.6 Valid SlotsThe SBM2 occupies one slot.The valid slots for the SBM2 are IU1-IU17.



Table 9-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SBM2 displayed on the NM


A1 1

D1 2

A2 3

D2 4

LINE 5

EXT 6






Configure Band Type

9.7.8 Specifications of the SBM2Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical SpecificationsTable 9-37 lists the optical specifications of the SBM2.

Table 9-1 Optical specifications of the SBM2


Item Unit

Value

– Operating wavelength range

CWDM nm 1291 to 1611

LINE-D1LINE-D2


Isolation dB ≥30

A1-LINEA2-LINE


Isolation dB ≥30


Passthrough loss dB ≤1.5






10 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit

10.1 RMU9RMU9: 9-Port ROADM multiplexing board

10.1.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the RMU9 board is available, that is TN11.

TypeTable 10-1lists the types of the RMU9.

Table 10-1 Type description of the RMU9

Board Type Description

TN11RMU9 01 Processes the even wavelengths in C band.

10.1.2 ApplicationThe RMU9 is a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Used with the WSD9, the RMU9 realizes the wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.

The RMU9 can add eight single-channel signal or multi-channel signals to the main path. Being multiplexed by the optical multiplexer unit or optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the multiplexed channels enter the RMU9 through the channel-adding port. As for the single channels, they are directly sent to the RMU9 through the channel-adding port by the optical transponder units.

For the position of the RMU9 in the DWDM system, see Figure 10-1.




Figure 10-1 Position of the RMU9 in the DWDM system

DCM

Client-side

O A

RMU9

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

O A O A

O A

DCM

WSD9

DMUX

DMUX

WSD9

MUX

RMU9

MUX

Client-side

Client-side Client-side

8 8

8 8

NOTEAn OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelength at the same time.

10.1.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the RMU9 are dynamic grooming of wavelengths, online optical performance monitoring, and alarms and performance events monitoring.


Table 10-1 Functions and features of the RMU9


Description

Basic function Adds eight single-channel signal or multi-channel signals to the main path. Used with the OTU with tunable wavelength, the RMU9 realizes the dynamic input of eight channel signals.

WDM specification






Description





10.1.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe RMU9 consists of the optical multiplexing module, coupling module, and control and communication module.

For detailed functions and features, refer to Figure 10-2.

Figure 10-1 Functions and features of the RMU9

SCC

AM1 AM2

Coupling module


AM3 AM4 AM5 AM6 AM7 AM8

Optical multiplexing module

VOA VOA VOA VOA VOA VOA VOA VOA

Splitter

Splitter

ROA

TOA

EXPI MONI

MONO

OUT

Optical Multiplexing Module and Coupling ModuleThe channels are added through AM1-AM8 interfaces. As for the multi-channel signals to be input, they are multiplexed by the multiplexing unit before entering the AMn interface. As for a single-channel signal to be input, it is directly sent to the AMn interface after being converted by an optical transponder unit.

The TOA interface can be connected to optical amplifying unit to realize cascading. If cascading is not needed, the optical signals should be directly sent to the ROA interface.




The signals input through the EXPI interface and transmitted by the main path are multiplexed with the signals added through the ROA interface at the local station, and then the multiplexed signal are output through the OUT interface.

The VOA module adjusts the optical power for each optical signal added at the local station.

A small amount of optical signals input through the EXPI interface are separated from the main path, and output through the MONI interface. They are used for optical performance detection.

A small amount of optical signals are separated from those output through the TOA interface, and output to the MONO interface. These signals are used for optical performance detection.




10.1.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the RMU9 front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 10-3 shows the RMU9 front panel.




Figure 10-1 RMU9 front panel

RMU9

RMU9

STATACTPROGSRV

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

MO

NO

MO

NI

OU

TE

XP

ITO

AR

OA

AM

1A

M2

AM

3A

M4

AM

5A

M6

AM

7A

M8



InterfacesThere are 14 optical interfaces on the RMU9 front panel. Table 10-3 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 10-1 Types and functions of the RMU9 interfaces

Interface

Type

Function

AM1–AM8 LC Receive the single-channel signals or multi-channel signals that are to be multiplexed into the main path.

OUT LC Transmits the main path signal.

EXPI LC Receives the main path signal.

MONI LC Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online detection of the optical spectrum for the input signals transmitted by the main optical path.The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the EXPI port (15dB lower than the actual signal power).

MONO LC Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online detection of optical spectrum for the signals output through the TOA interface.The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the TOA port (15dB lower than the actual signal power).

TOA LC Used as the cascade output interface.

ROA LC Used as the cascade input interface.

NOTEWhen cascading is not adopted, the TOA and ROA interfaces should be directly connected by a fiber jumper.



10.1.6 Valid SlotsThe RMU9 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the RMU9 are IU1-IU17.






Table 10-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the RMU9 displayed on the NM


EXPI 1

OUT 2

AM1-AM8 3-10

TOA/ROA 11

MONI 12

MONO 13


Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)

Maximum Attenuation Ratio (dB)

Minimum Attenuation Ratio (dB)

10.1.8 Specifications of the RMU9Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical SpecificationsTable 10-5 lists the optical specifications of the RMU9.

Table 10-1 Optical specifications of the RMU9

Item Unit Value

Insertion loss EXPI-OUT dB ≤8.5

AMxa-TOA dB ≤12.5b

ROA-OUT dB ≤1.5








Item Unit Value

Attenuation accuracy dB ≤1

a: AMx represents the AM1-AM8 interface.

b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.


Power Consumption The maximum power consumption at 25: 11 W The maximum power consumption at 55: 12 W

10.2 ROAMROAM: reconfigurable optical adding board

10.2.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the ROAM board is available, that is TN11.

TypeTable 10-6lists the types of the ROAM.

Table 10-1 Type description of the ROAM


TN11ROAM 01 Processes the even wavelengths in C band.

02 Processes the odd wavelengths in C band.

10.2.2 ApplicationThe ROAM is a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Used with the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the ROAM realizes the wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.

For the position of the ROAM in the DWDM system, see Figure 10-4.




Figure 10-1 Position of the ROAM in the DWDM system

O A

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

O A

O A

DMUX

ROAM

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

DMUX

OTU

OTU

ROAM

O A


40 40


10.2.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the ROAM are dynamic grooming of wavelengths, built-in power equilibrium, and alarms and performance events monitoring.


Table 10-1 Functions and features of the ROAM


Description

Basic function Realizes the dynamic adding/dropping, pass-through, and blocking of a maximum of 40 wavelengths withe the demultiplexing board as well as the dynamic grooming of wavelengths for the services on the ring network.

WDM specification Supports the DWDM specification.

Power equilibrium Realizes the wavelength-level equilibrium and control of optical power to flatten the spectrum for the working signals.






10.2.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe ROAM consists of the planar lightwave circuit (PLC) optical module and the control and communication module.


Figure 10-1 Functions and features of the ROAM

OUT

DM

EXPI

EXPO

PLC optical module

IN

SCC

M01 M02

Optical demultiplexing module


M40

Optical multiplexing module

PLC Optical ModuleThe main path signal is received through the IN interface. The optical splitter divides the main path signal into two same signals. One signal is output to the optical demultiplexer unit through the DM interface and demultiplexed into single wavelengths dropped at the local station. The other signal passes through and is output through the EXPO interface.

The signals to be added at the local station are received through the corresponding M01–M40 interfaces. These signals are multiplexed with the signal input through the EXPI interface and then output through the OUT interface.

The PLC optical module blocks and terminates the signals dropped at the local station and adjusts the optical power of other signals.

The PLC optical module contains the VOA modules that realize the power adjustment at the wavelength level.







10.2.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the ROAM front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 10-6 shows the ROAM front panel.

Figure 10-1 ROAM front panel

ROAM

ROAM

STATACTPROGSRV

LASERRADIATION



M01M02M03M04M05M06M07M08M09M10

M11M12M13M14M15M16M17M18M19M20

M21M22M23M24M25M26M27M28M29M30

M31M32M33M34M35M36M37M38M39M40

196.00195.90195.80195.70195.60195.50195.40195.30195.20195.10

195.00194.90194.80194.70194.60194.50

194.20194.10

194.40194.30

194.00193.90193.80193.70193.60193.50

193.20193.10

193.40193.30

193.00192.90192.80192.70192.60192.50

192.20192.10

192.40192.30

INO

UT

M01

M02

M03

M04

M05

M06

M07

M08

M09

M10

M11

M12

M13

M14

M15

M16

M17

M18

M19

M20

EX

PO

M21

M22

M23

M24

M25

M26

M27

M28

M29

M30

EX

PI

M31

M32

M34

M35

M36

M37

M38

M39

M40

DM






Service active status indicator (ACT) – green Board software status indicator (PROG) – dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) – triple-colored (red, green, yellow)

InterfacesThere are 45 optical interfaces on the ROAM front panel. Table 10-8 lists the type and function of each interface.

Table 10-1 Types and functions of the ROAM interfaces

Interface

Type

Function

M01-M40 LC Add channels from the local station.

DM LC Drops channels to the local station.


IN LC Receives the main path signal.

EXPO LC Used as the cascade interface to transmit the pass-through signal.

EXPI LC Used as the cascade interface to receive the pass-through signal.

There are 40 output interfaces on the ROAM front panel. Table 10-9 and Table 10-10 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the ROAM board.

Table 10-2 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the ROAM board (even)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

M01 196.00 1529.55 M21 194.00 1545.32

M02 195.90 1530.33 M22 193.90 1546.12

M03 195.80 1531.12 M23 193.80 1546.92

M04 195.70 1531.90 M24 193.70 1547.72

M05 195.60 1532.68 M25 193.60 1548.51

M06 195.50 1533.47 M26 193.50 1549.32

M07 195.40 1534.25 M27 193.40 1550.12

M08 195.30 1535.04 M28 193.30 1550.92

M09 195.20 1535.82 M29 193.20 1551.72




Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

M10 195.10 1536.61 M30 193.10 1552.52

M11 195.00 1537.40 M31 193.00 1553.33

M12 194.90 1538.19 M32 192.90 1554.13

M13 194.80 1538.98 M33 192.80 1554.94

M14 194.70 1539.77 M34 192.70 1555.75

M15 194.60 1540.56 M35 192.60 1556.55

M16 194.50 1541.35 M36 192.50 1557.36

M17 194.40 1542.14 M37 192.40 1558.17

M18 194.30 1542.94 M38 192.30 1558.98

M19 194.20 1543.73 M39 192.20 1559.79

M20 194.10 1544.53 M40 192.10 1560.61

Table 10-3 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the ROAM board (odd)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

M01 196.05 1529.16 M21 194.05 1544.92

M02 195.95 1529.94 M22 193.95 1545.72

M03 195.85 1530.72 M23 193.85 1546.52

M04 195.75 1531.51 M24 193.75 1547.32

M05 195.65 1532.29 M25 193.65 1548.11

M06 195.55 1533.07 M26 193.55 1548.91

M07 195.45 1533.86 M27 193.45 1549.72

M08 195.35 1534.64 M28 193.35 1550.52

M09 195.25 1535.43 M29 193.25 1551.32

M10 195.15 1536.22 M30 193.15 1552.12

M11 195.05 1537.00 M31 193.05 1552.93

M12 194.95 1537.79 M32 192.95 1553.73

M13 194.85 1538.58 M33 192.85 1554.54

M14 194.75 1539.37 M34 192.75 1555.34




Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

Interface

Frequency (THz)

Wavelength (nm)

M15 194.65 1540.16 M35 192.65 1556.15

M16 194.55 1540.95 M36 192.55 1556.96

M17 194.45 1541.75 M37 192.45 1557.77

M18 194.35 1542.54 M38 192.35 1558.58

M19 194.25 1543.33 M39 192.25 1559.39

M20 194.15 1544.13 M40 192.15 1560.20



10.2.6 Valid SlotsThe ROAM occupies three slots. The valid slots for the ROAM are IU1–IU15 in the subrack.

The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot number of the ROAM board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the three occupied slots.

For example, if the ROAM occupies slots IU1, IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the ROAM displayed on the NM is IU1.



Table 10-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ROAM displayed on the NM


IN 1

EXPO 2

EXPI 3

OUT 4





DM 5

A01-A40 6-45


Wavelength Target Power

10.2.8 Specifications of the ROAMSpecifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical SpecificationsTable 10-12 lists the optical specifications of the ROAM.

Table 10-1 Optical specifications of the ROAM

Item Unit Value


Insertion loss Mxa-OUT dB ≤9b

IN-DM dB ≤7

EXPI-OUT dB ≤14b

IN-EXPO dB ≤3

Operating wavelength range nm 1529 - 1561



Attenuation range dB 0 - 20

Attenuation precision dB <1 (0 to 10dB)

<1.5 ( >10dB )


Module switch time ms ≤50

Extinction ratio dB 30

-0.5 dB bandwidth of adding wavelength nm >0.3




Item Unit Value

-0.5 dB bandwidth of pass-through wavelength nm >0.2

a: Mx represents the M01–M40 interface.



Power Consumption The maximum power consumption at 25: 66 W The maximum power consumption at 55: 73 W

10.3 WSD9WSD9: 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board

10.3.1 Version DescriptionThree functional versions of the WSD9 board are available: TN11, TN12 and TN13. The main difference among the three versions is that the channel spacing of the wavelength is different.

VersionTable 10-13 lists the version description of the WSD9.

Table 10-1 Version description of the WSD9

Item Description

Functional version

Three functional versions of the WSD9 board are available: TN11, TN12 and TN13.

Similarity The TN11WSD9, TN12WSD9 and TN13WSD9 boards share the same functioning principle.

Difference The wavelength of the TN11WSD9 board is separated at 100 GHz channel spacing, and the board occupies two slots.The wavelength of the TN12WSD9 board is separated at 100 GHz channel spacing, and the board occupies two slots.The wavelength of the TN13WSD9 board is separated at 50 GHz channel spacing, and the board occupies three slots.




Item Description

Replacement The TN12WSD9 and TN11WSD9 boards share the same functionality and can be replaced with each other. But after the TN11WSD9 board is replaced with the TN12WSD9 board, the SCC software need be upgraded.The boards of other versions cannot be replaced with each other.

TypeTable 10-14 lists the types of the WSD9.

Table 10-1 Type description of the WSD9

Board Type

Description

TN12WSD9 A01 The wavelength of the board is separated at 100 GHz channel spacing in C band.

TN13WSD9 C01 The wavelength of the board is separated at 50 GHz channel spacing in C band.

10.3.2 ApplicationThe WSD9 is a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Used with the WSM9 or the RMU9, the WSD9 realizes the wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.

The single-channel or multi-channel signals to be dropped at the local station are output through the interfaces of the WSD9 based on the configuration.

If the dropped signal is a multi-channel signal, it is sent to the optical demultiplexer unit for demultiplexing. Then, the demultiplexed signals enter corresponding OTUs and are sent to the client-side equipment at the local station.

If the dropped signal is a single-channel signal, it is directly sent to the OTU at the local station.

For the position of the WSD9 in the DWDM system, see Figure 10-7.




Figure 10-1 Position of the WSD9 in the DWDM system

DCM

O A

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

O A

O A

DCM

WSD9

DMUX

DMUX

WSM9

MUX

WSM9

MUX

WSD9O A



8

88

8


10.3.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the WSD9 are dynamic grooming of wavelengths, online optical performance monitoring, and alarms and performance events monitoring.


Table 10-1 Functions and features of the WSD9


Description

Basic function Configures any wavelengths to any interfaces. A node on the ring or chain network can output any wavelength combination to any interface so as to achieve the dynamic allocation of wavelengths.

WDM specification






Description






Provides the function to adjust the optical power of each channel.

10.3.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe WSD9 consists of the WSS optical module and the control and communication module.


Figure 10-1 Functions and features of the WSD9

WSS optical module


IN

SCC

DM1

MONI

DM2 DM7DM3 DM4 DM5 DM6 DM8

EXPO

MONO

WSS Optical ModuleThe main path signal is received through the IN interface. The single-channel or multi-channel signals to be dropped at the local station are output through the DM1–DM8 interfaces based on the configuration. Other channels pass through the station and are output through the EXPO interface.

The WSS optical module can combine any wavelengths and transmit the signals through the DM1–DM8 and EXPO interfaces.




A small amount of optical signal are separated from those input through the IN interface. These separated signals are output through the MONI interface and used for optical performance monitoring.

A small amount of optical signal are separated from those output through the EXPO interface. Theses separated signals are output through the MONO interface and used for optical performance monitoring.

The WSS optical module contains the VOA module that realizes the power adjustment at the wavelength level.




10.3.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the WSD9 front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 10-9 shows the WSD9 front panel.




Figure 10-1 WSD9 front panel

WSD9

WSD9

LASERRADIATION



STATACTPROGSRV

DM

1D

M2

DM

3D

M4

EX

PO

IND

M5

DM

6M

ON

OM

ON

ID

M7

DM

8

WSD9

WSD9

STATACTPROGSRV

LASERRADIATION



DM

1D

M2

DM

3D

M4

EX

PO

IND

M5

DM

6M

ON

OM

ON

ID

M7

DM

8

TN13WSD9TN11WSD9/TN12WSD9



InterfacesThere are 12 optical interfaces on the WSD9 front panel. Table 10-16 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 10-1 Types and functions of the WSD9 interfaces

Interface

Type

Function

DM1-DM8 LC Transmit the single-channel or multi-channel signal separated from the main path. If the signal is a multi-channel signal, it is sent to the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit. If the signal is a single-channel signal, it is directly sent to the optical transponder unit.

EXPO LC Transmits the main path signal.


MONI LC Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the received main path signal.The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the IN port (15dB lower than the actual signal power).

MONO LC Connected to the output interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the transmitted main path signal.The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the EXPO port (15dB lower than the actual signal power).



10.3.6 Valid SlotsThe TN11WSD9 and TN12WSD9 occupies two slots. The TN13WSD9 occupies three slots. The valid slots for the TN11WSD9 and TN12WSD9 are IU1–IU16 in the subrack. The valid slots for the TN13WSD9 are IU1–IU15 in the subrack.

The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot number of the TN11WSD9 and TN12WSD9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two occupied slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSD9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the three occupied slots.

For example, if the TN11WSD9 occupies slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the WSD9 displayed on the NM is IU1. If the TN13WSD9 occupies slots IU1, IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the WSD9 displayed on the NM is IU1.






Table 10-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSD9 displayed on the NM


IN 1

EXPO 2

DM1-DM8 3-10

MONI 11

MONO 12





10.3.8 Specifications of the WSD9Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical SpecificationsTable 10-18 lists the optical specifications of the WSD9.

Table 10-1 Optical specifications of the WSD9

Item Unit Value

Adjacent channel spacing TN11WSD9 GHz 100

TN12WSD9 100

TN13WSD9 50

Insertion loss IN-DMxa

IN-EXPOdB ≤8b


0.5 dB spectral width nm >0.35




Item Unit Value



Extinction ratio dB ≥35

Reconfiguration time s 3

Optical return loss dB 30

Directivity dB 35

Attenuation range of each of dropping wavelengths dB 0–15

Attenuation precision of each of dropping wavelengths dB ±1

Polarization dependence loss dB ≤1

Dimension - 1×9

a: DMx represents the DM1–DM8 interface.



Dimensions of front panel:

TN11WSD9: 264.6 mm (H) × 50.8 mm (W) TN12WSD9: 264.6 mm (H) × 50.8 mm (W) TN13WSD9: 264.6 mm (H) × 76.2 mm (W)

Weight:

TN11WSD9: 4.85 lb (2.2 kg) TN12WSD9: 4.85 lb (2.2 kg) TN13WSD9: 10.58 lb (4.8 kg)

Power ConsumptionBoard The maximum power

consumption at 25 (W)The maximum power consumption at 55 (W)

TN11WSD9 17.0 18.7

TN12WSD9 30.0 35.0

TN13WSD9 30.0 35.0




10.4 WSM9WSM9: 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board

10.4.1 Version DescriptionThree functional versions of the WSM9 board are available: TN11, TN12 and TN13. The main difference among the three versions is that the channel spacing of the wavelength is different.

VersionTable 10-19 lists the version description of the WSM9.

Table 10-1 Version description of the WSM9

Item Description

Functional version

Three functional versions of the WSM9 board are available: TN11, TN12 and TN13.

Similarity The TN11WSM9, TN12WSM9 and TN13WSM9 boards share the same functioning principle.

Difference The wavelength of the TN11WSM9 board is separated at 100 GHz channel spacing, and the board occupies two slots.The wavelength of the TN12WSM9 board is separated at 100 GHz channel spacing, and the board occupies two slots.The wavelength of the TN13WSM9 board is separated at 50 GHz channel spacing, and the board occupies three slots.

Replacement The TN12WSM9 and TN11WSM9 boards share the same functionality and can be replaced with each other. But after the TN11WSM9 board is replaced with the TN12WSM9 board, the SCC software need be upgraded.The boards of other versions cannot be replaced with each other.

TypeTable 10-20 lists the types of the WSM9.

Table 10-1 Type description of the WSM9

Board Type

Description

TN12WSM9 A01 The wavelength of the board is separated at 100 GHz channel spacing in C band.

TN13WSM9 C01 The wavelength of the board is separated at 50 GHz channel spacing in C band.




10.4.2 ApplicationThe WSM9 is a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Used with the WSD9, the WSM9 realizes the wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.

The single-channel or multi-channel signals to be added to the main path are input through the interfaces of WSM9.

If the added signal is a mutli-channel signal, it is received after being multiplexed by the optical multiplexer unit. If the added signal is a single-channel signal, it is directly received after being converted by the OTU.

For the position of the WSM9 in the DWDM system, see Figure 10-10.

Figure 10-1 Position of the WSM9 in the DWDM system

DCM

O A

WSM9

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

O A O A

O A

DCM

WSD9

DMUX

DMUX

WSD9

MUX

WSM9

MUX



8 8

88


10.4.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the WSM9 are dynamic grooming of wavelengths, online optical performance monitoring, and alarms and performance events monitoring.





Table 10-1 Functions and features of the WSM9


Description

Basic function Configures any wavelengths to any interfaces. A node on the ring or chain network can receive any wavelengths at the local station through any interfaces so as to achieve the dynamic allocation of wavelengths.

WDM specification







Provides the function to adjust the optical power of each channel.

10.4.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe WSM9 consists of the WSS optical module and the control and communication module.


Figure 10-1 Functions and features of the WSM9

AM1 AM2 AM7AM3 AM4 AM5 AM6 AM8

WSS optical module


SCC

OUT

MONO

EXPI

MONI




WSS Optical ModuleThe single-channel or multi-channel signals to be added at the local station are input through the AM1–AM8 interfaces. The main path signal received through the EXPI interface is multiplexed with the signals added through the AM1–AM8 interfaces. Then, the multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface.

The WSS optical module can combine any wavelengths and receive the signals through the AM1–AM8 or EXPI interfaces.

A small amount of optical signals are separated from those input through the EXPI interface. These separated signals are output through the MONI interface and used for optical performance monitoring.

A small amount of optical signals are separated from those output through the OUT interface. Theses separated signals are output through the MONO interface and used for optical performance monitoring.





10.4.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the WSM9 front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 10-12 shows the WSM9 front panel.




Figure 10-1 WSM9 front panel

TN13WSM9

WSM9

WSM9

STATACTPROGSRV

LASERRADIATION



AM

1A

M2

AM

3A

M4

OU

TE

XP

IA

M5

AM

6M

ON

OM

ON

IA

M7

AM

8

WSM9

WSM9

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

STATACTPROGSRV

AM

1A

M2

AM

3A

M4

OU

TE

XP

IA

M5

AM

6M

ON

OM

ON

IA

M7

AM

8

TN11WSM9/TN12WSM9



InterfacesThere are 12 optical interfaces on the WSM9 front panel. Table 10-22 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 10-1 Types and functions of the WSM9 interfaces

Interface

Type

Function

AM1-AM8 LC Receive the single-channel signal or multi-channel signal that are to be multiplexed into the main path.


EXPI LC Receives the main path signal.

MONI LC Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the received main path signal.The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the EXPI port (15dB lower than the actual signal power).

MONO LC Connected to the output interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the transmitted main path signal.The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (15dB lower than the actual signal power).

Laser Safety LevelTN11WSM9 and TN12WSM9:

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1.


TN13WSM9:

The laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 1M.


10.4.6 Valid SlotsThe TN11WSM9 and TN12WSM9 occupies two slots. The TN13WSM9 occupies three slots. The valid slots for the TN11WSM9 and TN12WSM9 are IU1–IU16 in the subrack. The valid slots for the TN13WSM9 are IU1–IU15 in the subrack.

The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot number of the TN11WSM9 and TN12WSM9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two occupied slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSM9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the three occupied slots.

For example, if the TN11WSM9 occupies slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the WSM9 displayed on the NM is IU1. If the TN13WSM9 occupies slots IU1, IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the TN13WSM9 displayed on the NM is IU1.






Table 10-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSM9 displayed on the NM


EXPI 1

OUT 2

AM1-AM8 3-10

MONI 11

MONO 12




10.4.8 Specifications of the WSM9Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical SpecificationsTable 10-24 lists the optical specifications of the WSM9.

Table 10-1 Optical specifications of the WSM9

Item Unit Value

Adjacent channel spacing TN11WSM9 GHz 100

TN12WSM9 100

TN13WSM9 50

Insertion loss AMxa-OUTEXPI-OUT

dB ≤8b




Item Unit Value








Directivity dB 35

Attenuation range of each of adding wavelengths dB 0–15

Attenuation precision of each of adding wavelengths dB ±1


Dimension - 9×1

a: AMx represents the AM1–AM8 interface.



Dimensions of front panel:

TN11WSM9: 264.6 mm (H) × 50.8 mm (W) TN12WSM9: 264.6 mm (H) × 50.8 mm (W) TN13WSM9: 264.6 mm (H) × 76.2 mm (W)

Weight:

TN11WSM9: 4.85 lb (2.2 kg) TN12WSM9: 4.85 lb (2.2 kg) TN13WSM9: 10.58 lb (4.8 kg)

Power ConsumptionBoard The maximum power

consumption at 25 (W)The maximum power consumption at 55 (W)

TN11WSM9 17.0 18.7

TN12WSM9 30.0 35.0

TN13WSM9 30.0 35.0




10.5 WSMD4WSMD4: 4-Port Wavelength Selective Switching Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board

10.5.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the WSMD4 board is available, that is TN11.

TypeTable 10-25lists the version description of the WSMD4.

Table 10-1 Version description of the WSMD4


TN11WSMD4 01 Processes the even wavelengths in C band.

02 Processes the odd wavelengths in C band.

10.5.2 ApplicationThe WSMD4 is a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit. Used with the optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit, and the optical add and drop multiplexing unit, WSMD4 realizes the wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.

For the position of the WSMD4 in the DWDM system, see Figure 10-13.




Figure 10-1 Position of the WSMD4 in the DWDM system

WestODF

EastODFWSMD4 WSMD4

FIU

FIU

WSMD4FIU

FIU

WSMD4

West clientside

NorthODF

SouthODF

East clientside

North clientside

South clientside

10.5.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the WSMD4 are service broadcasting, dynamic grooming of wavelengths, online optical performance monitoring, and alarms and performance events monitoring.


Table 10-1 Functions and features of the WSMD4


Description

Basic function Provides service broadcasting function, and configures any wavelengths to any interfaces. A node on the ring or chain network can receive any wavelengths at the local station through any interfaces, and output any wavelength combination to any interface, so as to achieve the dynamic allocation of wavelengths.

WDM specification








Description




Provides the function to adjust the optical power of any add wavelengths at the local station.

10.5.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe WSMD4 consists of the WSS optical module, RDU (ROADM Demux Unit) optical module and the control and communication module.


Figure 10-1 Functions and features of the WSMD4

DM1DM2DM3DM4

SCC

MONI

WSS optical moduleOUT

IN RDU optical module

MONO

AM1AM2AM3AM4


RDU Optical Module and WSS Optical ModuleThe optical signals of the main path is accessed through the IN interface. It is broadcasted into four same optical signals through the RDU optical module. Then, the board outputs the single-channel or multiplexed signals to be dropped at the local station through any of the DM1-DM4 interface as per the configuration. Other wavelengths that are not dropped at the local station are output through the unused interface in the DM1-DM4.

Local add optical signal (single-channel or multiplexed signals) is input to the board through any of the AM1-AM4 optical interface. If multiple wavelengths are to be added, the signals are first sent to the multiplexing unit for processing and then input to the WSMD4 board through the AMn optical interface; if single wavelength is to be added, the signal can be directly input to the WSDM4 board from the optical transponder unit through the AMn interface. Optical signals cross-connected from




other directions are input to the board through the AM1-AM4 optical interfaces. Then, they are multiplexed with the added wavelengths at the local station. The multiplexed signals are output through the OUT optical interface.

The WSS optical module can access any combination of wavelengths through any of the following optical interfaces: AM1, AM2, AM3 and AM4.

A small amount of optical signals are separated from those input through the IN interface. These separated signals are output through the MONI interface and used for optical performance monitoring.

A small amount of optical signals are separated from those output through the OUT interface. Theses separated signals are output through the MONO interface and used for optical performance monitoring.





10.5.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the WSMD4 front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 10-15 shows the WSMD4 front panel.




Figure 10-1 WSMD4 front panel

WSMD4

WSMD4

STATACTPROGSRV

DM

1A

M1

DM

2A

M2

OU

TIN

DM

3A

M3

MO

NO

MO

NI

DM

4A

M4

LASERRADIATION





InterfacesThere are 12 optical interfaces on the WSMD4 front panel. Table 10-27 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 10-1 Types and functions of the WSMD4 interfaces

Interface

Type

Function

AM1-AM4 LC Receives the single-channel signal or multiplexed signal from the local station or other stations. Then, the accessed signal is multiplexed into the main path.

DM1-DM4 LC Transmits the multiplexed signals to be output at the local station or other stations to the optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add/drop multiplexing unit.



MONI LC Connected to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the received main path signal.The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the EXPI port (15dB lower than the actual signal power).

MONO LC Connected to the output interface of the spectrum analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical performance monitoring for the transmitted main path signal.The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (15dB lower than the actual signal power).



10.5.6 Valid SlotsThe WSMD4 occupies two slots. The valid slots for the WSMD4 are IU1–IU16 in the subrack.

The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot number of the WSMD4 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two occupied slots.

For example, if the WSMD4 occupies slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the WSMD4 displayed on the NM is IU1.






Table 10-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSMD4 displayed on the NM


IN 1

DM1 2

AM1 3

OUT 4

DM2-DM4 5 to 7

AM2-AM4 8 to 10

MONO 11

MONI 12





Configure Band

Configure Working Band Parity

Actual Band

Actual Working Band Parity

10.5.8 Specifications of the WSMD4Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical SpecificationsTable 10-29 lists the optical specifications of the WSMD4.




Table 10-1 Optical specifications of the WSMD4

Item Unit Value



Insertion loss AMxa-OUTIN-DMxa

dB ≤8b






Directivity dB 35

Attenuation range per add wavelength dB 0–15

Attenuation accuracy per add wavelength dB ±1


Dimension - 4

a: AMx represents the AM1–AM4 interface.

DMx represents the DM1-DM4 interface.







11 Optical Amplifying Unit

11.1 CRPCCRPC: case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for C-band

11.1.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the CRPC board is available, that is TN11.

11.1.2 ApplicationThe CRPC is a type of optical amplifier unit and adopts the backward pumping technology. It supports the transmission over ultra-long distance and the application of the 40G OTU. It can generate multi-channel pump light of high power. The CRPC must be used with the EDFA.

CAUTIONAlways turn off the pump laser of the CRPC before removing or inserting the fiber of the CRPC.

For the position of the CRPC in the WDM system, see Figure 11-1.

Figure 11-1 Position of the CRPC in the WDM system (backward pumping)

CRPC

CRPC

OTUOBU1

OAU1

MUX

DMUX

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OAU1

OBU1FIU

FIU

FIU

FIU

Clientside

Clientside

Clientside

Clientside

MUX

DMUX




11.1.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main function and feature supported by the CRPC is online optical performance monitoring.


Table 11-1 Functions and features of the CRPC


Description

Basic function Generates multi-channel pump light of high power, providing energy for the amplification of signals in the fiber.

Realizes the distributed online amplification of signals over long distance with wide bandwidth and low noise.




Detects the optical power of the pump laser, temperature control current, pump current, and back-facet current.

11.1.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe CRPC consists of the pump source module and the control and communication module. The CRPC is used at the receive end of the system, making use of the stimulated Raman scattering effect to amplify the optical signals during transmission. The pump light and the signal light are of different directions. The CRPC must be used with the EDFA.

Figure 11-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC.

Figure 11-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC

Pump source module


SCC

LINE

Pumplight

SingalOpticalsplitter

SYS

MON




Signal FlowThe pump source module of the CRPC sends the pump light to the line side through the LINE optical interface. The multiplexed signals are received by the LINE optical interface of the CRPC. The pump source module sends the signals into the demultiplexer to split them into two, among which the service optical signals are output through the SYS interface. A few supervisory signals are output to the multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit (MCA4, MCA8) or test instrument through the MON interface for online optical performance monitoring. The Ethernet interface of the CRPC is connected to the ETH1/ETH2 interface of the AUX or the ETH3 interface of the EFI board for the communications with the SCC.

Pump Source ModuleThe laser in the pump source module generates the pump light and sends the light to the optical line for transmission. This module makes use of the stimulated Raman scattering effect of the fiber to amplify the optical signals during transmission.

Optical Splitter An optical splitter splits one channels of optical signals from the pump source module into two channels of signals of different power. One of the them are output through the SYS interface and transmitted in the main optical path. The other channel of signals are output to the MON interface for spectrum detection and supervising.

The optical power of the MON interface is 1/99 of the optical power of the OUT interface, that means the optical power of the MON interface is lower than that of the OUT interface by 20dB.




11.1.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the CRPC front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 11-3 shows the CRPC front panel.




Figure 11-1 CRPC front panel

:警告开启电源前，务必连好光纤WARNING: FIBERS MUSTBE CONNECTED SEFOREPOWER UP

!

AVOID EYE OR SKINEXPOSURE TO DIRECT OR

CLASS 4 LASERPRODUCT

SCATTERED RADIATION

LASERRADIATION

ALMCRPC RUN

LINESYSMON

RS232-1 RS232-2 LAN

IndicatorsThere are two indicators on the front panel.

Running status indicator (RUN) - green Service alarm indicator (ALM) - red

InterfacesThere are four optical interfaces on the CRPC front panel. Table 11-2 lists the type and function of each interface.

Table 11-1 Types and functions of the CRPC interfaces

Interface Type Function

LINE LSH/APC Receives the line optical signal.

SYS LC Transmits the amplified signal to the FIU.

MON LC Connected to the MCA4 or MCA8, accomplishes the online performance monitoring.The MON port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal at the SYS port (20dB lower than the actual signal power).

LAN RJ-45 Connected to the ETH1 or ETH2 of the AUX interface for the communications with the SCC.

RS232-1/ RS232-2

- RS232 communication interface


The maximum output optical power of each optical interface is above 27 dBm (500 mW).

11.1.6 Valid SlotsThe CRPC is a case-shaped Raman amplifier. It is put outside the cabinet and not installed in the subrack. Its Ethernet interface is connected to the ETH1 or ETH2 of




the AUX for the communications with the SCC. The logical slots of CRPC is slot 28 to slot 31 on the T2000.

11.1.7 Dip Switch and JumperThere are two groups of jumpers on the CRPC boards. The two groups are identified as J3 and J4.

Figure 11-4 shows the number of each jumper.

Figure 11-1 Jumpers on the CRPC board

CPU

J3J4

1 2

9 10

10

12

9

CRPC

Jumpers 9 to 10 in J3 and 1 to 6 in J4 are used for internal identification on the board. To ensure the normal operation of the board, follow the requirements below to set the jumpers.

Do not connect jumpers 1 to 2 in J3. Do not connect jumpers 3 to 4 in J3. Do not connect jumpers 5 to 6 in J3. Do not connect jumpers 7 to 8 in J3. Do not connect jumpers 9 to 10 in J3. Connect jumpers 1 to 2 in J4. Connect jumpers 3 to 4 in J4. Connect jumpers 5 to 6 in J4.

Jumpers 7–8 and 9–10 in J4 are used to set the IP of the CRPC board. When several CRPC boards are used in an NE, an IP for each board is required to prevent IP conflict. The following are jumper setting regulations:

When jumpers 7–8 and 9–10 in J4 are not connected, the board IP is 192.168.0.28.

When jumpers 7–8 in J4 are connected and jumpers 9–10 are not connected, the board IP is 192.168.0.29.

When jumpers 7–8 in J4 are not connected and jumpers 9–10 are connected, the board IP is 192.168.0.30.

When jumpers 7–8 and 9–10 in J4 are connected, the board IP is 192.168.0.31.




11.1.8 Characteristic Code for of CRPCThe characteristic code for the CRPC consists of one character and two digits, indicating the gain of the optical signals processed by the board.


Table 11-1 Characteristic code for the CRPC


The first character – This character is always G.

The two digits Gain Indicate the gain value.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CRPC is G10, indicating 10 dB gain.



Table 11-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CRPC displayed on the NM


LINE 1

SYS 2

MON 3

Configuration ParametersLaser Status

Board Work Type

11.1.10 Specifications of the CRPCSpecifications include optical specifications and power consumption.





Table 11-1 Optical specifications of the CRPC

Item Unit Value

Pump wavelength range nm 1400-1500

Operating wavelength range nm 1529-1561

Maximum pump power dBm 29

Channel gain on G.652 fiber dB ≥10

Channel gain on LEAF fiber dB ≥12

Effective noise figure on G.652 fiber dB ≤0

Effective noise figure on LEAF fiber dB ≤–1

Polarization dependence loss dB ≤0.5

Output connector type - LSH/APC, LC/PC

Mechanical SpecificationsWeight: 4.0 kg


11.2 HBAHBA: High-power Booster Amplifier Board

11.2.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the HBA board is available, that is TN11.

11.2.2 ApplicationThe HBA is a type of optical amplifier unit. The HBA realizes the amplification of optical signals. It can be used at the transmit end.

For the position of the HBA in the WDM system, see Figure 11-5.




Figure 11-1 Position of the HBA in the WDM system

OTUMUX

DMUX

OTU

OTU

OTU

HBA

OAU1

FIU

OTUMUX

DMUX

OTU

OTU

OTU

HBA

OAU1FIU

Clientside

Clientside

Clientside

Clientside

11.2.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the HBA are online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient control.


Table 11-1 Functions and features of the HBA


Description

Basic function Only applied on the transmit edge of the OTM station in the system that covers a long fiber span transmission.

Amplifies a maximum of 40 channels with the channel spacing of 100 GHz at the same time.

Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans without electrical regeneration.

Typical gain The typical gain of the HBA is 29 dB.



Gain lock function The EDFA inside the board has the gain lock function. Adding or dropping one or more channels or optical signal fluctuation does not affect the signal gain of other channels.

Transient control function

The EDFA inside the board has the transient control function. When channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the fluctuation of the optical power in the path so as to realize the smooth upgrading and expansion.


Detects and reports the optical power. Monitors the temperature of the pump laser. Detects the pump driving current, back-facet current, pump cooling current,

temperature of the pump laser and the ambient temperature of the board.




11.2.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe HBA consists of the EDFA optical module and the control and communication module.

Figure 11-6 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the HBA.

Figure 11-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the HBA

EDFA optical moduleIN

SCC

OUT

MON


Signal FlowThe HBA receives the multiplexed signal and the EDFA optical module amplifies the signal. Then the signals are splitted into two, among which the amplified signals are output through the OUT interface. A few supervisory signals are output to the multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit (MCA4, MCA8, WMU) or test instrument through the MON interface for online optical performance monitoring.

EDFA Optical ModuleThe EDFA optical module amplifies optical signals. The EDFA inside the HBA adopts the technology of automatic gain control to make the gain of each channel change within an allowed range in various working conditions.




11.2.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the HBA front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 11-7 shows the HBA front panel.




Figure 11-1 HBA front panel

HBA

HBA

STATACTPROGSRV

MO

NIN

OU

T

LASERRADIATION





InterfacesThere are three optical interfaces on the HBA front panel.Table 11-7 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 11-1 Types and functions of the HBA interfaces

Interface

Type Function

IN LC Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified.

OUT LSH/APC Transmits the amplified signal.

MON LC Connected to the MCA4 or MCA8 or WMU, accomplishes the online performance monitoring.The MON port is a 1/999 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (30dB lower than the actual signal power).

Laser Safety LevelThe laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 3B.

The maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 22.15 dBm (164 mW) to 27 dBm (500mW).

11.2.6 Valid SlotsThe HBA occupies three slots. The valid slots for the HBA are IU2–IU16 in the subrack.

The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the middle slot of the three occupied slots in the subrack, so the slot number of the HBA board displayed on the NM is the number of the middle slot.

For example, if the HBA occupies slots IU1, IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the HBA displayed on the NM is IU2.

11.2.7 Characteristic Code for the HBAThe characteristic code for the HBA consists of seven characters and digits, indicating the band, the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board.


Table 11-1 Characteristic code for the HBA


The first character Band Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band; the value L represents L band.


– The second character is always G.

The third to the fourth digits

Gain The third to the fourth digits indicate the gain value.





The fifth character – The fifth character is always I.

The sixth and the seventh digits

Maximum nominal input optical power

Indicate the maximum nominal input optical power.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11HBA is G2031I0. CG35I-8. This code indicates that the HBA board is used in C band, the gain is 35 dB, and the maximum nominal input optical power is -8 dBm.



Table 11-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the HBA displayed on the NM


IN 1

OUT 2

MON 3


Laser Status

Gain (dB)

Nominal Gain (dB)

Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB)

Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB)

Rated Optical Power

Configure Band


Actual Band





11.2.9 Specifications of the HBASpecifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.


Table 11-1 Optical specifications of the HBA

Item Unit Value

Type - TN11HBA

Channel allocation nm 40-channel system: 192.1 THz–196.05 THz10-channel system: Any two of the last 20 wavelengths are spaced at 200 GHz.

Nominal input power range dBm –19 to –3

Typical input power of a single wavelength

dBm 40-channel system: -1910-channel system: -13

Noise figure (NF) dB <8

Output reflectance dB <–45

Nominal output power range dBm 10 to 26

Gain response time on adding/dropping of channels

ms <10

Channel gain dB 29±1

Gain flatness dB ≤2.5

Polarization dependent loss dB <0.5

Polarization mode dispersion ps <0.5

Mechanical Specifications Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 76.2 mm (W) Weight: 6.6 lb (3 kg)

Power Consumption The maximum power consumption at 25: 47W The maximum power consumption at 55: 75W




11.3 OAU1OAU1: optical amplifying unit

11.3.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the OAU1 board is available, that is TN11.

TypeTable 11-11 lists the types of the OAU1.

Table 11-1 Type description of the OAU1

Unit Type

Description Gain Range

TN11OAU1 01 Amplifies the input optical signals in C band.

20 dB to 31 dB

03 Amplifies the input optical signals in C band.

24 dB to 36 dB

11.3.2 ApplicationThe OAU1 is a type of optical amplifier unit. The OAU1 realizes the amplification of optical signals. It can be used at the transmit end and the receive end.

For the position of the OAU1 in the WDM system, see Figure 11-8.

Figure 11-1 Position of the OAU1 in the WDM system

OTUOAU1

OBU1

MUX

DMUX

OTU

OTU

OTU

DMUX

MUX

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OBU1

OAU1

Clientside

Clientside

Clientside

Clientside

11.3.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the OAU1 are gain adjustment, online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient control.





Table 11-1 Functions and features of the OAU1


Description

Basic function Amplifies a maximum of 80 channels with the channel spacing of 50 GHz at the same time.

Gain adjustment The OAU1 continuously adjusts the gain from 20 dB to 31 dB based on the input optical power.









11.3.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe OAU1 consists of the EDFA optical module, optical splitter and the control and communication module.

Figure 11-9 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the OAU1.

Figure 11-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the OAU1

EDFA optical module


IN

SCC

TDC RDC

Opticalsplitter

OUT

MON




Signal FlowThe OAU1 receives the multiplexed signal and the EDFA optical module amplifies the signal. After amplification, the OAU1 sends the signal to the DCM through the TDC interface for dispersion compensation. Then, the signal returns to the OAU1 through the RDC interface. Then the signals enter the splitter and separates into two. The amplified optical signals are output through the OUT interface. A few supervisory signals are output to the multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit (MCA4, MCA8) or test instrument through the MON interface for online optical performance monitoring.

EDFA Optical ModuleThe EDFA optical module amplifies optical signals. The EDFA inside the OAU1 adopts the technology of automatic gain control to make the gain of each channel change within an allowed range in various working conditions.

Optical SplitterAn optical splitter splits one channels of optical signals from the EDFA optical module into two channels of signals of different power. The main channel of signals are output through the OUT interface and transmitted in the main optical path. The other channel of signals are output to the MON interface for spectrum detection and supervising.





11.3.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the OAU1 front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 11-10 shows the OAU1 front panel.




Figure 11-1 OAU1 front panel

OAU1

OAU1

LASERRADIATION



STATACTPROGSRV

TDC

PD

CO

UT

INM

ON



InterfacesThere are five optical interfaces on the OAU1 front panel. Table 11-13 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 11-1 Types and functions of the OAU1 interfaces

Interface

Type Function


OUT LC Transmits the amplified signal.

TDC/RDC LC Connected to the interface of the DCM for dispersion compensation.




11.3.6 Valid SlotsThe OAU1 occupies two slots. The valid slots for the OAU1 are IU2–IU17 in the subrack.

The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack, so the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two occupied slots.

For example, if the OAU1 occupies slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the OAU1 displayed on the NM is IU2.

11.3.7 Characteristic Code for the OAU1The characteristic code for the OAU1 consists of eight characters and digits, indicating the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board.


Table 11-1 Characteristic code for the OAU1


The first character – The first character is always G.

The second to the fifth digits

Gain range Indicate the range within which the gain can be continuously adjusted.

The sixth character – The sixth character is always I.







For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OAU1 is G2031I0. This code indicates that the gain can be continuously adjusted from 20 dB to 31 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is 0 dBm.



Table 11-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the OAU1 displayed on the NM


IN 1

OUT 4

RDC/TDC 5

MON 6


Laser Status

Gain (dB)

Nominal Gain (dB)



Rated Optical Power

11.3.9 Specifications of the OAU1Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.





Table 11-1 Optical specifications of the OAU1

Item Unit Value

OAU101 OAU103

Operating wavelength range nm 1529–1561 1529–1561

Nominal gain dB 20 26 31 24 29 36

Nominal input power range dBm –32 to 0

–32 to –6

–32 to –11

–32 to –4

–32 to –9

–32 to –16

Input power range per channel

40 channels

dBm -27 to -16

-32 to -22

-32 to -27

-32 to –20

-32 to –25

-32

80 channels

dBm -30 to -19

-32 to -25

-32 to -30

-32 to –23

-32 to –28

-32

Noise figure (NF)a dB ≤8.5 ≤6.5 ≤5.5 ≤7.5 ≤6.5 ≤5.5

Input reflectance dB <-40 <-40 <-40 <-40 <-40 <-40

Output reflectance dB <-40 <-40 <-40 <-40 <-40 <-40

Pump leakage at input dBm <-20 <-20 <-20 <-20 <-30 <-30

Maximum reflectance tolerance at input

dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

Maximum reflectance tolerance at output

dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

Maximum total output optical power

dBm 20 20 20 20 20 20

Gain response time on adding/dropping of channels

ms <10 <10 <10 <10 <10 <10

Channel gainb dB 20–23 23–29 29–31 24–36 28–30 30–36

Gain flatness dB ≤2.0 ≤2.0 ≤2.0 ≤2.0 ≤2.0 ≤2.0

Multi-channel gain slope dB/dB ≤2.0 ≤2.0 ≤2.0 ≤2.0 ≤2.0 ≤2.0

Polarization dependent loss dB <0.5 <0.5 <0.5 <0.5 <0.5 <0.5

a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies with the gain. The previous table lists the noise figure when the noise figure adopts the typical value.

b: In the case of the OAU103, the total gain is 38 dB, and the intermediate insertion loss is 2–14 dB (including the internal VOA insertion loss of 2 dB), that is, the supported gain range is 24–36 dB.

Mechanical Specifications Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 50.8 mm (W)




Weight: 1.8 kg

Power Consumption The maximum power consumption at 25: 33 W The maximum power consumption at 55: 34.3 W

11.4 OBU1OBU1: optical booster unit

11.4.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the OBU1 board is available, that is TN11.

TypeTable 11-17 lists the types of the OBU1.

Table 11-1 Type description of the OBU1

Unit Type

Description Gain Range

TN11OBU1 01 Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. 20±1.5 dB

03 Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. 23±1.5 dB

04 Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. 17±1.5 dB

11.4.2 ApplicationThe OBU1 is a type of optical amplifier unit. The OBU1 realizes the amplification of optical signals. The OBU1 is of three types: OBU101 OBU103 and OBU104.

For the position of the OBU1 in the WDM system, see Figure 11-11.

Figure 11-1 Position of the OBU1 in the WDM system

OTUClientside OBU1

OBU1

MUX

DMUX

OTU

OTU

OTU

DMUX

MUX

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OBU1

OBU1Clientside

Clientside

Clientside




11.4.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the OBU1 are online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient control.


Table 11-1 Functions and features of the OBU1


Description


Typical gain The typical gain of the OBU101 is 20 dB. The typical gain of the OBU103 is 23 dB. The typical gain of the OBU104 is 17 dB.









11.4.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe OBU1 consists of the EDFA optical module and the control and communication module.

Figure 11-12 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the OBU1.




Figure 11-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the OBU1

EDFA optical module


IN

SCC

Opticalsplitter

OUT

MON

Signal FlowThe OBU1 receives the multiplexed signal and the EDFA optical module amplifies the signal. Then the signals are sent to the optical splitter to be splitted into two, among which the amplified signals are output through the OUT interface. A few supervisory signals are output to the multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit (MCA4, MCA8) or test instrument through the MON interface for online optical performance monitoring.

EDFA Optical ModuleThe EDFA optical module amplifies optical signals. The EDFA inside the OBU1 adopts the technology of automatic gain control to make the gain of each channel change within an allowed range in various working conditions.

Optical SplitterAn optical splitter splits one channels of optical signals from the EDFA optical module into two channels of signals of different power. One of the them are output through the OUT interface and transmitted in the main optical path. The other channel of signals are output to the MON interface for spectrum detection and supervising.





11.4.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the OBU1 front panel.




Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 11-13 shows the OBU1 front panel.

Figure 11-1 OBU1 front panel

OBU1

OBU1

MO

NO

UT

IN

STATACTPROGSRV

LASERRADIATION








InterfacesThere are three optical interfaces on the OBU1 front panel. Table 11-19 lists the type and function of each interface.

Table 11-1 Types and functions of the OBU1 interfaces

Interface

Type

Function






11.4.6 Valid SlotsThe OBU1 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the OBU1 are IU1–IU17.

11.4.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU1The characteristic code for the OBU1 consists of six characters and digits, indicating the gain and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board.


Table 11-1 Characteristic code for the OBU1


The first character

– The first character is always G.

The second and the third digits

Gain The second and the third digits indicate the gain value.

The fourth character

– The fourth character is always I.



The fifth and the sixth digits indicate the maximum nominal input optical power.




For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU1 is G23I-3. This code indicates that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is -3 dBm.



Table 11-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the OBU1 displayed on the NM


IN 1

OUT 2

MON 3


Laser Status

Gain (dB)

Nominal Gain (dB)



Rated Optical Power

11.4.9 Specifications of the OBU1Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.





Table 11-1 Optical specifications of the OBU1

Item Unit

Value

OBU101 OBU103 OBU104

Operating wavelength range nm 1529–1561 1529–1561 1529–1561

Nominal input power range dBm -32 to -4 -32 to -3 -32 to -1

Input power range per channel 40 channels dBm -32 to -20 -32 to -19 -32 to -17

80 channels -32 to -23 -32 to -22 -32 to -20

Typical input power of a single wavelength

40 channels dBm -20 -19 -17

80 channels -23 -22 -20

Noise figure (NF) dB ≤5.5 ≤6.0 ≤5.5

Input reflectance dB <-40 <-40 <-40

Output reflectance dB <-40 <-40 <-40

Pump leakage at input dBm <-30 <-30 <-30

Maximum reflectance tolerance at input dB -27 -27 -27

Maximum reflectance tolerance at output dB -27 -27 -27

Maximum total output optical power dBm 16 20 16

Nominal gain dB 20 23 17

Gain response time on adding/dropping of channels ms <10 <10 <10

Channel gain dB 20±1.5 23±1.5 17±1.5

Gain flatness dB ≤2.0 ≤2.0 ≤2.0

Multi-channel gain slope dB ≤2.0 ≤2.0 ≤2.0

Polarization dependent loss dB ≤0.5 ≤0.5 ≤0.5

Mechanical Specifications Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) Weight: 1.3 kg

Power ConsumptionThe power consumption of OBU101 and OBU104:

The maximum power consumption at 25: 16 W





The power consumption of OBU103:

The maximum power consumption at 25: 18 W The maximum power consumption at 55: 19.8 W

11.5 OBU2OBU2: optical booster unit

11.5.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the OBU2 board is available, that is TN11.

11.5.2 ApplicationThe OBU2 is a type of optical amplifier unit. The OBU2 realizes the amplification of optical signals. It can be used at the transmit end and the receive end.

For the position of the OBU2 in the WDM system, see Figure 11-14.

Figure 11-1 Position of the OBU2 in the WDM system

OTUClientside OBU2

OBU2

MUX

DMUX

OTU

OTU

OTU

DMUX

MUX

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OBU2

OBU2Clientside

Clientside

Clientside

11.5.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the OBU2 are online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient control.


Table 11-1 Functions and features of the OBU2


Description


Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans without using electrical regeneration.

Typical gain The typical gain of the OBU205 is 23 dB.





Description









11.5.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe OBU2 consists of the EDFA optical module and the control and communication module.

Figure 11-15 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the OBU2.

Figure 11-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the OBU2

EDFA opticalmodule


IN

SCC

Opticalsplitter

OUT

MON

Signal FlowThe OBU2 receives the multiplexed signal and the EDFA optical module amplifies the signal. Then the signals are sent to the optical splitter to be splitted into two, among which the amplified signals are output through the OUT interface. A few supervisory signals are output to the multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit (MCA4, MCA8) or test instrument through the MON interface for online optical performance monitoring.




EDFA Optical ModuleThe EDFA optical module amplifies optical signals. The EDFA inside the OBU2 adopts the technology of automatic gain control to make the gain of each channel change within an allowed range in various working conditions.

Optical SplitterAn optical splitter splits one channels of optical signals from the EDFA optical module into two channels of signals of different power. One of the them are output through the OUT interface and transmitted in the main optical path. The other channel of signals are output to the MON interface for spectrum detection and supervising.




11.5.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the OBU2 front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 11-16 shows the OBU2 front panel.




Figure 11-1 OBU2 front panel

OBU2

OBU2

STATACTPROGSRV

OU

TIN

MO

N

LASERRADIATION





InterfacesThere are three optical interfaces on the OBU2 front panel. Table 11-24 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 11-1 Types and functions of the OBU2 interfaces

Interface

Type

Function




Laser Safety LevelThe laser safety level of the optical interface is CLASS 3B.

The maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 22.15 dBm (164 mW) to 27 dBm (500mW).

11.5.6 Valid SlotsThe OBU2 occupies two slots. The valid slots for the OBU2 are IU2–IU17 in the subrack.

The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack, so the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two occupied slots.

For example, if the OBU2 occupies slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the OBU2 displayed on the NM is IU2.

11.5.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU2The characteristic code for the OBU2 consists of six characters and digits, indicating the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board.


Table 11-1 Characteristic code for the OBU2





The fourth character – The fourth character is always I.







For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU1 is G23I00. This code indicates that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is 0 dBm.



Table 11-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the OBU2 displayed on the NM


IN 1

OUT 2

MON 3


Laser Status

Gain (dB)

Nominal Gain (dB)



Rated Optical Power

Configure Band


Actual Band


11.5.9 Specifications of the OBU2Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.





Table 11-1 Optical specifications of the OBU2

Item Unit Value

OBU205


Nominal input power range dBm -24 to 0

Input power range per channel 40 Channels dBm -24 to -16

80 Channels -24 to -19

Typical input power of a single wavelength 40 Channels dBm -16

80 Channels -19

Noise figure (NF) dB ≤7.0

Input reflectance dB <-40

Output reflectance dB <-40

Pump leakage at input dBm <-30

Maximum reflectance tolerance at input dB -27

Maximum reflectance tolerance at output dB -27

Maximum total output optical power dBm 23

Nominal gain dB 23

Gain response time on adding/dropping of channels ms <10

Channel gain dB 23±1.5

Gain flatness dB ≤2.0

Multi-channel gain slope dB/dB ≤2.0







12 System Control and Communication Unit

12.1 SCCSCC: system control and communication unit

12.1.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the SCC board is available, that is TN11.

12.1.2 ApplicationThe SCC is a type of system control and communication unit. Working with the network management system to manage each board, the SCC realizes the communications between equipments.

12.1.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the SCC are DCC communication, subrack cascading, clock and power supply backup.


Table 12-1 Functions and features of the SCC


Description

Basic function Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management and alarm output of a subrack.

DCC communication

Supports DCC communication with the NEs for network management.

Active/Standby backup

Supports active/standby backup: There are two SCCs in the system that can provide the 1+1 hot backup. When the active board fails, the standby board becomes active automatically.





Description

Clock function Provides clock source for the system communications.

Subrack cascading

Supports subrack cascading. When subracks are cascaded, the subrack in which the optical layer/overhead processing board is installed is usually selected as the master subrack. A slave subrack cannot be upgraded to a master subrack.The SCC accomplishes different functions based on the mode (master or slave) of the subrack in which it is installed. The SCC in a slave subrack processes the overhead bytes, handles alarms and is in charge of the configuration and grooming of services inside the subrack. Besides these functions, the SCC in a master subrack also processes the overhead bytes and handles the alarms of all its slave subracks. The SCC in the master subrack is connected to the network management system. The configuration commands are issued to the SCC of a slave subrack through the SCC in the master subrack.

Power supply backup

Provides 1:N power supply backup for the system.

12.1.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe SCC consists of the overhead processing module, clock module, monitoring module, power supply module, communications module, the CPU and control module.

Figure 12-1 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SCC.

Figure 12-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the SCC

CPU andcontrolmodule

Communicationsmodule

Clock module

Overheadprocessing

module

Other boards

Other boards

Monitoringmodule

Power supplymodule




Overhead Processing ModuleThe overhead processing module receives overhead signals from the service board and processes the overhead bytes. The 360 DCCs (D1–D3) are processed by the control module. At the same time, the overhead processing module also sends the overhead signals to the service board.

Clock ModuleThe clock module provides the clock source for the system.

Monitoring ModuleThe monitoring module detects whether the boards are in position and reports alarms to the network management system.

Power Supply ModuleThe power supply module supplies power for the SCC. It also provides the entire OSN 6800 system with 3.3 V integrated power backup to protect the 3.3 V power supply of any board in the system.

Communications ModuleThe communications module communicates with other boards.

The module transmits data with other boards through the Ethernet and reports to the network management system.

The module transmits urgent data through the RS485.

CPU and Control ModuleThis module realizes the control, monitoring and management of each functional module of the board.

12.1.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, buttons and an LED indicator on the front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 12-2 shows the SCC front panel.




Figure 12-1 SCC front panel

SCC

SCC

STATACTPROGSRVPWRAPWRBPWRCALMC

RESET

LAMP TEST

ALM CUT

SubRACK_ID

IndicatorsThere are eight indicators on the front panel.

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – dual-colored (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) – green Board software status indicator (PROG) – dual-colored (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) – triple-colored (red, green, yellow) System power supply indicator (PWRA)– dual-colored (red, green) System power supply indicator (PWRB)– dual-colored (red, green) Protection power indicator (PWRC)– dual-colored (red, green) Alarm cut-off indicator (ALMC)– green




ButtonsThere are three buttons on the front panel. Table 12-2 lists the function of each button.

Table 12-1 Functions of the SCC buttons

Button Function

RESET Used to reset the SCC.

ALM CUT Used to cut off the audible alarm.

LAMP TEST Used to test all the indicators in the subrack.

LEDThere is an LED indicator on the front panel. Table 12-3 shows the its function.

Table 12-1 Function of the SCC LED indicator

LED indicator

Function

SubRack_ID The LED on the front panel is used to indicate whether the subrack is a primary or a secondary one when subracks are cascaded. "0" indicates that the subrack which the SCC placed is a primary one. "1" to "7" indicates that the subrack which the SCC placed is a secondary one.

InterfacesThe SCC does not provide external interfaces.

12.1.6 Valid SlotsThe SCC occupies one slot. The valid slots for the SCC are IU17 and IU18. By default, the SCC is installed in IU18.

12.1.7 DIP Switch and JumperThere is a three-bit jumper inside the SCC. It is used to switch on or off the power supplied by the battery on the board.

When the board is in normal use, the jumper cap should be installed onto the two pins that are close to the board edge.

12.1.8 Specifications of the SCCSpecifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.






12.2 AUXAUX: system auxiliary interface unit

12.2.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the AUX board is available, that is TN11.

12.2.2 ApplicationThe AUX is a type of system control and communication unit. It provides various auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces.

12.2.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the AUX are providing various auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces.


Table 12-1 Functions and features of the AUX


Description

Basic function Provides the system with various auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces.

Interface Provides the Ethernet communications interface and management interface.Provides the common and the emergent inter-subrack communications interfaces

Setting of subrack ID Sets the subrack ID that contains three bits.

12.2.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe AUX consists of the communications module, power supply module, the CPU and control module.

Figure 12-3 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the AUX.




Figure 12-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the AUX

CPU andcontrolmodule

Other boards

Power supplymodule

Communicationsmodule

Communications ModuleProvides the inter-board communications interface to connect the service boards and the SCC. Realizes the data communications between boards.

Provides the NM interface and the NM cascading interface that are used to connect the NM terminal.

Provides the common and the emergent inter-subrack communications network interfaces.

Power Supply ModuleThe power supply module supplies power for the AUX.

CPU and Control ModuleThe CPU module realizes the control, monitoring and management of the communications module and detects the power supply at the same time.

The control module provides the subrack ID and collects the alarms and performance events of each functional module as well as the clock information.

12.2.5 Front PanelThere are indicators and interfaces on the AUX front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 12-4 shows the AUX front panel.




Figure 12-1 AUX front panel

AUX

STAT

PROG

NM

_ETH

1N

M_E

TH2

ETH

1E

TH2

IndicatorsThere are two indicators on the front panel.

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – dual-colored (red, green) Board software status indicator (PROG) – dual-colored (red, green)

InterfacesThere are four interfaces on the AUX front panel. Table 12-5 lists the type and function of each interface.

Table 12-1 Types and functions of the AUX interfaces

Interface

Type

Function

NM_ETH1 RJ-45 Connects the network interface on the OptiX OSN 6800 through a network cable to that on the T2000 server to achieve the management of the T2000 over the OptiX OSN 6800.


NM_ETH2 RJ-45 Connects the network interface on the OptiX OSN 6800 through a network cable to that on the T2000 server to achieve the management of the T2000 over the OptiX OSN 6800.


ETH1 RJ-45 Inter-subrack communications network interfaces




ETH2 RJ-45 Inter-subrack communications network interfaces

12.2.6 Valid SlotsThe AUX occupies one slot. The valid slot for the AUX is IU21.

12.2.7 DIP Switch and JumperThere is a three-bit jumper inside the AUX, which is used to set the subrack ID.

The SCC detects the subrack ID and identifies whether the subrack is a primary or a secondary one. The result is indicated by the LED indicator of the SCC front panel.

12.2.8 Specifications of the AUXSpecifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Mechanical Specifications Dimensions of the board (PCB):85 mm (H) x 220 mm (W) x 2mm (T) Dimensions of the front panel: 107.6 mm (height) x 28.4 mm (width) Weight: 1.1 lb (0.5 kg)





13 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit

13.1 SC1SC1: unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit

13.1.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the SC1 board is available, that is TN11.

13.1.2 ApplicationThe SC1 is a type of optical supervisory channel unit. The SC1 realizes the processing of one supervisory channel in one direction. It transmits and extracts the overhead information of the system, processes the information and sends it to the SCC.

For the position of the SC1 in the WDM system, see Figure 13-1.

Figure 13-1 Position of the SC1 in the WDM system

NE1 NE2 NE3

OA

OA

SC1FIU

OA

OA

FIU

SC1SC2

OA

FIU

OA

FIU

SCC SCCSCC

In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can make use of the supervisory channel to transmit supervisory and management data. As shown in Figure 13-1, the user can use the Ethernet to log in to the NE1 to manage the NE1 directly. NE2 and NE3 are remote equipment. They can be remotely




managed through the supervisory channel when there is no data line connected. In this way, the entire network is under management.

The SCC of NE1 sends the network management (NM) data to the optical supervisory channel (OSC) unit. The OSC unit converts the data into optical signals and sends the signals to the FIU. The supervisory signals are multiplexed with the signals transmitted by the main path. Then, all the signals are transmitted on line. The FIU of NE2 separates the supervisory signals from the line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit converts the optical signals into supervisory data and sends the data to the SCC for processing.

13.1.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the SC1 are processing and regeneration of optical supervisory signals.


Table 13-1 Functions and features of the SC1


Description

Basic function The SC1 is used to receive, process, and transmit one optical supervisory signal.

Technical features

The OSC has no limitation on the distance between two optical line amplifiers. The failure of an optical line amplifier does not affect the performance of the OSC.The SC1 is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not in position, the SC1 can still ensure the pass-through of ECC with the boards in the paired slot and monitor other stations .

Regeneration function

The SC1 transmits signals from section to section. It also has the 3R function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers, information can be correctly received and new supervisory signals are added.

Operating wavelength

The signal wavelength of supervisory channel is 1510 nm.

13.1.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe SC1 consists of the optical receiving/transmitting module, overhead and clock processing module and the control and communication module.

Figure 13-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SC1.




Figure 13-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the SC1

Opticalreceivingmodule

RM Overhead andclock processing

module

Opticaltransmitting

module

TM

SCC


Optical Receiving/Transmitting ModuleThe optical receiving module receives the optical supervisory signal from the FIU. It performs O/E conversion and sends the converted signal to the overhead and clock processing module.

The optical transmitting module receives the processed electrical signal from the overhead and clock processing module. It performs E/O conversion and sends the converted signal to the FIU.

Overhead and Clock Processing ModuleThe overhead and clock processing module extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals, and sends them to the SCC for processing. After the overhead signals are processed by the SCC, this module sends the electrical signals to the optical transmitting module.

The clock processing module is mainly used to extract and process the timing signals and transmit the timing information of the local NE to the next NE.




13.1.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the SC1 front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 13-3 shows the SC1 front panel.




Figure 13-1 SC1 front panel

SC1

SC1

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

STATACTPROGSRV

TMR

M

EOW



InterfacesThere are two optical interfaces and one orderwire phone interface on the SC1 front panel. Table 13-2 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 13-1 Types and functions of the SC1 interfaces

Interface

Type

Function

TM LC Transmits the supervisory signal.

RM LC Receives the supervisory signal.

EOW - Connects to an orderwire phone set through telephone wires, to realize orderwire communication between NEs.



13.1.6 Valid SlotsThe SC1 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the SC1 are IU1–IU17.



Table 13-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SC1 displayed on the NM


RM/TM 1


Configuration ParametersOptical Interface Loopback

Laser Status




13.1.8 Specifications of the SC1Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical SpecificationsTable 13-4 lists the optical specifications of the SC1.

Table 13-1 Optical specifications of the SC1

Item Unit Value

Signal rate Mbit/s 16.896 4.096


Signal coding – CMI

Launched optical power dBm 0 to–4

Receiver sensitivity dBm ≤–46 ≤–48

Receiver overload dBm –3



13.2 SC2SC2: bi-directional optical supervisory channel unit

13.2.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the SC2 board is available, that is TN11.

13.2.2 ApplicationThe SC2 is a type of Optical supervisory channel unit. The SC2 realizes the processing of two supervisory channels in opposite directions. It transmits and extracts the overhead information of the system, processes the information and sends it to the SCC.

For the position of the SC2 in the WDM system, see Figure 13-4.




Figure 13-1 Position of the SC2 in the WDM system

NE1 NE2 NE3

OA

OA

SC1FIU

OA

OA

FIU

SC1SC2

OA

FIU

OA

FIU

SCC SCCSCC

In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can make use of the supervisory channel to transmit supervisory and management data. As shown in Figure 13-4, the user can use the Ethernet to log in to the NE1 to manage the NE1 directly. NE2 and NE3 are remote equipment. They can be remotely managed through the supervisory channel when there is no data line connected. In this way, the entire network is under management.

The SCC of NE1 sends the network management (NM) data to the optical supervisory channel (OSC) unit. The OSC unit converts the data into optical signals and sends the signals to the FIU. The supervisory signals are multiplexed with the signals transmitted by the main path. Then, all the signals are transmitted on line. The FIU of NE2 separates the supervisory signals from the line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit converts the optical signals into supervisory data and sends the data to the SCC for processing.

13.2.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the SC2 are processing and regeneration of optical supervisory signals.


Table 13-1 Functions and features of the SC2


Description

Basic function The SC2 is used to receive, process, and transmit two optical supervisory signals.

Technical features

The OSC has no limitation on the distance between two optical line amplifiers. The failure of an optical line amplifier does not affect the performance of the OSC.The SC2 is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not in position, the SC2 can still ensure the pass-through of ECC with the two optical interfaces and monitor other stations.

Regeneration function

The SC2 transmits signals from section to section. It also has the 3R function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers, information can be correctly received and new supervisory signals are added.

Operating wavelength

The signal wavelength of supervisory channel is 1510 nm.




13.2.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe SC2 consists of the optical receiving/transmitting module, overhead and clock processing module, and the control and communication module.

Figure 13-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SC2.

Figure 13-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the SC2

RM1 TM1

SCC


Overhead andclock processing

module

Opticaltransmitting

module


Opticaltransmitting

module

RM2 TM2


Overhead andclock processing

module

Optical Receiving/Transmitting ModuleThe optical receiving module receives the optical supervisory signal from the FIU. It performs O/E conversion and sends the converted signal to the overhead and clock processing module.

The optical transmitting module receives the processed electrical signal from the overhead and clock processing module. It performs E/O conversion and sends the converted signal to the FIU.

Overhead and Clock Processing ModuleThe overhead and clock processing module extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals and sends them to the SCC for processing. After the overhead signals are processed by the SCC, this module sends the electrical signals to the optical transmitting module.

The clock processing module is mainly used to extract and process the timing signals and transmit the timing information of the local NE to the next NE.







13.2.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the SC2 front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 13-6 shows the SC2 front panel.

Figure 13-1 SC2 front panel

SC2

SC2

STATACTPROGSRV

TM1

RM

1TM

2R

M2

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

EOW






InterfacesThere are two optical interfaces and one orderwire phone interface on the SC2 front panel. Table 13-6 lists the type and function of each interface.

Table 13-1 Types and functions of the SC2 interfaces

Interface

Type Function

TM1/TM2 LC Transmits the first/second supervisory signal.

RM1/RM2 LC Receives the first/second supervisory signal.

EOW - Connects to an orderwire phone set through telephone wires, to realize orderwire communication between NEs.



13.2.6 Valid SlotsThe SC2 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the SC2 are IU1–IU17.



Table 13-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SC2 displayed on the NM


RM1/TM1 1

RM2/TM2 2





Configuration ParametersOptical Interface Loopback

Laser Status

13.2.8 Specifications of the SC2Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical SpecificationsTable 13-8 lists the optical specifications of the SC2.

Table 13-1 Optical specifications of the SC2

Item Unit Value

Signal rate Mbit/s 16.896 4.096


Signal coding – CMI

Launched optical power dBm 0 to–4

Receiver sensitivity dBm ≤–46 ≤–48

Receiver overload dBm –3






14 Optical Protection Unit

14.1 DCPDCP: 2-channel optical path protection unit

14.1.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the DCP board is available, that is TN11.

14.1.2 ApplicationThe DCP is a type of optical protection unit. The DCP realizes the intra-board 1+1 protection, the client-side 1+1 protection and optical wavelength shared protection (OWSP protection).

For the position of the DCP in the WDM system, see Figure 14-1, Figure 14-2 and Figure 14-3.

Figure 14-1 Position of the DCP in the WDM system (intra-board 1+1 protection)

RI22

DCP

TI1

MUX

DMUX

DMUX

MUXTO11

TO12

RI11

RI12

OTU

OTU

DCP

DMUX

MUX

DMUX

MUX

FIU

FIU

FIU

FIU

TO11

RI11

TO12

RI12

TO21

RI21

TO22

RI21

TO21

RI22

TO22

RO1

TI2RO2

RO1TI1

RO2TI2

OTU

OTU

NOTEWhen used for intra-board 1+1 protection, the DCP does not support the 2.5 Gbit/s OTU.




Figure 14-2 Position of the DCP in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection)

OTU(P)

OTU(W)

FIU

client-side MUX

DMUX

DMUX

MUX DMUX

MUX

DMUX

MUX

FIU

FIU

FIU

OTU(W)

OTU(P)

DCP

TO11RI11

TO21RI21

TO12RI12

TO22RI22

TI1RO1

TI2RO2

RI11TO11

RI21TO21

RI12TO12

RI22TO22

RO1TI1

RO2TI2

DCP

client-side

NOTEWhen the working OTU and the protection OTU are installed in different subracks, the DCP board can be used for client-side protection.

Figure 14-3 Position of the DCP in the WDM system (OWSP protection)

OTU2 OTU1 OTU2 OTU1

2 x DCP

OTU1 OTU2 OTU1 OTU2

OADM(West)

OADM(East)

FIU

FIU

OADM(West)

FIU OADM(East)FIU

OADM(West)

FIU

FIU

OADM(East)

OADM(East) FIU OADM

(West)FIU

λ2/λ1 λ1/λ2

λ2/λ1λ2λ1

λ1λ2

λ2λ1

λ1λ2

λ2/λ1

λ2/λ1 λ2λ1

λ2λ1

A

B C

D

λ1/λ2

λ1/λ2 λ2/λ1

λ2/λ1(West)(East)

2 x DCP

2 x DCP2 x DCPλ2/λ1

λ1/λ2

λ1/λ2

λ1/λ2

λ1/λ2λ2/λ1

λ1/λ2 λ1λ2

λ1λ2

: : :Direction of theworking signal flow

Direction of theprotection signal flow Optical signal

14.1.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the DCP are intra-board 1+1 protection and client-side 1+1 protection.





Table 14-1 Functions and features of the DCP


Description

Basic function Provides the intra-board 1+1 protection to protect the services of the OTU that has no dual-fed and selective receiving function. Compared with the OLP, the DCP provides protection for two signals so as to realize high-integrated 1+1 protection.

Provides the client-side 1+1 protection, making use of a working OTU and a protection OTU to protect the client-side services.

Provides the OWSP protection. Two pairs of wavelength routes (one east, the other west) are provided for the OTU, forming a protection pair, to achieve the optical wavelength shared protection.

Protection scheme

The intra-board 1+1 protection and client-side 1+1 protection: The protection mode is dual-fed and signal selection and single-end switching. When the performance of the working fiber declines, the system automatically

switches the service from the working path to the protection path. Protection switching is stable and quick because the APS protocol is not needed.

The OWSP protection: The protection mode is dual-fed and signal selection and dual-end switching. When the performance of the working fiber declines, the system automatically

switches the service from the working path to the protection path. Protection switching is stable and quick because the APS protocol is needed.

Protection switching time

The protection switching time of the system is less than 50 ms.

14.1.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe DCP consists of the optical splitter, optical switch, and the control and communication module.

Figure 14-4 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DCP.




Figure 14-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the DCP

Optical splitter

Optical switch

Optical splitterTI1 TO11


SCC

RO1

TI2

RO2

TO12

RI11RI12

TO21TO22

RI21RI22Optical switch

Optical SplitterThe optical splitter divides a signal into two signals with the same power and sends them to the working and the protection fibers respectively.

Optical SwitchAt the receiving end, the optical switch selects the optical signal from the working or the protection path.




Switching TypeThere are five switching types listed as follows:

Locked switching: This function is to lock the services on the working path, no matter the working or protection path is good or not.

Forced switching: This function is to force the services to work either on the working or protection path, no matter the working or protection path is good or not.

Automatic switching: If the working path is faulty while the protection path is normal, the services are switched from working path to the protection path. If both paths are faulty, the services are not switched. If the services are




transmitted on the protection path, the switching status is the same. The working mode can be set to revertive or non-revertive. In revertive mode, if the working path is recovered and confirmed to be normal for a certain period, the services are switched back to the working path. In non-revertive mode, even if the working path is recovered, the services remain on the protection path until a fault occurs to the protection path.

Manual switching: A manual switching command is issued to manually switch services from the working channel to the protection channel or from the latter to the former. Because the priority of manual switching is lower than that of automatic switching, the manual switching is valid only when both the working and protection channels are normal.

Clear switching: This function clears the switching state of the locked switching, forced switching, manual switching and the WTR time of automatic switching. It can not clear the switching state of automatic switching.

The priorities of the switching types from the highest to the lowest are as follows: clear switching > locked switching > forced switching > automatic switching > manual switching. If a higher level protection switching exists, lower level switching cannot be executed successfully. But if only the lower level switching exists, it can be executed successfully.

14.1.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the DCP front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 14-5 shows the DCP front panel.




Figure 14-1 DCP front panel

DCP

DCP

LASERRADIATION



STATACTPROGSRV

TO11

RI11

TO12

RI12

TO21

RI21

TO22

RI22

RO

1TI1

RO

2TI2



InterfacesThere are 12 optical interfaces on the DCP front panel. Table 14-2 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 14-1 Types and functions of the DCP interfaces

Interface

Type

Function

TI1 LC Receives the first channel of WDM-side signals. (intra-board 1+1 protection)Receives the first channel of client-side signals. (client-side 1+1 protection)Receives one channel of client-side signals. (OWSP protection)

TI2 LC Receives the second channel of WDM-side signals. (intra-board 1+1 protection)Receives the second channel of client-side signals. (client-side 1+1 protection)Receives the optical signals from the adjacent stations. (OWSP protection)

RO1 LC Transmits the first channel of WDM-side signals. (intra-board 1+1 protection)Transmits the first channel of client-side signals. (client-side 1+1 protection)Transmits one WDM-side optical signal to the OTU board. (OWSP protection)

RO2 LC Transmits the second channel of WDM-side signals. (intra-board 1+1 protection)Transmits the second channel of client-side signals. (client-side 1+1 protection)Transmits one optical signal to the adjacent stations. (OWSP protection)

TO11 LC Transmits the first channel of signals to the working multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection)Transmits the first channel of signals to the working OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection)Serves as a dual-fed optical interface, transmitting one optical signal to the working router. (OWSP protection)

TO12 LC Transmits the first channel of signals to the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection)Transmits the first channel of signals to the protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection)Dual fed optical interface, transmitting one optical signal to the protection router. (OWSP protection)

TO21 LC Transmits the second channel of signals to the working multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection)Transmits the second channel of signals to the working OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection)Connects to the RI12 interface of another DCP board in the same station by using a fiber.

TO22 LC Transmits the second channel of signals to the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection)Transmits the second channel of signals to the protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection)Connects to the RI22 interface on the same DCP board by using a fiber. (OWSP protection)




Interface

Type

Function

RI11/RI12

LC Receives the first channel of signals from the working and the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection)Receives the first channel of signals from the working and protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection)Serve as selective receive interfaces, connecting to the working route and protection route, respectively. (OWSP protection)

RI21/RI22

LC Receives the second channel of signals from the working and the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection)Receives the second channel of signals from the working and protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection)Connects to the TO12 and TO22 interfaces on the same DCP board, respectively, by using a fiber. (OWSP protection)



14.1.6 Valid SlotsThe DCP occupies one slot. The valid slots for the DCP are IU1–IU17.



Table 14-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DCP displayed on the NM


TO11/RI11 1

TO12/RI12 2

TO21/RI21 3

TO22/RI22 4

TI1/RO1 5

TI2/RO2 6






Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)

Varance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)

14.1.8 Specifications of the DCPSpecifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical SpecificationsTable 14-4 lists the optical specifications of the DCP.

Table 14-1 Optical specifications of the DCP

Interface Item Unit

Value

TI1-TO11TI1-TO12TI2-TO21TI2-TO22

Insertion loss at the transmit end

single mode dB ≤4

multimode dB ≤4.5

RI1-RO11RI1-RO12RI2-RO21RI2-RO22

Insertion loss at the receive end

single mode dB ≤1.5

multimode dB ≤2

Range of the input optical power dBm –35 to 7 (SLM)–35 to 0 (MLM)

Switching threshold of optical power difference dB 5


Power Consumption The maximum power consumption at 25: 6.8 W





14.2 OLPOLP: optical line protection unit

14.2.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the OLP board is available, that is TN11.

14.2.2 ApplicationThe OLP is a type of optical protection unit. The OLP realizes the optical line protection, intra-board 1+1 protection and the client-side 1+1 protection.

For the position of the OLP in the WDM system, see Figure 14-6, Figure 14-7 and Figure 14-8.

Figure 14-1 Position of the OLP in the WDM system (optical line protection)

OLP

OTU

OTUMUX

DMUXOTU

OTU

FIU

TI

RO

OLP

DMUX

MUX

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

FIU

RO

TI

TO1

RI1

TO2

RI2

RI1

TO1

RI2

TO2


Figure 14-2 Position of the OLP in the WDM system (intra-board 1+1 protection)

OLPMUX

DMUX

DMUX

MUXTO1

TO2

RI1

RI2

OLP

DMUX

MUX

DMUX

MUX

FIU

FIU

FIU

FIU

TO1

RI1

TO2

RI2

TIOTU RO

ROOTUTI

NOTEWhen used for intra-board 1+1 protection, the OLP does not support the 2.5 Gbit/s OTU.




Figure 14-3 Position of the OLP in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection)

client-side MUX

DMUX

DMUX

MUX DMUX

MUX

DMUX

MUX

FIU

FIU

FIU

FIU

OTU(W)

OTU(P)

OLP

TO1RI1

TO2RI2

TIRO

RI1TO1

RI2TO2

OTU(W)

OTU(P)

ROTIOLP

client-side

NOTEWhen the working OTU and the protection OTU are installed in different subracks, the OLP board can be used for client-side protection.

14.2.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the OLP are optical line protection, intra-board 1+1 protection and client-side 1+1 protection.


Table 14-1 Functions and features of the OLP


Description

Basic function Provides the optical line protection to ensure the normal receiving of signals when the line fiber fails.Provides the intra-board 1+1 protection to protect the services of the OTU that has no dual-fed and selective receiving function.Provides the client-side 1+1 protection, making use of a working OTU and a protection OTU to protect the client-side services.

Protection scheme The protection mode is dual-fed and signal selection and single-end switching.Protection switching is stable and quick because the APS protocol is not required.

Protection switching time

For the optical line protection, the switching time is less than 100 ms.For the intra-board 1+1 protection and the client-side 1+1 protection, the switching time is less than 50 ms.

14.2.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe OLP consists of the optical splitter, optical switch and the control and communication module.

Figure 14-9 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the OLP.




Figure 14-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the OLP

Optical splitter

SCC

TI

RO

TO1TO2

RI1RI2

Optical switch


Optical SplitterThe optical splitter divides a signal into two signals with the same power and sends them to the working and the protection fibers respectively.

Optical SwitchAt the receiving end, the optical switch selects the optical signal from the working or the protection path.







Automatic switching: If the working path is faulty while the protection path is normal, the services are switched from working path to the protection path. If both paths are faulty, the services are not switched. If the services are transmitted on the protection path, the switching status is the same. The working mode can be set to revertive or non-revertive. In revertive mode, if the working path is recovered and confirmed to be normal for a certain period, the services




are switched back to the working path. In non-revertive mode, even if the working path is recovered, the services remain on the protection path until a fault occurs to the protection path.



The priorities of the switching types from the highest to the lowest are as follows: clear switching > locked switching > forced switching > automatic switching > manual switching. If a higher level protection switching exists, lower level switching cannot be executed successfully. But if only the lower level switching exists, it can be executed successfully.

14.2.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the OLP front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 14-10 shows the OLP front panel.




Figure 14-1 OLP front panel

OLP

OLP

STATACTPROGSRV

LASERRADIATION



TO1

RI1

TO2

RI2

RO

TI



InterfacesThere are six optical interfaces on the OLP front panel. Table 14-6 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 14-1 Types and functions of the OLP interfaces

Interface

Type Function

TI LC Receives the line signal from the FIU board. (optical line protection)Receives one WDM-side signal. (intra-board 1+1 protection)Receives one client-side signal. (client-side 1+1 protection)

RO LC Transmits the line signal to the FIU board. (optical line protection)Transmits one WDM-side signal. (intra-board 1+1 protection)Transmits one client-side signal. (client-side 1+1 protection)

TO1/TO2 LC Transmits the working and the protection signals to the line side. (optical line protection)Transmits signals to the working and the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection)Transmits signals to the working and the protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection)

RI1/RI2 LC Receives the working or the protection signal from the line side. (optical line protection)Receives the signals from the working and the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection)Receives the signals from the working and protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection)



14.2.6 Valid SlotsThe OLP occupies one slot. The valid slots for the OLP are IU1–IU17.






Table 14-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the OLP displayed on the NM


TO11/RI11 1

TO12/RI12 2

TI/RO 3



Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)

Varance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)

14.2.8 Specifications of the OLPSpecifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical SpecificationsTable 14-8 lists the optical specifications of the OLP.

Table 14-1 Optical specifications of the OLP

Interface

Item Unit

Value

TI-TO1TI-TO2

Insertion loss at the transmit end

single mode dB ≤4

multimode dB ≤4.5

RI1-RORI2-RO

Insertion loss at the receive end

single mode dB ≤1.5

multimode dB ≤2

Range of the input optical power dBm –35 to 7 (for single mode)–35 to 0 (for multi-mode)

Switching threshold of optical power difference

dB 5






14.3 SCSSCS:sync optical channel separator unit

14.3.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the SCS board is available, that is TN11.

14.3.2 ApplicationThe SCS is a type of optical protection unit. The SCS realizes the client-side 1+1 protection and Board-level protection (extended mode).

For the position of the SCS in the WDM system, see Figure 14-11 and Figure 14-12.

Figure 14-1 Position of the SCS in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection) client-side MUX

DMUX

DMUX

MUX DMUX

MUX

DMUX

MUX

FIU

FIU

FIU

FIU

OTU(W)

OTU(P)

SCS

TO11RI11

TO21RI21

TO12RI12

TO22RI22

TI1RO1

TI2RO2

RI11TO11

RI21TO21

RI12TO12

RI22TO22

OTU(W)

OTU(P)

RO1TI1

RO2TI2

SCS

client-side




Figure 14-2 Position of the SCS in the WDM system (board-level protection with extended mode)

FIU

FIU

L4G

TBE2

TBE1

TBE2

TBE1TBE1

TBE2

TBE1

TBE2

L4G

SCS

R1SCS

R1

OADM

OADM

14.3.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main function and feature supported by the SCS is the client-side 1+1 protection.


Table 14-1 Functions and features of the SCS


Description

Basic function Receives signals from the working and the protection OTUs and realizes the client-side 1+1 protection.Receives signals from the working and the protection TBE and realizes the board-level protection (extended mode).

Protection scheme The channel protection supported by the SCS board does not need the support of protocol. Instead, the channel protection executes switching by detecting SD and SF events of the channel.

14.3.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe SCS consists of the optical splitter and the optical coupler.

Figure 14-13 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SCS.




Figure 14-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the SCS

Optical splitter

Optical coupler

Optical splitterTI1 TO11

RO1

TI2

RO2

TO12

RI11RI12

TO21TO22

RI21RI22Optical coupler

Optical SplitterThe optical splitter divides a signal into two signals with the same power and sends them to the working and the protection OTU respectively.

Optical CouplerAt the receiving end, the optical coupler receives an optical signal sent from the working or the protection OTU and sends the signal to the client-side equipment.




Automatic switching: If the working path is faulty while the protection path is normal, the services are switched from working path to the protection path. If both paths are faulty, the services are not switched. If the services are transmitted on the protection path, the switching status is the same. The working mode can be set to revertive or non-revertive. In revertive mode, if the working path is recovered and confirmed to be normal for a certain period, the services are switched back to the working path. In non-revertive mode, even if the working path is recovered, the services remain on the protection path until a fault occurs to the protection path.



The priorities of the switching types from the highest to the lowest are as follows: clear switching > locked switching > forced switching > automatic switching > manual switching. If a higher level protection switching exists, lower level switching cannot be




executed successfully. But if only the lower level switching exists, it can be executed successfully.

14.3.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the SCS front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 14-14 shows the SCS front panel.

Figure 14-1 SCS front panel

SCS

SCS

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

TO11

TO12

RI12

TO21

RI21

TO22

RI22

RO

1TI1

RO

2TI2

RI11

STAT






InterfacesThere are 12 optical interfaces on the SCS front panel. Table 14-10 lists the type and function of each interface.

Table 14-1 Types and functions of the SCS interfaces

Interface Type

Function

TI1/TI2 LC Receives the first/second channel of client-side signals.

RO1/RO2 LC Transmits the first/second channel of client-side signals.

TO11/TO12

LC Transmits the first channel of signals to the working and protection OTU.

TO21/TO22

LC Transmits the second channel of signals to the working and the protection OTU.

RI11/RI12 LC Receives the first channel of signals from the working and protection OTU.

RI21/RI22 LC Receives the second channel of signals from the working and protection OTU.



14.3.6 Valid SlotsThe SCS occupies one slot. The valid slots for the SCS are IU1–IU17.



Table 14-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SCS displayed on the NM


TI1/RO1 1

TO11/RI11 2

TO12/RI12 3





TI2/RO2 4

TO21/RI21 5

TO22/RI22 6


14.3.8 Specifications of the SCSSpecifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical SpecificationsTable 14-12 lists the optical specifications of the SCS.

Table 14-1 Optical specifications of the SCS


TI1-TO11TI1-TO21TI2-TO21TI2-TO22

Splitting insertion loss

single mode dB ≤4

multimode dB ≤4.5

RI11-RO1RI12-RO1RI21-RO2RI22-RO2

Coupling insertion loss

single mode dB ≤4

multimode dB ≤4.5

Mechanical Specifications Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) Weight:1.76 lb (0.8 kg)





15 Spectrum Analyzer Unit

15.1 MCA4MCA4: 4-channel spectrum analyzer unit

15.1.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the MCA4 board is available, that is TN11.

15.1.2 ApplicationThe MCA4 is a type of spectrum analyzer unit. The MCA4 supports spectral analysis for four channels.

For the position of the MCA4 in the WDM system, see Figure 15-1.

Figure 15-1 Position of the MCA4 in the WDM system

OTUOAU OAU

OAUOAU

MUX

DMUX

OTU

OTU

OTU

DMUX

MUX

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

MCA4 MCA4

15.1.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the MCA4 are spectral analysis, detection and APE.





Table 15-1 Functions and features of the MCA4


Description

Basic function Provides the spectral analysis for four channels.

Detection function Supports the following detection functions and reports to the SCC. Optical power of the channel Central wavelength Optical signal-to-noise ratio Number of wavelengths in the main optical path

APE function Realizes the APE function in cooperation with other boards.Detects the optical power of each channel.

15.1.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe MCA4 consists of the optical switch, spectral analysis module and the control and communication module.

Figure 15-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MCA4.

Figure 15-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the MCA4

Opticalswitch


SCC

Spectralanalysismodule

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

Optical SwitchThrough the optical switch, one of the four input signals is selected to be sent to the spectral analysis module.

Spectral Analysis ModuleThe spectral analysis module performs the spectral analysis for the optical signal sent through the optical switch and obtains the data such as optical power, OSNR, number of wavelengths and central wavelength. The data is sent to the CPU for processing. The CPU reports the results to the SCC.







15.1.5 Front PanelThere are indicators and interfaces on the MCA4 front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 15-3 shows the MCA4 front panel.

Figure 15-1 MCA4 front panel

MCA4

MCA4

STATACTPROGSRV

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4






InterfacesThere are four optical interfaces on the MCA4 front panel.Table 15-2 lists the type and function of each interface.

Table 15-1 Types and functions of the MCA4 interfaces

Interface

Type

Function

IN1–IN4 LC Connected to the "MON" interfaces of other boards to receive optical signals for analysis. The interfaces can be connected to four "MON" interfaces at the same time.

15.1.6 Valid SlotsThe MCA4 occupies two slots. The valid slots for the MCA4 are IU1–IU16 in the subrack.

The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the two occupied slots in the subrack, so the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left slot.

For example, if the MCA4 occupies slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the MCA4 displayed on the NM is IU1.

15.1.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA4The characteristic code for the MCA4 consists of one character, indicating the band of the optical signals processed by the board.


Table 15-1 Characteristic code for the MCA4

Code Meaning

Description

The first character

Band Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band. The value L represents L band.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA4 is C, indicating C band.






Table 15-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MCA4 displayed on the NM


IN1–IN4 1–4

Configuration ParametersOptical Monitoring

Monitor Interval (min.)

Wavelength Monitor Status

15.1.9 Specifications of the MCA4Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical SpecificationsTable 15-5 lists the optical specifications of the MCA4.

Table 15-1 Optical specifications of the MCA4

Item Unit Value


Detect range for single channel optical power dBm –30 to –10

Detect accuracy for optical power dBm ±1.5

Detect accuracy for OSNR (The detect range for signal-to-noise ratio is 13 dB to 23 dB, and the wavelength spacing is 100 GHz.)

dB ±1.5 (OSNR: 13 to 19)±2 (OSNR: 19 to 23)

Detect accuracy for central wavelength nm ±0.1

Numbers of optical interface pcs 4






15.2 MCA8MCA8: 8-channel spectrum analyzer unit

15.2.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the MCA8 board is available, that is TN11.

15.2.2 ApplicationThe MCA8 is a type of Spectrum Analyzer unit. The MCA8 supports spectral analysis for eight channels.

For the position of the MCA8 in the WDM system, see Figure 15-4.

Figure 15-1 Position of the MCA8 in the WDM system

OTUOAU OAU

OAUOAU

MUX

DMUX

OTU

OTU

OTU

DMUX

MUX

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

MCA8 MCA8

15.2.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the MCA8 are spectral analysis, detection and APE.





Table 15-1 Functions and features of the MCA8


Description

Basic function Provides the spectral analysis for four channels.

Detection function Supports the following detection functions and reports to the SCC. Optical power of the channel Central wavelength Optical signal-to-noise ratio Number of wavelengths in the main optical path

APE function Realizes the APE function in cooperation with other boards.Detects the optical power of each channel.

15.2.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe MCA8 consists of the optical switch, spectral analysis module and the control and communication module.

Figure 15-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MCA8.

Figure 15-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the MCA8

Opticalswitch


SCC

Spectralanalysismodule

IN1

IN2

IN8

Optical SwitchThrough the optical switch, one of the eight input signals is selected to be sent to the spectral analysis module.

Spectral Analysis ModuleThe spectral analysis module performs the spectral analysis for the optical signal sent through the optical switch and obtains the data such as optical power, OSNR, number of wavelengths and central wavelength. The data is sent to the CPU for processing. The CPU reports the results to the SCC.







15.2.5 Front PanelThere are indicators and interfaces on the MCA8 front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 15-6 shows the MCA8 front panel.

Figure 15-1 MCA8 front panel

MCA8

MCA8

STATACTPROGSRV

IN3

IN4

IN5

IN6

IN1

IN2

IN7

IN8






InterfacesThere are eight optical interfaces on the MCA8 front panel.Table 15-7 lists the type and function of each interface.

Table 15-1 Types and functions of the MCA8 interfaces

Interface

Type

Function

IN1–IN8 LC Connected to the "MON" interfaces of other boards to receive optical signals for analysis. The interfaces can be connected to eight "MON" interfaces at the same time.

15.2.6 Valid SlotsThe MCA8 occupies two slots. The valid slots for the MCA8 are IU1–IU16.

The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the two occupied slots in the subrack, so the slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left slot.

For example, if the MCA8 occupies slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the MCA8 displayed on the NM is IU1.

15.2.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA8The characteristic code for the MCA8 consists of one character, indicating the band of the optical signals processed by the board.


Table 15-1 Characteristic code for the MCA8

Code Meaning

Description

The first character

Band Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band.The value L represents L band.







Table 15-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MCA8 displayed on the NM


IN1–IN8 1–8

Configuration ParametersOptical Monitoring

Monitor Interval (min.)

Wavelength Monitor Status

15.2.9 Specifications of the MCA8Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical SpecificationsTable 15-10 lists the optical specifications of the MCA8.

Table 15-1 Optical specifications of the MCA8

Item Unit Value


Detect range for single channel optical power dBm –30 to –10

Detect accuracy for optical power dBm ±1.5

Detect accuracy for OSNR (The detect range for signal-to-noise ratio is 13 dB to 23 dB, and the wavelength spacing is 100 GHz.)

dB ±1.5 (OSNR: 13 to 19)±2 (OSNR: 19 to 23)

Detect accuracy for central wavelength nm ±0.1

Numbers of optical interface pcs 8






15.3 WMUWMU: Wavelength Monitored Unit

15.3.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the WMU board is available, that is TN11.

15.3.2 ApplicationThe WMU board realizes the wavelength monitoring in the system with wavelengths at 50 GHz channel spacing.

For the position of the WMU in the WDM system, see Figure 15-7.

Figure 15-1 Position of the WMU in the WDM system

ITL

DMUX

DMUX

MUX

OA

OA

OTU

TU

OTU

TU

O O

MUX

MUX

DMUX

DMUX

ITL

OA

FIU

OA

OSC

WMU

MUX

FIU

WMU




NOTEOne WMU board can realize the centralized wavelength monitoring in two directions. Figure 15-7 shows the WMU in two places. Actually it refers to the same one WMU board.

15.3.3 Functions and FeaturesThe WMU board supports the centralized monitoring of the wavelengths on the OTU board at the transmit end in the system with wavelengths at 50 GHz channel spacing.


Table 15-1 Functions and features of the WMU


Description

Basic function The board supports the centralized monitoring of the wavelengths on the OTU board at the transmit end in the system with wavelengths at 50 GHz channel spacing; and performs centralized monitoring of the wavelengths on the OTU at the transmit end in a transmission system. In addition, the board can monitor the wavelengths in two different optical transmit directions.

Optical switch The optical switch is used to select the optical signals from the desired transmission direction to monitor.

15.3.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe WMU consists of the optical switch, wavelength monitoring module and the control and communication module.

Figure 15-8 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WMU.

Figure 15-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the WMU

SCC

IN1

IN2

Opticalswitch

Wavelengthmonitoring

module

Control andcommunicate module




Optical SwitchThrough the optical switch, one of the two input signals is selected to be sent to the wavelength monitoring module.

Wavelength Monitoring ModuleDetects one multiplexed signal from the optical switch, and reports the wavelength and optical power information to the SCC board.




15.3.5 Front PanelThere are indicators and interfaces on the WMU front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 15-9 shows the WMU front panel.




Figure 15-1 WMU front panel

WMU

WMU

STATACTPROGSRV

IN1

IN2



InterfacesThere are two optical interfaces on the WMU front panel.Table 15-12 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 15-1 Types and functions of the WMU interfaces

Interface

Type

Function

IN1/IN2 LC Connects to the MON optical interface on the optical amplifier boards in two different transmit directions, respectively, for centralized wavelength monitoring.

15.3.6 Valid SlotsThe WMU occupies one slot. The valid slots for the WMU are IU1–IU17 in the subrack.



Table 15-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WMU displayed on the NM


IN1 1

IN2 2

15.3.8 Specifications of the WMUSpecifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.


Table 15-1 Optical specifications of the WMU

Item Unit

Value


Adjacent channel spacing - Supports the monitoring to system wavelengths with spacing of 50 GHz.

Per-channel input optical power range

dBm -36 to -16




Item Unit

Value

Detect accuracy for central wavelength

GHz <2.5

Detect accuracy for single channel optical power

dB <2

Detect range for Central wavelength offset

GHz -10 to 10

Mechanical Specifications Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) Weight: 4.19 lb (1.9kg)

Power Consumption The maximum power consumption at 25: 12W The maximum power consumption at 55: 15W




16 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit

16.1 VA1VA1: 1-channel variable optical attenuator unit

16.1.1 Version DescriptionTwo functional versions of the VA1 board are available: TN11 and TN12. There is no difference between the two versions in terms of functionality.

Table 16-1lists the version description of the VA1.

Table 16-1 Version description of the VA1

Item Description

Functional version Two functional versions of the VA1 board are available: TN11 and TN12.

Similarity The TN12VA1 works in the same way as the TN11VA1.

Difference None

Replacement The TN11VA1 and TN12VA1 boards share the same functionality and can be replaced with each other. But after the TN11VA1 is replaced with the TN12VA1, the SCC software need be upgraded.

16.1.2 ApplicationThe VA1 is a type of variable optical attenuator unit. The VA1 realizes the power adjustment for one signal.

For the position of the VA1 in the WDM system, see Figure 16-1.




Figure 16-1 Position of the VA1 in the WDM system

MR2

OA OA

OA OA

MR2

OTU OTU

VA1

OTU OTU

VA1

VA1

VA1

VA1

VA1 VA1 VA1

16.1.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the VA1 are optical power adjustment, alarm monitoring and power-off protection.

For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 16-2

Table 16-1 Functions and features of the VA1


Description

Basic function

Adjusts the optical power of one optical signal according to the control command sent by the SCC.

Alarm monitoring

Detects the input optical power, attenuation and reports various alarms to the SCC.

Power-off protection

Supports the power-off protection to avoid the damages caused by too high optical power to the corresponding optical receiver when the power supply recovers.When there is no power supplied to the VA1, the attenuation of the VA1 changes to its maximum value automatically. Shortly after the power supply recovers, the attenuation of the VA1 still remains its maximum value. When the system begins to work normally, the attenuation automatically changes back to the value set last time.

Attenuation range

The variable attenuation ranges between 1.5 dB and 21.5 dB. The resolution is 0.1 dB.

16.1.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe VA1 consists of a variable optical attenuator and the control and communication module.

Figure 16-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the VA1.




Figure 16-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the VA1

SCC

IN OUTVariable optical attenuator


The function of the VA1 is to adjust the optical power of the input signals according to the command sent by the SCC to meet the system requirement.

Variable Optical AttenuatorThe variable optical attenuator adjusts the optical power of the input signal.




16.1.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the VA1 front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 16-3 shows the VA1 front panel.




Figure 16-1 VA1 front panel

VA1

VA1

STATACTPROGSRV

LASERRADIATION



OU

TIN



InterfacesThere are two optical interfaces on the VA1 front panel. Table 16-3 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 16-1 Types and functions of the VA1 interfaces


IN LC Receives the optical signals to be adjusted.

OUT LC Transmits the adjusted optical signals.



16.1.6 Valid SlotsThe VA1 occupies one slot in a subrack. The valid slots for the VA1 are IU1-IU17.

16.1.7 Characteristic Code for the VA1The characteristic code for the VA1 consists of three digits, indicating the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board.


Table 16-1 Characteristic code for the VA1


The first to the third digits Attenuation value Indicate the maximum attenuation.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11VA1 is 21.5, indicating that the maximum attenuation value is 21.5 dB.



Table 16-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the VA1 displayed on the NM


IN/OUT 1








Path Use Status

16.1.9 Specifications of the VA1Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical SpecificationsTable 16-6 lists the optical specifications of the VA1.

Table 16-1 Optical specifications of the VA1

Item Unit

Value

TN11VA1

TN12VA1

IN-OUT Inherent insertion loss dB ≤1.5 ≤1.5

Dynamic attenuation range dB 0–20 0–20

Adjustment accuracy dB 1 1(attenuation≤10dB)1.3(attenuation≤15dB)1.8(attenuation>15dB)

WDL dB 0.5 1.0 (attenuation≤15dB)1.5 (attenuation≤20dB)

PDL dB 0.5 0.7 (attenuation≤15dB)1.0 (attenuation≤20dB)

PMD ps 0.2 0.2






16.2 VA4VA4: 4-channel variable optical attenuator unit

16.2.1 Version DescriptionTwo functional versions of the VA4 board are available: TN11 and TN12. There is no difference between the two versions in terms of functionality.

Table 16-7 lists the version description of the VA4.

Table 16-1 Version description of the VA4

Item Description

Functional version Two functional versions of the VA4 board are available: TN11 and TN12.

Similarity The TN12VA4 works in the same way as the TN11VA4.

Difference None

Replacement The TN11VA4 and TN12VA4 boards share the same functionality and can be replaced with each other. But after the TN11VA4 board is replacement with the TN12VA4 board, the SCC software need be upgraded.

16.2.2 ApplicationThe VA4 is a type of variable optical attenuator unit. The VA4 realizes the power adjustment for four optical signals.

For the position of the VA4 in the WDM system, see Figure 16-4.

Figure 16-1 Position of the VA4 in the WDM system

MR2

OA OA

OA OA

MR2

OTU OTU

VA4

OTU OTU

VA4

VA4

VA4

VA4

VA4

VA4




16.2.3 Functions and FeaturesThe main functions and features supported by the VA4 are optical power adjustment, alarm monitoring, and power-off protection.


Table 16-1 Functions and features of the VA4


Description

Basic function Adjusts the optical power of four optical signals respectively according to the control command sent by the SCC.

Alarm monitoring

Detects attenuation and reports various alarms to the SCC.

Power-off protection

Supports the power-off protection to avoid the damages caused by too high optical power to the corresponding optical receiver when the power supply recovers.When there is no power supplied to the VA4, the attenuation of the VA4 changes to its maximum value automatically. Shortly after the power supply recovers, the attenuation of the VA4 still remains its maximum value. When the system begins to work normally, the attenuation automatically changes back to the value set last time.

Attenuation range

The variable attenuation ranges between 1.5 dB and 21.5 dB. The resolution is 0.1 dB.

16.2.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe VA4 consists of variable optical attenuators and the control and communication module.

Figure 16-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the VA4.

Figure 16-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the VA4

Variable optical attenuator

Variable optical attenuator

Variable optical attenuatorIN1


SCC

IN2

IN3

IN4

OUT1

OUT2

OUT3

OUT4Variable optical attenuator




The function of the VA4 is to adjust the optical power of each signal according to the command sent by the SCC to make the optical power of each channel meet the system requirement. One VA4 can process four signals at the same time. The VA4 adjusts the attenuation of each signal according to the command sent by the SCC.

Variable Optical AttenuatorsOne VA4 has four variable optical attenuators. Each attenuator adjusts the optical power of each input signal.




16.2.5 Front PanelThere are indicators, interfaces and laser safety label on the VA4 front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 16-6 shows the VA4 front panel.




Figure 16-1 VA4 front panel

VA4

VA4

LASERRADIATION



STATACTPROGSRV

OU

TIN

OU

T2IN

2O

UT3

IN3

OU

T4IN

4



InterfacesThere are eight optical interfaces on the VA4 front panel. Table 16-9 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 16-1 Types and functions of the VA4 interfaces


IN1–IN4 LC Receives the optical signals to be adjusted.

OUT1–OUT4 LC Transmits the adjusted optical signals.



16.2.6 Valid SlotsThe VA4 occupies one slot. The valid slots for the VA4 are IU1–IU17.

16.2.7 Characteristic Code for the VA4The characteristic code for the VA4 consists of three digits, indicating the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board.


Table 16-1 Characteristic code for the VA4






Table 16-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the VA4 displayed on the NM


IN1/OUT1 1

IN2/OUT2 2





IN3/OUT3 3

IN4/OUT4 4





Path Use Status

16.2.9 Specifications of the VA4Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Optical SpecificationsTable 16-12 lists the optical specifications of the VA4.

Table 16-1 Optical specifications of the VA4

Item Unit

Value

TN11VA4

TN12VA4

IN-OUT Inherent insertion loss dB ≤1.5 ≤1.5

Dynamic attenuation range dB 0–20 0–20

Adjustment accuracy dB 1 1(attenuation≤10dB)1.3(attenuation≤15dB)1.8(attenuation>15dB)

WDL dB 0.5 1.0 (attenuation≤15dB)1.5 (attenuation≤20dB)

PDL dB 0.5 0.7 (attenuation≤15dB)1.0 (attenuation≤20dB)

PMD ps 0.2 0.2









17 Dispersion Compensation Unit

17.1 DCUDCU: Dispersion Compensation Board

17.1.1 Version DescriptionOnly one functional version of the DCU board is available, that is TN11.

17.1.2 ApplicationThe DCU board is a kind of dispersion compensation board, compensating for the dispersion which is accumulated in an optical transmission system. It is used at the transmit end and the receive end in the transmission system.

For the position of the DCU in the WDM system, see Figure 17-1.

Figure 17-1 Position of the DCU in the WDM system

OBU OAU

OBUOAUDMUXOTU

OTU

DMUX

MUX

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

DCU

DCU

OTUMUX

OTU

OBU OAU

OBUOAUDMUXOTU

OTU

DMUX

MUX

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

DCU

DCU

OTUMUX

OTU




17.1.3 Functions and FeaturesThe DCU board compensates for the dispersion which is accumulated in the fiber during transmission and compresses optical signal pulse. In this way, the optical signals transmitted can be restored at the output end. In addition, when used together with an optical amplifier board, the DCU board can realize long haul optical transmission.


Table 17-1 Functions and features of the DCU


Description

Basic function Provides dispersion compensation for different transmission distance.

Dispersion compensation method

Compensates for the dispersion accumulated in an optical transmission system, and compresses the optical signal pulse. In this way the optical signals transmitted can be restored at the output end.

Long haul transmission with optical regeneration

Realizes long haul transmission when used together with an optical amplifier board.

17.1.4 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe DCU board mainly contains one dispersion compensation module (DCM). When the DCU board uses different DCM modules, the increased transmission distance due to dispersion compensation is different . The DCU board supports a maximum of eight kinds of DCM module.

Figure 17-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DCU.

Figure 17-1 Functional modules and signal flow of the DCU

SCC

Dispersion compensationmodule

IN OUT

Dispersion Compensation ModuleAfter the optical signal is transmitted for a certain distance, the optical signal pulse is widened because of the positive dispersion accumulated in the system. In this case, the system transmission performance is severely affected. The DCM module employs the negative dispersion borne with the dispersion compensating fiber (DCF)




to offset the positive dispersion in the transmission fiber, and compresses the input optical signal pulse. In this way, the optical signals at the output end are restored back to the original signals.

17.1.5 Front PanelThere are interfaces and laser safety label on the DCU front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 17-3 shows the DCU front panel.

Figure 17-1 DCU front panel

DCU

DCU

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

OU

TIN

InterfacesThere are two optical interfaces on the DCU front panel.Table 17-2 lists the type and function of each interface.




Table 17-1 Types and functions of the DCU interfaces

Interface

Type

Function

IN LC Accesses the multiplexed signals to be compensated in terms of dispersion.

OUT LC Outputs the multiplexed signals that have been compensated in terms of dispersion.

17.1.6 Valid SlotsThe DCU occupies one slot. The valid slots for the DCU are IU1–IU17.

17.1.7 Characteristic Code for the DCUThe characteristic code for the DCU board consists of characters, indicating the type of the fiber that the board works with and the dispersion compensation distance.


Table 17-1 Characteristic code for the DCU


The character before hyphen (-)

Fiber type Type of the fiber that the DCU board works with

The character after hyphen (-)

Dispersion compensation distance

The transmission distance achieved through dispersion compensation

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11DCU is G.655LEAF-40. It indicates that the DCU board works with G.655LEAF fibers, and the dispersion compensation distance is 40 km.

NOTEIf the characteristic code contains varieties of the dispersion compensation distance, the symbol "&" is used to seperate each distance variety.






Table 17-1 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DCU displayed on the NM


IN 1

OUT 2

17.1.9 Specifications of the DCUSpecifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.


Table 17-1 Optical specifications of the DCU

Item Unit

Value

DCU01

DCU02

DCU03

DCU04

DCU05

DCU06

DCU07

DCU08

Typical dispersion compensation distance

km 20 40 60 80 100 120 5 10

Maximum insertion loss

dB 3.3 4.7 6.4 8 9 9.8 2.3 2.6

Dispersion compensation slope

- 90%–110%

Polarization mode dispersion

ps 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.3 0.3

Polarization dependent loss

dB 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1

Maximum input power

dBm 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20


nm 1525–1565

Dispersion compensating fiber type

- G.652 fiber




Mechanical Specifications Dimensions of board (PCB): 245.1 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) Dimensions of front panel: 264.6 mm (H) x 25.4 mm (W) Weight: 1.5 kg





18 Cables

18.1 Power Cables and Grounding CablesThe OptiX OSN 6800 has cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND power cables and subrack power cables.

18.1.1 Cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND Power CablesThe -48 V, BGND, and PGND power cables supply power to devices inside the cabinet. One end of the power cable is connected to the power distribution cabinet and grounding bar in the equipment room. The other end is connected to the DC power distribution box at the cabinet top.

StructureFigure 18-1 shows the structure of the cabinet -48 V power cable and the cabinet BGND grounding cable.Figure 18-2 shows the structure of the cabinet PGND grounding cable.

Figure 18-1 Structure of the cabinet -48 V power cable and cabinet BGND grounding cable

1 2

3

1. Cord end terminal 2. OT naked crimping connector 3. Cable clip




Figure 18-2 Structure of the cabinet PGND grounding cable

L

1

2

3

4

5

6

1. OT naked crimping connector 2. Cable clip 3. JG two-hole naked crimping connector4. Heat shrink tube 5. Heat shrink tube 6. Cable

Pin AssignmentNone

Technical Parameters

Table 18-1 Technical parameters of the cabinet -48 V/BGND power cables(16 mm2)

Item Description

Cabinet -48 V power cable

Connector 1 Cord end terminal-16 mm2-0.024mm-80A-Insertion depth 16mm-Green

Connector 2 OT naked crimping connector-16 mm2-M8

Type of the cable

Electric power cable-450 V/750 V-227 IEC 02(RV)-16mm2-Blue-85 A

Cabinet BGND grounding cable

Connector 1 Cord end terminal-16 mm2-0.024mm-80A-Insertion depth 16mm-Green


Type of the cable

Electric power cable-450 V/750 V-227 IEC 02(RV)-16mm2-Black-85 A

Table 18-2 Technical parameters of the cabinet -48 V/BGND power cables(25 mm2)

Item Description


Connector 1 Cord end terminal-25 mm2-30 mm-75 A-Insertion depth 16 mm-Brown





Type of the cable

Electric power cable-450 V/750 V-25 mm2-Blue-110 A


Connector 1 Cord end terminal-25 mm2-30 mm-75A-Insertion depth 16 mm-Brown

Connector 2 Naked crimping connector-OT type-25 mm2-M8

Type of the cable

Electric power cable-450 V/750 V-25 mm2-Black-110 A

Table 18-3 Technical parameters of the cabinet -48 V/BGND power cables (35 mm2)

Item Description


Connector 1 Cord end terminal-35mm2-0.03m-105A-Insertion depth 16mm-Cream-colored


Type of the cable

Electric power cable-750V/450V-227 IEC 02(RV)-35mm2-Blue-135 A


Connector 1 Cord end terminal-35mm2-0.03m-105A-Insertion depth 16mm-Cream-colored


Type of the cable

Electric power cable-750V/450V-227 IEC 02(RV)-35mm2-Black-135 A

Table 18-4 Technical parameters of the cabinet PGND power cables

Item Description

Cabinet PGND grounding cable


Connector 2 JG dual-hole naked crimping connector-25 mm2-M6-150 A-Tin plating

Type of the cable

Electric power cable-450 V/750 V-25 mm2-Yellow and green-110 A

18.1.2 Subrack Power CablesThe subrack power cables connect the DC power distribution box at the cabinet top and the power interface in the subrack interface area, which lead the -48 V power supply from the top of the cabinet to the subracks. The subrack power cables have been correctly connected before delivery.




StructureFigure 18-3 shows the subrack power cable.

Figure 18-1 Structure of the subrack power cable

X1

X3

X2

500L

A

A

A1A2A3

1

W1

W2

2 3

1. Cable connector 2. Cable clip 3. Naked crimping connector

Pin AssignmentFor the pin assignment of subrack power cables, refer to Table 18-5.

Table 18-1 Pin assignment of the subrack power cables

Cable

Cable Connector

Cord End Terminal

Connection Core Color

W2 X1.A1 X2 A1 connects to X2. Blue (-48 V power)

W1 X1.A3 X3 A3 connects to X3. Black (power ground)




Technical ParametersThe technical parameters of subrack power cables are listed in Table 18-6.

Table 18-1 Technical parameters of subrack power cables

Item Description

Cable connector X1 Cable connector-D type-3PIN-Female-Solder injection molding type-No middle contact

Cord end terminals X2, X3

Common terminal-Conductor Cross Section-6 mm2-Length 20 mm-30 A-Insertion depth 12 mm-Black

Type of the cable W2

Power cable-450 V/750 V-H07Z-K-6 mm2-Blue-Low Smoke Zero Halogen Cable


Power cable-450 V/750 V-H07Z-K-6 mm2-Black-Low Smoke Zero Halogen Cable

18.2 Optical FibersOptical fibers of the OptiX OSN 6800 can be classified into three types: LC/PC-LC/PC, LC/PC-FC/PC, LC/PC-SC/PC.

18.2.1 ClassificationThe connectors and the length of the fibers are selected based on the results of site survey.

The optical fibers used by the equipment are classified as shown in Table 18-7.

Table 18-1 Classification of optical fiber jumpers

Types of the Connectors at Both Ends

Type of the Cable

LC/PC——LC/PC 2.0 mm single-mode fiber

2.0 mm multimode fiber

LC/PC——FC/PC 2.0 mm single-mode fiber


LC/PC——SC/PC 2.0 mm single-mode fiber


LSH/APC——SC/APC 2.0 mm single-mode fiber





18.2.2 ConnectorsAll optical interfaces on the front panel of the OptiX OSN 6800 boards are of LC/PC type. LC/PC fiber connectors are used with these board. The optical interfaces on the ODF in the equipment room are generally of FC/PC or SC/PC type. FC/PC or SC/PC fiber connectors are used with them.

The classification of fiber connectors is given in Table 18-8.

Table 18-1 Classification of fiber connectors

Type of Fiber Connectors

Description

LC/PC Plug-in square fiber connector/protruding polished

FC/PC Round fiber connector/protruding polished

SC/PC Square fiber connector/protruding polished

LSH/APC Fiber connector with auto-protective dustproof cap/eight-degree radian surface/protruding polished

The appearances of the fiber connectors are shown in Figure 18-4, Figure 18-5, Figure 18-6and Figure 18-7.

Figure 18-2 LC/PC fiber connector

LC/PC connector

Protective cap




Figure 18-3 FC/PC fiber connector

Protective cap

FC/PC connector

Figure 18-4 SC/PC fiber connector

SC/PC connector

Protective cap

Figure 18-5 LSH/APC fiber connector




18.3 Grounding CablesThe OptiX OSN 6800 has grounding cables, including cabinet door grounding cables and a PDU grounding cable.

18.3.1 Cabinet Door Grounding CablesThe cabinet door grounding cables ground the front door, rear door and side doors. The cabinet door grounding cables have been correctly connected before delivery.

StructureFigure 18-8 shows the structure of the cabinet door grounding cables.

Figure 18-1 Structure of the cabinet door grounding cable

1

X1 X2

L

1. OT naked crimping connector

Pin AssignmentNone

Technical ParametersThe technical parameters of the cabinet door grounding cables are listed in Table 18-9.

Table 18-1 Technical parameters of the cabinet door grounding cables

Item Description

Connector X1/X2 Naked crimping terminal-OT-6 mm2-M6-Tin plating-Insulated ring terminal-12-10AWG

Type of the cable Electric power cable-600V-UL1015-0 mm2-10AWG-Yellow/Green-50 A-105 core strand

18.3.2 PDU Grounding CableOne end of the PDU grounding cable is connected to a protection grounding screw of the power distribution box. The other end is connected to the protection grounding




screw on the top of the cabinet. The PDU grounding cable has been correctly connected before delivery.

StructureFigure 18-9 shows the structure of the PDU grounding cable.

Figure 18-1 Structure of the PDU grounding cable

1 2

X1 X2

1. OT naked crimping connector 2. Heat-shrink tube

Pin AssignmentNone

Technical ParametersThe technical parameters of the PDU grounding cable are listed in Table 18-10.

Table 18-1 Technical parameters of the PDU grounding cable

Item Description

Connector X1/X2 Naked crimping terminal-OT-10-6

Type of the cable Electric power cable-450/750V-227IEC02 (RV)-10 mm2-Yellow/Green-62 A

18.4 Alarm CablesAlarm cables of the OptiX OSN 6800 include cabinet indicator alarm cable, alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable, and alarm interface cable.

18.4.1 Cabinet Indicator CableThe cabinet indicator cable is used to cascade the signals of the indicators at different subracks in the same cabinet. One end of the cable is connected to LAMP1 or LAMP2 interface of one subrack. The other end of the cable is connected to LAMP1 or LAMP2 interface of another subrack.




StructureThe structure of the cable indicator alarm cable is displayed in Figure 18-10.

Figure 18-1 Structure of the cabinet indicator alarm cable

2

X1

L

X2

B

3 4

B12

A

1

A

1

8 View

X3

X4

X5

View

1. Network interface connector 2. Heat-shrink tube

3. Common plug

4. Ordinary connector

Pin AssignmentFor the pin assignment of the cabinet indicator alarm cable, refer to Table 18-11.

Table 18-1 Pin assignment of the cabinet indicator alarm cable

Connector X1 Connectors X2, X3, X4, X5

Color Relationship

X1.4 X2.2 White Pair

X1.5 X2.1 Green


X1.2 X3.1 Blue


X1.6 X4.1 Brown


X1.8 X5.1 Orange

Technical ParametersThe technical parameters of the cabinet indicator alarm cable are listed in Table 18-12.




Table 18-1 Technical parameters of the cabinet indicator alarm cable

Item Description

Connector X1 Network interface connector-8PIN-single row-single port-8bit-shielded-crystal model connector

Connector X2/X3/X4/X5

Common plug-2PIN-single row/2.5 mm

Type of the cable Twisted pair cable -100Ω-SEYPVPV-0.48mm-26AWG-4 pairs-black

Number of cores 8

Core diameter 0.5 mm

18.4.2 Alarm Interface CableThe alarm interface cable between cabinets is connected to the ALMI interface in the EFI board area of the subrack to achieve the input of alarm signals. The OptiX OSN 6800 provides eight alarm outputs. By default, critical, major, and minor alarms use the first three alarm outputs. The other five are reserved. The output alarm signals can be concatenated.

StructureFigure 18-11 shows the structure of the alarm interface cable.

Figure 18-1 Alarm interface cable

A

LX1 X2

View A

8631

1

1. Network interface connector

Pin AssignmentFor the pin assignment of the alarm interface cable, refer to Table 18-13.




Table 18-1 Pin assignment of X1

Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relationship

X1.2 X2.2 Orange Pair

X1.1 X2.1 White-orange

X1.6 X2.6 Green Pair

X1.3 X2.3 White-green

X1.4 X2.4 Blue Pair

X1.5 X2.5 White-blue

X1.8 X2.8 Brown Pair

X1.7 X2.7 White-brown

Technical ParametersThe technical parameters of the alarm interface cable are listed in Table 18-14.

Table 18-1 Technical parameters of the alarm interface cable

Item Description

Connector X1 Network interface connector-8PIN-8bit-unshielded-RJ-45 connector-uniconductor flat cable


Symmetrical twisted pair cable-100Ω-UTPCAT5E-0.5 mm-24AWG-4 pairs-PANTONE 430U-low-smoke and halogen-free cable

Number of cores

8


18.4.3 Alarm Concatenating/Inter-Subrack Concatenating CableThe inter-subrack indicator/alarm concatenating cable is used to concatenate alarm signals of the different subracks in one cabinet. Both ends of the cable use the RJ-45 connector. Each end is connected to ALMO interface of the EFI in a different subrack.

StructureFigure 18-12 shows the structure of the cable.




Figure 18-1 Structure of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable

1

8

1

8

X1 X2

1

1. Network interface connector–RJ-45

Pin AssignmentFor the pin assignment of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable, refer to Table 18-15.

Table 18-1 Pin assignment of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relationship

X1.2 X2.2 Orange Pair

X1.1 X2.1 White-orange

X1.6 X2.6 Green Pair

X1.3 X2.3 White-green

X1.4 X2.4 Blue Pair

X1.5 X2.5 White-blue

X1.8 X2.8 Brown Pair

X1.7 X2.7 White-brown

Technical ParametersFor the technical parameters of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable, refer to Table 18-16.




Table 18-1 Technical parameters of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable

Item Description

Connector X1/X2 Network interface connector-8PIN-8bit-crystal model connector

Type of the cable Communication cable-8 cores category-5 twisted pair-24AWG

Number of cores 8


18.5 Management CablesManagement cables of the OptiX OSN 6800 include the OAM serial port cable.

18.5.1 OAM Serial Port CableThe OAM serial port cable is used to connect to the OAM interface.

StructureFigure 18-13 shows the structure of the OAM serial port cable.

Figure 18-1 Structure of the OAM serial port cable

A

1

X1 X2

Pos.9

Pos.1

1. DB9 connector




Pin AssignmentFor the pin assignment of the OAM serial port cable, refer to Table 18-17.

Table 18-1 Pin assignment of the OAM serial port

Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship

X1.1 X2.1 Pair

X1.5 X2.5

X1.2 X2.2 Pair

X1.3 X2.3

X1.6 X2.6 Pair

X1.7 X2.7

X1.8 X2.8 Pair

X1.9 X2.9

Technical ParametersThe technical parameters of the OAM serial port cable are listed in Table 18-18.

Table 18-1 Technical parameters of the OAM serial port cable

Item Description

Connector X1, X2 Cable connector-D type-9 PIN-Male-Cable welding type

Type Symmetrical twisted-pair cable-100ohm-SEYVP-0.48mm-26AWG-4 pairs-Black

Number of cores 4 pairs

Length 10.0m, 20.0m




A Indicators

A.1 Cabinet IndicatorsThere are altogether four indicators in different colors on each cabinet: green, red, orange and yellow.

The corresponding messages of each indicator are listed in Table A-1.

Table A-1 Indicators description of the cabinet

Indicator

Name Status Description

power Power indicator On (green) The cabinet is powered on.

Off The cabinet is not powered on.

critical Critical alarm indicator On (red) There is a critical alarm.

Off There is no critical alarm.

major Major alarm indicator On (Orange) There is a major alarm.

Off There is no major alarm.

minor Minor alarm indicator On (Yellow) There is a minor alarm.

Off There is no minor alarm.

A.2 Subrack IndicatorThere are altogether four indicators in different colors on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800: red, orange, yellow and green.





Table A-1 Indicators description of the subrack

Indicator


PWR Power indicator On (green) The subrack works normally.

CRI Critical alarm indicator On (red) There is a critical alarm.

MAJ Major alarm indicator On (Orange) There is a major alarm.

MIN Minor alarm indicator On (Yellow) There is a minor alarm.

A.3 Board IndicatorsThere are indicators on the front panel to indicate the status of running and alarm.

The corresponding messages of board indicators are listed inTable A-3 and Table A-4.

Table A-1 Indicator description of the boards

Indicator


STAT Board Hardware Indicator

On (green) The board works normally.

On (red) The board hardware fails.

Off The board is not powered on.

PROG Board Software Indicator

On (red) Memory check failed/loading unit software failed/the FPGA file is lost/the unit software is lost.

Blinking (red) 100ms on and 100ms off BOOTROM check failed.

Blinking quickly (green)

100ms on and 100ms offWriting FLASH.

Blinking slowly (green)

300ms on and 300ms offBIOS booting/loading FPGA/loading unit software.

On (green) The board software or software for FPGA is uploaded successfully, or the board software is initialized successfully.

SRV Service Alarm Indicator

On (green) Service is normal, no service alarm occurs.

On (red) Critical or major alarm occurs to service.

On (yellow) Minor or remote alarm occurs to service.

Off No service is configured.




Indicator


ACT Service Activation Indicator

On (green) The board is in working mode.The board is in the active mode.

Off The board is not in working mode.The board is in the standby mode.


100ms on and 100ms offBacking up the system database in patches.

Table A-2 Indicator description of the SCC board

Indicator


STAT Board Hardware Indicator

On (green) The board works normally.

On (red) The board hardware fails.

Off The board is not powered on.

PROG Board Software Indicator

On (red) Memory check failed/loading unit software failed/the FPGA file is lost/the unit software is lost.

Blinking (red) 100ms on and 100ms off BOOTROM check failed.


100ms on and 100ms offWriting FLASH.

Blinking slowly (green)

300ms on and 300ms offBIOS booting/loading FPGA/loading unit software.

On (green) The board software or software for FPGA is uploaded successfully, or the board software is initialized successfully.

SRV Service Alarm Indicator

On (green) Service is normal, no service alarm occurs.

On (red) Critical or major alarm occurs to service.

On (yellow) Minor or remote alarm occurs to service.

Off No service is configured.

ACT Service Activation Indicator

On (green) The board is in working mode.The board is in the active mode.

Off The board is not in working mode.The board is in the standby mode.




Indicator



100ms on and 100ms offBacking up the system database in patches.

PWRA Indicator for system power supply

On (green) The –48 V power supply A is normal.

On (red) The –48 V power supply A is faulty (lost or failed).

Off No power supply inputs.

PWRB Indicator for system power supply

On (green) The –48 V power supply B is normal.

On (red) The –48 V power supply B is faulty (lost or failed).

Off No power supply inputs.

PWRC Indicator for protection power supply

On (green) The +3.3 V protection power is normal.

On (red) The +3.3 V protection power is lost.

ALMC Alarm cut indicator

On (green) Currently in permanent alarm cut-off status.

Off Give sound warning upon alarm.

A.4 Fan IndicatorThere is one indicator on the FAN to indicate the status.

The corresponding messages of Fan indicator are listed in Table A-5.

Table A-1 Indicator description of the FAN

Indicator


STAT Fan indicator

On (green) The fan is normal

On (red) The major alarm exists; two or more fans are faulty.

On (yellow) The minor alarm exists; one fan is faulty.

Off The fan is not powered on, or is absent, or the software is not loaded.




A.5 PIU IndicatorThere is one indicator on the PIU to indicate the status.


Table A-1 Indicators description of the PIU

Indicator


RUN Running status indicator

On (green) Indicates that the power is accessed normally.

Off Indicates that the power is not accessed.




B Bar Code for Boards

There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board characteristic code.

B.1 OverviewThere is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board model number. The bar code of some of such boards also include a characteristic code. The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the optical module, wavelength, and so on.

Figure B-1 and Figure B-2 shows a bar code.

Figure B-1 Description of the bar code (example 1)

2102313242 1059000003 19210PA

BOM

Deliveryinformation

Board version(TN11)

Boardname

Characteristiccode

TN1M1L4GY 01

Board modelnumber


(Y: Environmentallyfriendly)




Figure B-2 Description of the bar code (example 2)

030FBQ1073000001 -94509520

Last four numbers ofthe BOM

TN11MR4N 01


Deliveryinformation

Board name

Board version

Characteristiccode

Board modelnumber

(N: Environmentallyunfriendly)

B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUsThe characteristic code for OTUs indicates the frequency, type and wavelength of the optical modules in DWDM OTUs, DWDM wavelength-tunable OTUs and CWDM OTUs.

B.2.1 Characteristic Code for DWDM OTUsThe characteristic code for a DWDM OTU consists of digits and characters, indicating the frequency and type of the optical module in the OTU.

Detailed information of the characteristic code is listed in Table B-1.

Table B-1 Characteristic code for a DWDM OTU


The first five digit

The frequency of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module

Indicate the frequency of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module.

The sixth character

The type of the DWDM-side receiving optical module

The value can be A or P. A represents APD. P represents PIN.

The seventh character

The type of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module

The detailed meaning of the character is shown in Table B-2.

NOTEIn the case of the OTU boards with dual fed optical interfaces, such as the LDGD, LQMD, LWXD and LWX2 boards, the characteristic code consists of eight digits. The frequency values of the two channels of optical signals on the WDM side are indicated.

The types of DWDM-side transmitting optical modules are listed in Table B-2.




Table B-2 Types of DWDM-side transmitting optical modules

Character Dispersion (1550 nm) Distance Rate

A 1600ps/nm 80km 2.5G

3200ps/nm 170km 2.5G

800ps/nm 40km 10.66G

3200ps/nm 160km 2.5G

B 1500ps/nm 80km 10.66G

1600ps/nm 80km 10.66G

3200ps/nm 170km 2.5G

C 800ps/nm 40km 10.66G

12800ps/nm 640km 2.5G

6500ps/nm 320km 2.5G

D 12800ps/nm 640km 2.5G

E 6500ps/nm 320km 2.5G

G 800ps/nm 40km 10.71G

H >600ps/nm >30km 10.71G

>600ps/nm >30km 10.66G

K 800ps/nm 40km 10.66G

1800ps/nm 90km 2.66G

L 12800ps/nm 640km 2.66G

12800ps/nm 640km 2.5G

1500ps/nm 80km 10.66G

M >600ps/nm >30km 10.66G

>600ps/nm >30km 10.71G

6400ps/nm 320km 4.9-5.4G

6400ps/nm 320km 10.66G

1500ps/nm 80km 10.71G

3400ps/nm 170km 4.9-5.4G

Z 800ps/nm 40km 10.71G

U >600ps/nm >30km 10.71G




For example, the characteristic code for the TN11L4G is 19210PA. This code indicates the following features: The frequency of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module is 192.10 THz; PIN is adopted by the DWDM-side receiving optical module; the code of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module is A. For details, refer to Table B-2.

B.2.2 Characteristic Code for DWDM Wavelength-Tunable OTUs

The characteristic code for a DWDM wavelength-tunable OTU consists of characters, indicating the frequency and type of the optical module in the OTU.


Table B-1 Characteristic code for a DWDM wavelength-tunable OTU


The first character

Wavelength-tunable T is the abbreviation for Tunable, indicating that the wavelength is tunable.


The type of the DWDM-side receiving optical module


The third character

The type of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module

The detailed meaning of the character is shown in Table B-4.

The types of DWDM-side optical transmitter modules are listed in Table B-4.

Table B-2 Types of DWDM-side optical transmitter modules

Character Dispersion (1550 nm)

Distance Rate

T 1200ps/nm 60km 10.71G

12800ps/nm 640km 2.66G

12800ps/nm 640km 2.67G

3400ps/nm 170km 5.33G

-1000 to 1100ps/nm 60km 10.71G

4800ps/nm 240km 11.3G

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LSX is TAT. This code indicates the following features: This board is a wavelength-tunable OTU; APD is adopted by the DWDM-side receiving optical module; the code of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module is T. For details, refer to Table B-4.




B.2.3 Characteristic Code for CWDM OTUsThe characteristic code for a CWDM OTU consists of characters, indicating the wavelength and type of the optical module in the OTU.


Table B-1 Characteristic code for a CWDM OTU



The wavelength of the CWDM-side transmitting optical module

Indicate the wavelength of the CWDM-side transmitting optical module.

The fifth character

The type of the CWDM-side receiving optical module


The sixth character

The type of the CWDM-side transmitting optical module

The value can be L or S. L represents long haul. S represents short haul.

NOTEAs for the LWX2 board, only the information of the first wavelength is indicated.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LDGS is 1531PS. This code indicates the following features: The wavelength is 1531 nm; PIN is adopted by the CWDM-side receiving optical module; the CWDM-side transmitting optical module is used for short-haul transmission (80 km).

B.3 Characteristic Code for Line UnitThe characteristic code for line unit indicates the frequency, type and wavelength of the DWDM optical modules and DWDM wavelength-tunable optical modules.

The line unit shares the same feature code with the WDM-side DWDM optical module of the wavelength tunable unit. For details, refer to B.2.1 Characteristic Code for DWDM OTUs and B.2.2 Characteristic Code for DWDM Wavelength-Tunable OTUs.

B.4 Characteristic Code for FOADMsThe characteristic code for FOADMs indicates the wavelength or frequency of the optical signals processed by the board.

B.4.1 Characteristic Code for the CMR2The characteristic code for the CMR2 consists of eight digits, indicating the two wavelengths that bear the signals processed by the board.

The detailed information of the characteristic code is given in Table B-1.




Table B-1 Characteristic code for the CMR2




Indicate the first wavelength that bears the optical signals processed by the board.



Indicate the second wavelength that bears the optical signals processed by the board.


"1471" indicates that the first wavelength is 1471 nm. "1571" indicates that the second wavelength is 1571 nm.

B.4.2 Characteristic Code for the CMR4The characteristic code for the CMR4 consists of eight digits, indicating the four wavelengths that bear the signals processed by the board.


Table B-1 Characteristic code for the CMR4


The first and the second digits


Indicate the middle two digits of the first wavelength that bears the optical signals processed by the board.

The third and the fourth digits


Indicate the middle two digits of the second wavelength that bears the optical signals processed by the board.


The third wavelength that bears optical signals

Indicate the middle two digits of the third wavelength that bears the optical signals processed by the board.


The fourth wavelength that bears optical signals

Indicate the middle two digits of the fourth wavelength that bears the optical signals processed by the board.


"47" indicates that the first wavelength is 1471 nm. "49" indicates that the second wavelength is 1491 nm. "59" indicates that the third wavelength is 1591 nm. "61" indicates that the fourth wavelength is 1611 nm.

B.4.3 Characteristic Code for the MR2The characteristic code for the MR2 consists of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the two signals processed by the board.





Table B-1 Characteristic code for the MR2




Indicate the last four digits of the frequency that bears the first optical signal.


The frequency of the second optical signal

Indicate the last four digits of the frequency that bears the second optical signal.


"9360" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 193.60 THz. "9370" indicates that the frequency of the second optical signal is 193.70 THz.

B.4.4 Characteristic Code for of MR4The characteristic code for the MR4 consists of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the first and the fourth signals processed by the board.





The frequency of first optical signal




Indicate the last four digits of the frequency that bears the fourth optical signal processed by the board.


"9210" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 192.10 THz. "9240" indicates that the frequency of the fourth optical signal is 192.40 THz.

Since the four optical signals processed by the MR4 are in sequence, it is inferred that:

The frequency of the second optical signal is 192.20 THz. The frequency of the third optical signal is 192.30 THz.

B.4.5 Characteristic Code for the MR8The characteristic code for the MR8 consists of eight digits that indicate the frequencies of the first and the eighth signals processed by the board.











The frequency of the eighth optical signal

Indicate the last four digits of the frequency that bears the eighth optical signal processed by the board.


"9210" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 192.10 THz. "9280" indicates that the frequency of the eighth optical signal is 192.80 THz.

Since the eight optical signals processed by the MR8 are in sequence, it is inferred that:

The frequency of the second optical signal is 192.20 THz. The frequency of the third optical signal is 192.30 THz. Inferred from it, the frequency of the seventh signal is 192.70 THz.

B.5 Characteristic Code for MCAsThe characteristic code for MCAs indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board.

B.5.1 Characteristic Code for the MCA4The characteristic code for the MCA4 consists of one character, indicating the band of the optical signals processed by the board.


Table B-1 Characteristic code for the MCA4

Code Meaning

Description

The first character

Band Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band. The value L represents L band.


B.5.2 Characteristic Code for the MCA8The characteristic code for the MCA8 consists of one character, indicating the band of the optical signals processed by the board.





Table B-1 Characteristic code for the MCA8

Code Meaning

Description

The first character

Band Indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board. The value C represents C band.The value L represents L band.


B.6 Characteristic Code for OAUsThe characteristic code for OAUs indicates the gain, gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the optical signals processed by the board.

B.6.1 Characteristic Code for the OAU1The characteristic code for the OAU1 consists of eight characters and digits, indicating the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board.


Table B-1 Characteristic code for the OAU1



The second to the fifth digits

Gain range Indicate the range within which the gain can be continuously adjusted.

The sixth character – The sixth character is always I.




For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OAU1 is G2031I0. This code indicates that the gain can be continuously adjusted from 20 dB to 31 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is 0 dBm.

B.6.2 Characteristic Code for the OBU1The characteristic code for the OBU1 consists of six characters and digits, indicating the gain and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board.





Table B-1 Characteristic code for the OBU1





The fourth character – The fourth character is always I.




For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU1 is G23I-3. This code indicates that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is -3 dBm.

B.6.3 Characteristic Code for of CRPCThe characteristic code for the CRPC consists of one character and two digits, indicating the gain of the optical signals processed by the board.


Table B-1 Characteristic code for the CRPC


The first character – This character is always G.

The two digits Gain Indicate the gain value.

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CRPC is G10, indicating 10 dB gain.

B.7 Characteristic Code for Optical MUX/DMUX UnitsThe characteristic code for optical MUX/DMUX units indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the board, whether the wavelengths that bear the signals are odd or even wavelengths, and the multiplexing solution adopted by the board.

B.7.1 Characteristic Code for the D40The characteristic code for the D40 consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even wavelengths.





Table B-1 Characteristic code for the D40


The first character





For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40 is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.

NOTEThe OptiX OSN 6800 products now support only even wavelengths in C band.

B.7.2 Characteristic Code for the D40VThe characteristic code for the D40V consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even wavelengths.


Table B-1 Characteristic code for the D40V


The first character





For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40V is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.

B.7.3 Characteristic Code for the FIUThe characteristic code for the FIU consists of one character, indicating the band adopted by the board.


Table B-1 Characteristic code for the FIU

Code Meaning

Description

The first character





For example, the characteristic code for the TN11FIU is C, indicating that the optical signals are in C band.

B.7.4 Characteristic Code for the M40The characteristic code for the M40 consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even wavelengths.


Table B-1 Characteristic code for the M40


The first character





For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40 is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.

B.7.5 Characteristic Code for the M40VThe characteristic code for the M40V consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other indicates whether the wavelengths that bear the optical signals processed by the board are odd or even wavelengths.


Table B-1 Characteristic code for the M40V


The first character





For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40V is CE, indicating C band and even wavelengths.

B.8 Characteristic Code for VOAsThe characteristic code for VOAs indicates the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board.




B.8.1 Characteristic Code for the VA1The characteristic code for the VA1 consists of three digits, indicating the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board.


Table B-1 Characteristic code for the VA1




B.8.2 Characteristic Code for the VA4The characteristic code for the VA4 consists of three digits, indicating the maximum attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board.


Table B-1 Characteristic code for the VA4







C Parameter Description

C.1 Optical Transponder Units (OTUs), Tributary Units and Line UnitsC.1.1 Path Use StatusItem Description

Parameter description

Used to set the path use status.

Parameter values Used, Unused

Parameter value description

Default value: Used

Recommended value

Used

Application scenarios

In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages

Impact on the system

When the Path Use Status of an optical interface is set to Unused, service alarms at this interface are suppressed, which disables the automatic laser turn on function.

Relevant boards OTUs: L4G, LDGS, LDGD, LOG, LOM, ECOM, TMX, LSXL, LSXLR, LQMS, LQMD, LSX, LSXR, LWXS, LWXD, LWX2Tributary units: TDX, TQM, TDG, TQS TSXLLine unit: NS2

Configuration requirements

When the channel is not required, its Path Use Status can be set to Unused. In this case, a command should be issued to shut down the laser of this path; otherwise, an alarm indicates that the laser is forcibly turned on is reported.




C.1.2 Optical Interface LoopbackItem Description


Used to set the loopback mode of the current optical interface.

Parameter values Non-Loopback, Outloop, Inloop


Default value: Non-Loopback Non-Loopback: indicates that the equipment is in normal state. Optical interface loopback is not required when the equipment normally operates.Inloop: indicates a mode that signals to be output from the output interface of the local-end equipment are looped back to the signal input interface of this equipment. Inloop is used to test the signal processing on the board.Outloop: indicates a mode that unprocessed signals accessed to the local-end equipment are directly looped back to the corresponding output interface without the signal structure changed. Outloop is used to test connections between fiber lines and connectors.

Recommended value

Non-Loopback


In commissioning and maintenance stages


When the loopback mode is set to Inloop or Outloop, services are interrupted.

Relevant boards OTUs: L4G, LDGS, LDGD, LOG, LOM, ECOM, TMX, LSXL, LQMS, LQMD, LSX, LSXR, LWXS, LWXD, LWX2Tributary units: TDX, TQM, TDG, TQS TSXLLine unit: NS2


None




C.1.3 Service TypeItem Description

Parameter description Used to set the type of services at a client-side optical interface.

Parameter values LQMS, LQMD: GE, FE, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, FC-100, FC-200, FICON, FICON 2G, DVB-ASI, ESCONLSX: 10GE WAN, 10GE LAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU-2LWXS, LWXD, LWX2: GE, FE, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, FC-100, FC-200, FICON, FICON 2G, DVB-ASI, DVB-SDI, ESCONLSXL: STM-256, OC-768LOM: GE, FC100, FC200, FC400, FICON, FICON 2GTMX: STM-16, OC-48, OUT1TDX: 10GELAN, STM-64, OC-192TQM: GE, FE, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, FC-100, FC-200, FICON, FICON 2G, DVB-ASI, ESCONTQS: OTU1, OC-48, STM-16

Parameter value description (default value)

LQMS, LQMD: STM-4LSX: 10GE LANLWXS, LWXD, LWX2: anyTQM: STM-4TQS: OTU-1

Recommended value None

Application scenarios In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages

Impact on the system None

Relevant boards OTUs: LQMS, LQMD, LSX, LWXS, LWXD, LWX2, LOM, TMX, LSXLTributary units: TDX, TQM, TQS, TSXL


The type of actually accessed services must be the same as the type of configured services. Otherwise, the services are not available. If the LQMS, LQMD or TQM board is configured with electrical-layer cross-connections, the type of services in the corresponding channels cannot be changed.




C.1.4 Client Service Bearer Rate (M)Item Description

Parameter description Used to set the bearer rate of client-side services.

Parameter value range (M) 16.0–2500.0

Parameter value description The bearer rate of client-side services can be set only when the client-side services are of Any type. The set value should equal to the maximum rate of actually accessed services.



Impact on the system A SPEED_OVER alarm is reported when the rate of actually accessed services exceeds the set value.

Relevant boards LWXS, LWXD, LWX2

Configuration requirements (the set value of bearer rate should be the same as the rate of actually accessed services)

Actually accessed services

Set value Actually accessed services

Set value

STM1 155.5 GE 1250

STM4 622 FE 125

STM16 2488.3 FC100 1062

OC3 155.5 FC200 2124

OC12 622 FICON 1062

OC48 2488.3 FICON 2G 2124

HDTV 1485 ESCON 270

DVB-SDI 270 FDDI 125

DVB-ASI 270

C.1.5 Port MappingItem Description


Used to set and query the port mapping.

Parameter values Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G), Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7G)


Default value: MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G)

Recommended value

None




Item Description


In configuration, commissioning and maintenance stages


None

Relevant boards LSX


Services other than 10GE LAN do not require configuring the port mapping. The port mapping of 10GE LAN services can be configured as Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G) or Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7G).Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1G) and Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7G) meet customers' demand for transparent bit transport of 10GE LAN signals.Bit transparently mapped (11.1G) services provide an FEC/AFEC coding gain value equivalent to that of 10G SDH services. Bit transparently mapped (10.7G) services occupy some AFEC areas and thus provide a weaker AFEC coding gain.MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G) meets customers' demand for transparently transporting 10GE MAC frames only. MAC transparently mapped (10.7G) services have the standard OTU2 frame structure and supports the FEC/AFEC code which is the same as that of 10G bit/s SDH services.

C.1.6 Laser StatusItem Description

Parameter description Used to set the laser Open/Close status.

Parameter values Open, Close Default value: Open


Open: The laser is turned on to start transmitting services. Close: The laser is turned off to stop service transmitting.

Recommended value Open


Impact on the system When the laser is set to Close, services are interrupted.

Relevant boards OTUs: L4G, LDGS, LDGD, LOG, LOM, ECOM, TMX, LSXL, LSXLR, LQMS, LQMD, LSX, LSXR, LWXS, LWXD, LWX2Tributary units: TBE, TDX, TQM, TDG, TQS TSXLLine unit: NS2


When an optical interface is unused or is not connected to a fiber, the laser at this interface should be set to Open.




C.1.7 Automatic Laser ShutdownItem Description


Used to set whether to enable automatic laser shutdown (ALS) of the downstream laser of the local board in the case of loss of received signals. If ALS is enabled, when the received signals are lost, the laser is automatically shut down and stops transmitting signals. ALS prolongs the service life of a laser and avoids injury of laser to human.

Parameter values Enabled, Disabled


ALS of optical interfaces on OTU client sides and tributary units is set to Enabled by default; that on OTU WDM sides and line units is set to Disabled by default.

Recommended value

ALS of optical interfaces on OTU client sides and tributary units is set to Enabled; that on OTU WDM sides and line units is set to Disabled.


In configuration and maintenance stages


None

Relevant boards OTUs: L4G, LDGS, LDGD, LOG, LOM, TMX, LSXL, LSXLR, LQMS, LQMD, LSX, LSXR, LWXS, LWXD, LWX2Tributary units: TBE, TDX, TQM, TDG, TQS TSXLLine unit: NS2


If a WDM-side optical interface does not use ESC as the network management communication channel or even is not connected to a fiber, ALS on the WDM side can be set to Enabled to prolong the service life of the laser at the interface.

C.1.8 Current Bearer Rate (M)Item Description

Parameter description Used to query the current bearer rate of client-side services.

Parameter values Queriable only

Parameter value description None




Relevant boards LWXS, LWXD, LWX2

Configuration requirements None




C.1.9 Service ModeItem Description

Parameter description Used to set the mode of line-side services.

Parameter values OTN, SDH


Default mode: OTN

Recommended value OTN



Relevant boards L4G, LDGS, LDGD


The mode of line-side services of boards on an NE at the local end should be the same as that at the opposite end. When a local-end board need be connected to an SDH service board of another product, the mode of line-side services should be set to SDH.

C.1.10 FEC Working StateItem Description

Parameter description Used to set and query the FEC working state.



Default value: Enabled

Recommended value Enabled

Application scenarios In configuration and commissioning stages

Impact on the system Enabling the FEC working state lowers the requirement of optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR) at the receive end and stretches the distance between an optical amplifying station and a regenerating station.

Relevant boards OTUs: L4G, LDGS, LDGD, LOG, LOM, TMX, LQMS, LQMD, LSX, LSXL, LSXLR, LSXRTributary unit: TQS Line unit: NS2


During configuration, the FEC working states of two corresponding optical interfaces at the two ends of the transport line should be the same. Otherwise, the setting of FEC working states fails.FEC is enabled in most cases unless in scenarios where the requirement of transport delay is extremely high.




C.1.11 FEC TypeItem Description

Parameter description Used to select the FEC type.

Parameter values FEC, AFEC


Default value: FEC

Recommended value AFEC



Relevant boards OTU: LSXL, LOG, LOM, TMX, LSXLine unit: NS2


Relationships between service type, port mapping and FEC type: When the service type is 10GE LAN, if the port mapping is without flow

control, the FEC type can be AFEC only; if the port mapping is in other modes, the FEC type is not limited.

FEC types of services other than 10GE LAN are not limited.During configuration, the FEC types of two corresponding optical interfaces at the two ends of the transport line should be the same.

C.1.12 PAUSE Frame Flow ControlItem Description

Parameter description Used to select whether to enable flow control.







Relevant boards TN11LSX, TDX


This parameter can be configured only when the service type is 10GE LAN.




C.1.13 Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)Item Description

Parameter description Used to configure the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.

Parameter values C-band wavelength spacing: 100G (192.100–196.00 THz) CWDM-band wavelength spacing: 20 nm (1271–1611 nm)

Recommended value The operating wavelength of a fixed-wavelength OTU should be set to the actual wavelength of the OTU. The operating wavelength of a tunable-wavelength OTU should be set upon the network wavelength planning.

Application scenarios In configuration stage

Impact on the system The same wavelength should be used for a service in the receive and the transmit directions.

If a service travels through multiple regenerating stations, it is recommended that these regenerating sections use the same wavelength.

It is recommended that the active and standby channels use the same wavelength when the inter-board channel protection or client-side path protection is adopted.

Relevant boards OTU: LOG, LOM, ECOM, TMX, L4G, LDGS, LDGD, LQMS, LQMD, LSX, LSXL, LSXLR, LSXR, LWXS, LWXD, LWX2Line unit: NS2Tributary units: TBE, TDX, TDG, TSXL


The configured logic wavelength must be the same as the actual physical wavelength. Otherwise, a CFGDATA_OUTRANGE alarm is reported.As for tunable optical modules, issuing the captioned command directly changes their physical wavelengths (but does not change the band). As for non-tunable optical modules, issuing this command changes their logic wavelengths only.




C.1.14 Configure Band TypeItem Description

Parameter description Used to configure the band type.

Parameter values C, CWDM


None




Relevant boards OTU: LOG, LOM, ECOM, TMX, L4G, LDGS, LDGD, LQMS, LQMD, LSX, LSXL, LSXLR, LSXR, LWXS, LWXD, LWX2Line unit: NS2Tributary units: TBE, TDX, TDG, TSXL


The configured logic band must be the same as the actual physical band. Otherwise, a CFGDATA_OUTRANGE alarm is reported.

C.1.15 Maximum Packet LengthItem Description

Parameter description Used to configure the maximum packet length of data services.

Parameter value range (byte)

1518–9600


Value range: 1518–9600 Default value: 1518

Recommended value 1518



Relevant boards OTU: LDGS, LDGD, LOG, LOM, LQMS, LQMDTributary units: TDX, TDG, TQM


The maximum packet length can be set when the service type is GE or FE. If a customer requires extra long packets, set the maximum packet length according to the requirement.




C.1.16 Ethernet Working ModeItem Description

Parameter description Used to query and set the Ethernet working mode.

Parameter values Auto-Negotiation, 1000M Full-Duplex


Default value: Auto-Negotiation

Recommended value Auto-Negotiation



Relevant boards OTUs: LDGS, LOG, LOM, LDGD, LQMS, LQMDTributary units: TDG, TQM


The Ethernet working mode of the local station should be the same as that of the upstream. If the two ports protect each other, these two active and standby ports must be set to be in the same Ethernet working mode. The LQMS and LQMD boards support the Ethernet working mode setting only when the service type is GE.

C.1.17 LPT EnabledItem Description

Parameter description Used to query and set the Enabled/Disabled state of link state pass through (LPT).



None

Recommended value Disabled



Relevant boards OTUs: L4G, LDGS, LDGD, LQMS, LQMD, LSXTributary units: TBE, TDX, TQM, TDG


LPT is valid for only data services. When the router has redundant protection paths, LPT of the access ports of the corresponding routers should be set to Enabled.




C.1.18 Path LoopbackItem Description

Parameter description Used to query and set the path loopback.

Parameter values Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop


Non-Loopback: indicates the normal state. Path loopback is not required when the equipment normally operates.Inloop: indicates a mode that signals to be output from the output path of the local-end equipment are looped back to the signal input path of this equipment. Inloop is used to test the signal processing on the board.Outloop: indicates a mode that unprocessed signals accessed to the local-end equipment is directly looped back to the corresponding output path without the signal structure changed. Outloop is used to test connections between fiber lines and connectors.

Recommended value Non-Loopback

Application scenarios In commissioning and maintenance stages

Impact on the system Path loopback interrupts services.

Relevant boards NS2


The path loopback should be configured upon the commissioning purpose.

C.1.19 SD Trigger ConditionItem Description

Parameter description Used to configure the trigger condition to perform SD switching on the board.

Parameter values B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_DEG, None


B1_SD: Regeneration section (B1) signal degradeOTUk_DEG: OTUk signal degradeODUk_PM_DEG: ODUk_PM signal degradeNone: No condition is configured for SD switching.

Recommended value Set the value to None.


Impact on the system When the B1_SD, OTUk_DEG or ODUk_PM_DEG alarm occurs, the protection group might be triggered to perform protection switching.

Relevant boards TDG, TQM


Set the value to B1_SD, OTUk_DEG or ODUk_PM_DEG if the protection mechanism needs such a trigger condition.




C.1.20 FC Distance ExtensionItem Description

Parameter description To enable or disable the function for extending the transmission distance for the FC services.

Parameter values enable, disable


enable: To enable the function for extending the transmission distance for the FC services.disable: To disable the function for extending the transmission distance of FC services.

Recommended value disable

Application scenarios In commissioning and maintenance stage

Impact on the system Extends the transmission distance for the FC services.

Relevant boards LOM


When the board accesses FC100/FC200/FC400 services, this parameter must be enabled.

C.2 Optical Multiplexing Units (MUXs) and Optical Demultiplexing Units (DMUXs) C.2.1 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)Item Description

Parameter description Used to adjust the attenuation of optical power in the corresponding channels to equalize the optical power of each wavelength.

Parameter value range (dB)

0.0–15.0


Value range: varies with boards. The value range of optical interface attenuation ratio of a board can be obtained by querying the Maximum Attenuation Ratio and Minimum Attenuation Ratio of the board.Default value: 15 dB (maximum attenuation ratio of the board)

Recommended value Configured upon the engineering optical power planning.


Impact on the system Influences the downstream optical power.

Relevant boards M40V, D40V




Item Description


The attenuation adjustment amplitude should not be too large. It should be controlled within ±2 dB compared with the original attenuation every time the attenuation is adjusted in a new project. In an expansion project or maintenance, the attenuation adjustment amplitude should be controlled within ±1 dB.

C.2.2 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) Item Description

Parameter description Indicates the lower threshold of input optical power loss (an MUT_LOS alarm is reported).



The default value varies with boards.




Relevant boards D40, D40V, FIU


None

C.2.3 Configure BandItem Description

Parameter description Used to configure type of the working band of a board.

Parameter values C


Supports only C band.




Relevant boards FIU, M40, M40V, D40, D40V, ITL


None




C.2.4 Configure Working Band ParityItem Description

Parameter description Selects the desired parity of the working band.

Parameter values All, Even, Odd


All: All 192.10 THz to 196.05 THz odd and even wavelengths at 50 GHz channel spacing in C band. There are 80 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for the FIU and ITL boards.Even: All 192.10 THz to 196.00 THz even wavelengths at 100 GHz channel spacing. There are 40 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for the M40, M40V, D40 and D40V boards.Odd: All 192.15 THz to 196.05 THz odd wavelengths at 100 GHz channel spacing. There are 40 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for the M40, M40V, D40 and D40V boards.

Recommended value Corresponding wavelengths are used according to different requirements.





When configuring the parity of wavelengths on the T2000, make sure that the parity configured is consistent with that of the atual working wavelengths.

C.2.5 Actual BandItem Description

Parameter description Used to query the actual working band of the board.



None









C.2.6 Actual Working Band ParityItem Description

Parameter description Used to query the parity of the actual working band of the board.



None






None

C.3 Optical Add/Drop Multiplexing Units (OADMs)C.3.1 Configure Wavelength No./Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)Item Description

Parameter description Used to configure the operating wavelength at the WDM-side optical interface of a board.

Parameter values C-band wavelength spacing: 100G (192.100–196.00 THz) CWDM-band wavelength spacing: 20 nm (1271–1611 nm)


MR2, MR4, MR8, MB2: values of C-even 40 wavelengths CMR2, CMR4, DMR1: CWDM-band values




Relevant boards MR2, MR4, MR8, MB2, CMR2, CMR4, DMR1


The configured logic wavelength must be the same as the actual physical wavelength. Otherwise, a CFGDATA_OUTRANGE alarm is reported.The same wavelength cannot be configured at different optical interfaces of the same board.




C.3.2 Configure Band TypeItem Description

Parameter description Used to configure the band type.

Parameter values C


Supports only C band.

Recommended value The default value varies with boards. Refer to the value obtained on site through the T2000.



Relevant boards MR2, MR4, MR8, CMR2, CMR4, MB2, DMR1, SBM2


None

C.4 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit (ROADMs)C.4.1 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) Item Description




The default value varies with boards and subjects to the on-site queried result.




Relevant boards ROAM, WSD9, RMU9


None




C.4.2 Wavelength Target Power (dBm)Item Description

Parameter description Applies to the ROAM board only and is used to set the single-wavelength target output optical power after add wavelengths are multiplexed.


–32.0 to 8.0


None

Recommended value Standard single-wavelength input optical power at the IN interface of an optical amplifying unit connected to the OUT interface of an ROAM board.



Relevant boards ROAM


The configuration of target output optical power takes effect only when optical cross-connections are configured in the corresponding channels.

C.4.3 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)Item Description

Parameter description Used to adjust the attenuation of optical power in the corresponding channels to equalize the optical power of each wavelength.


WSM9: 0–20WSD9: 0–20RMU9: 0–15


Value range: varies with boards. The value range of optical interface attenuation ratio of a board can be obtained by querying the Maximum Attenuation Ratio and Minimum Attenuation Ratio of the board.Default value: maximum attenuation ratio of the board

Recommended value Configured upon the engineering optical power planning.



Relevant boards WSM9, WSD9, RMU9


The attenuation adjustment amplitude should not be too large. It should be controlled within ±2 dB compared with the original attenuation every time the attenuation is adjusted in a new project. In an expansion project or maintenance, the attenuation adjustment amplitude should be controlled within ±1 dB.




C.4.4 Maximum Attenuation Ratio (dB)Item Description

Parameter description Indicates the maximum optical power attenuation ratio of a board.


Parameter value description Value type: integers


Application scenarios In maintenance stage




C.4.5 Minimum Attenuation Ratio (dB)Item Description

Parameter description Indicates the minimum optical power attenuation ratio of a board.


Parameter value description Value type: integers








Parameter values C

Parameter value description Supports only C band.







Item Description

Relevant boards RMU9, ROAM, WSD9, WSM9, WSMD4






All: All 192.10 THz to 196.05 THz odd and even wavelengths at 50 GHz channel spacing in C band. There are 80 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for the RMU9, TN13WSD9, TN13WSM9 board.Even: All 192.10 THz to 196.00 THz even wavelengths at 100 GHz channel spacing. There are 40 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for the ROAM, WSMD4, TN12WSD9, TN12WSM9, TN11WSD9, TN11WSM9 boards.Odd: All 192.15 THz to 196.05 THz odd wavelengths at 100 GHz channel spacing. There are 40 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for the ROAM, WSMD4, TN12WSD9, TN12WSM9, TN11WSD9, TN11WSM9 boards.


















Item Description











C.5 Optical Amplifier UnitsC.5.1 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) Item Description



Parameter value description The default value varies with boards and subjects to the on-site queried result.




Relevant boards OAU1, OBU1, OBU2, HBA






Parameter description Used to set the laser Enabled/Disabled status.

Parameter values Enabled, Disabled .Default value of the OAU1/OBU1: Enabled.Default value of the CRPC: Disabled

Parameter value description Enabled: The laser is turned on to start transmitting services. Disabled: The laser is turned off to stop service transmitting.



Impact on the system When the laser is set to Disabled, services are interrupted.

Relevant boards OAU1, OBU1, CRPC, OBU2, HBA

Configuration requirements When services are normal, the laser of the optical amplifying unit should be set to Enabled.

C.5.3 Gain (dB)Item Description

Parameter description Used to query the optical power gain of the current optical amplifying unit.



None






Normally, the queried result should range from the nominal gain minus 2.5 dB to the nominal gain plus 2.5 dB.




C.5.4 Nominal Gain (dB)Item Description

Parameter description Used to set and query the gain at optical interfaces to optimize the flatness of optical channels.


OAU1: 17.5–31.5OBU101: 17.7–22.7OBU102: 20.7–25.7


Value range: varies with boards. The nominal gain value range of a board can be obtained by querying the Nominal Gain Upper Threshold and Nominal Gain Lower Threshold of the board. Default value: OAU1: 20 dBOBU101: 20 dBOBU102: 23 dB

Recommended value OAU1: 20 dBOBU101: 20 dBOBU102: 23 dB


Impact on the system Gain values influence the performance of downstream services.



The nominal gain should be correctly set upon the network optical power budget. The OBU1 does not require the nominal gain setting and adopts the recommended value.

C.5.5 Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB)Item Description

Parameter description Used to query the nominal gain upper threshold.











C.5.6 Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB)Item Description

Parameter description Used to query the nominal gain lower threshold.








C.5.7 Rated Optical Power (dBm)Item Description


Used to set and query the single-wavelength rated optical power as the reference value for automatic optical power adjustment. When the optical amplifying unit and ROADM are used for networking, this parameter is set in the optical amplifying unit.

Parameter value range (dBm)

–30.0 to 30.0


Default value at the input optical interface: –19 dBm.Default value at the output optical interface: 4 dBm.

Recommended value OAU1: input interface: –16 dBm; output interface: 4 dBm OBU101: input interface: –20 dBm; output interface: 0 dBm OBU102: input interface: –19 dBm; output interface: 4 dBm



None



The rated input and output optical power should be configured by referring to the actual configurable input and output range of the optical amplifying unit and should be the same as the input and output values measured when the optical amplifying unit normally operates.




C.5.8 Board Work TypeItem Description

Parameter description Used to query and set the board work type.

Parameter values C, C+L, L


Recommended value C



Relevant boards CRPC




Parameter values C





Relevant boards CRPC, OAU1, OBU1, OBU2, HBA









All: All 192.10 THz to 196.05 THz odd and even wavelengths at 50 GHz channel spacing in C band. There are 80 wavelengths in total.It is applicable for the CRPC, OAU1, OBU1, OBU2, HBA boards.Even: All 192.10 THz to 196.00 THz even wavelengths at 100 GHz channel spacing. There are 40 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for the CRPC board.Odd: All 192.15 THz to 196.05 THz odd wavelengths at 100 GHz channel spacing. There are 40 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for the CRPC board.




























C.6 Optical Supervisory Channel Units (OSCs)C.6.1 Optical Interface LoopbackItem Description

Parameter description Used to set the loopback mode of the current optical interface.

Parameter values Non-Loopback, Outloop, Inloop


Default value: Non-Loopback Non-Loopback: indicates the normal state. Path loopback is not required when the equipment normally operates.Inloop: indicates a mode that signals to be output from the output interface of the local-end equipment are looped back to the signal input interface of this equipment. Inloop is used to test the signal processing on the board.Outloop: indicates a mode that unprocessed signals accessed to the local-end equipment are directly looped back to the corresponding output interface without the signal structure changed. Outloop is used to test connections between fiber lines and connectors.

Recommended value Non-Loopback


Impact on the system When the loopback mode is set to Inloop or Outloop, services in the supervisory channel are interrupted.

Relevant boards SC1, SC2


None





Parameter description Used to set the laser Enabled/Disabled status.

Parameter values Enabled, Disabled Default value: Enabled

Parameter value description Enabled: The laser at an optical interface is turned on. Disabled: The laser at an optical interface is turned off.




Relevant boards SC1, SC2


C.7 Optical Protection UnitsC.7.1 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) Item Description


Parameter value range (dBm)

–35.0 to 10.0


Default value: –35.0

Recommended value –35.0


Impact on the system This parameter directly influences the SF switching condition of OLP protection, OTU+OLP/DCP intra-board 1+1 protection and client-side 1+1 protection with the OLP/DCP board. The larger the parameter value is, the more likely the SF switching occurs.

Relevant boards DCP, OLP


Normally, the threshold should be set to the recommended value. The actual network situation and fiber aging, however, should be considered during the parameter configuration to avoid mis-switching.




C.7.2 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)Item Description

Parameter description Indicates the initial variance value between primary and secondary input power. Initial variance value = initial input power at the primary optical interface – initial input power at the secondary optical interface


–10.0 to 10.0


Default value: 0.0

Recommended value 0.0


Impact on the system This parameter serves as the SD switching threshold reference value for OLP protection, OTU+OLP/DCP intra-board 1+1 protection and OLP/DCP client-side 1+1 protection with the OLP/DCP board. Variance between primary and secondary input power = input power at the primary optical interface – input power at the secondary optical interface – initial variance During SD switching judgement, if the absolute value of variance between primary and secondary input power reaches the SD switching threshold, SD switching is actuated.



The parameter should be set upon the actual variance between primary and secondary input power.

C.7.3 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)Item Description

Parameter description Used to set the variance threshold between primary and secondary input power at which signals degrade (SD).


3.0–8.0


Default value: 5.0

Recommended value 5.0





Item Description

Impact on the system This parameter serves as the SD switching threshold reference value for OLP protection, OTU+OLP/DCP intra-board 1+1 protection and OLP/DCP client-side 1+1 protection with the OLP/DCP board.Variance between primary and secondary input power = input power at the primary optical interface – input power at the secondary optical interface – initial varianceDuring SD switching judgement, if the absolute value of variance between primary and secondary input power reaches the SD switching threshold, SD switching is actuated.



Generally, the threshold is set to the recommended value. In special cases, the threshold can be adjusted upon the actual on-site situation. When the variance between primary and secondary input power reaches 5 dB, if services in channels with lower optical power are still normal, the threshold can be properly elevated. When the variance between primary and secondary input power is far from reaching 5 dB while services degrade, the threshold should be properly lowered.

C.8 Spectrum Analyzer UnitsC.8.1 Optical MonitoringItem Description

Parameter description Used to set the optical interface monitoring state.






Impact on the system When the monitoring of an optical interface is set to Disabled, the MCA board does not analyze the wavelength at this interface.

Relevant boards MCA4, MCA8


The monitoring state of optical interfaces that require monitoring should be set to Enabled.




C.8.2 Monitor Interval (min)Item Description

Parameter description Used to set the supervisory channel of the current board for analyzing the channel status monitor interval.

Parameter value range (min)

5–49995

Parameter value description Default value: 10

Recommended value 10




Configuration requirements The default value is recommended.

C.8.3 Wavelength Monitor StatusItem Description

Parameter description Used to set whether to monitor the current wavelength.

Parameter values Monitor, No Monitor

Parameter value description Default value: No Monitor

Recommended value It is recommended to set the monitor status of wavelengths that bear services to Monitor.




Configuration requirements The monitor status of wavelengths that bear services should be set to Monitor.






Parameter values C











All: All 192.10 THz to 196.05 THz odd and even wavelengths at 50 GHz channel spacing in C band. There are 80 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for the MCA4 and MCA8 board.Even: All 192.10 THz to 196.00 THz even wavelengths at 100 GHz channel spacing. There are 40 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for the MCA4 and MCA8 board.Odd: All 192.15 THz to 196.05 THz odd wavelengths at 100 GHz channel spacing. There are 40 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for the MCA4 and MCA8 board.































C.9 Variable Optical Attenuator Units (VOAs)C.9.1 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)Item Description

Parameter description Used to adjust the attenuation of optical power in the corresponding channels to meet the requirement of optical power test.


Varies with the environment or optical components and subjects to the on-site query result.


Value range: varies with boards. The value range of optical interface attenuation ratio of a board can be obtained by querying the Maximum Attenuation Ratio and Minimum Attenuation Ratio of the board.Default value: maximum attenuation ratio of the board (21.5 dB)

Recommended value Configured upon the requirement of optical power test.



Relevant boards VA1, VA4


The attenuation adjustment amplitude should not be too large. It should be controlled within ±2 dB compared with the original attenuation every time the attenuation is adjusted in a new project. In an expansion project or maintenance action, the attenuation adjustment amplitude should be controlled within ±1 dB.

C.9.2 Maximum Attenuation Ratio (dB)Item Description

Parameter description Indicates the maximum optical power attenuation ratio of a board.











C.9.3 Minimum Attenuation Ratio (dB)Item Description

Parameter description Indicates the minimum optical power attenuation ratio of a board.








C.9.4 Path Use StatusItem Description

Parameter description Used to set the path use status.

Parameter values Used, Unused


Value type: enumeration Default value: UsedUsed: indicates that the port is in use.Unused: indicates that the port is not in use.

Recommended value Used


Impact on the system If the port is set to Unused, alarms generated at this port are suppressed.



If a port has services, its use status must be set to Used.If the port has no services, its use status should be set to Unused to suppress alarms, generated by the port, of no concerns.






Parameter values C









Parameter values All


All: All 192.10 THz to 196.05 THz odd and even wavelengths at 50 GHz channel spacing in C band. There are 80 wavelengths in total. It is applicable for the VA1 and VA4 board.































C.9.9 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)Item Description




The default value varies with boards. Refer to the value obtained on site through the T2000.






None




D Quick Reference Table of the Units

Quick reference tables include those for specifications of optical transponder units, optical amplifier units and other boards, and also the functions of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards.

D.1 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification

The main specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs), tributary boards and line boards include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module type.

D.1.1 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification on the Client Side

The main client-side specifications of the optical transponder unit (OTU) include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module type.

Table D-1 Quick reference table for client-side specifications of OTU boards

Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module Optical Module Type

Optical Interface Type Supported

Mean Launched Optical Power

Receiver Sensitivity (dBm)

Minimum Overload Point (dBm)

Maximum (dBm)

Minimum (dBm)

ECOM

FE 100 BASE-FX-1310 nm-40km

0 –5 –30 –10 eSFP

100 BASE-FX-1310 nm-2km

–14 –19 –30 –14

1.25 Gbit/s multirate

5 0 –19 –3 eSFP CWDM




Board Name

Access Service Type






Maximum (dBm)

Minimum (dBm)


5 0 –28 –9

L4G GE 2.125 Gbit/s multirate

–2.5 –9.5 –17 0 eSFP

1000 BASE-LX-10 km

–3 –11.5 –19 –3

1000 BASE-LX-40 km

3 –2 –21 –3

1000 BASE-ZX-80 km

5 –2 –21 –3

1.25 Gbit/s multirate-40 km


1.25 Gbit/s multirate(eSFP CWDM)-80 km

5 0 –28 –9

LDGD GE 2.125 Gbit/s multirate

–2.5 –9.5 –17 0 eSFP

1000 BASE-LX-10 km

–3 –11.5 –19 –3

1000 BASE-LX-40 km

3 –2 –21 –3

1000 BASE-ZX-80 km

5 –2 –21 –3




5 0 –28 –9

LDGS GE 2.125 Gbit/s multirate

–2.5 –9.5 –17 0 eSFP

1000 BASE-LX-10 km

–3 –11.5 –19 –3

1000 BASE-LX-40 km

3 –2 –21 –3




Board Name

Access Service Type






Maximum (dBm)

Minimum (dBm)

1000 BASE-ZX-80 km

5 –2 –21 –3




5 0 –28 –9

LOG GE 2.125 Gbit/s multirate

–2.5 –9.5 –17 0 eSFP

1000 BASE-LX-10km

–3 –11.5 –19 –3

1000 BASE-LX-40km

0 –4.5 –20 –3

1000 BASE-ZX-80km

5 –2 –22 –3




5 0 –28 –9

LOM GE 2.125 Gbit/s multirate

–2.5 –9.5 –17 0 eSFP

1000 BASE-LX-10km

–3 –11.5 –19 –3

1000 BASE-LX-40km

0 –4.5 –20 –3

1000 BASE-ZX-80km

5 –2 –22 –3

FC 100/ FC 200/ FC 400/ FICON/ FICON 2G

FC 400 module-Multimode

–1 –9 –14 0

FC 400 module-Single-mode

–2 –8 –16 0




Board Name

Access Service Type






Maximum (dBm)

Minimum (dBm)

FC 100/ FICON /FC 200/ FICON 2G module-Multimode

–2.5 –9.5 –17 0

FC 100/ FICON /FC 200/ FICON 2G module-Single-mode

–3 –10 –18 0

GE/ FC 100/ FC 200




5 0 –28 –9

LQMD

FC200/ GE/ FC100/ FE/ FICON/ FICON 2G


–2.5 –9.5 –17 0 eSFP

GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI/ FICON

1000 BASE-LX-10 km

–3 –11.5 –19 –3

1000 BASE-LX-40 km

3 –2 –21 –3

1000 BASE-ZX-80 km

5 –2 –21 –3

STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ FE/ FICON 2G

I-16 –3 –10 –18 –3

S-16.1 0 –5 –18 0

L-16.1 3 –2 –27 –9

L-16.2 3 –2 –28 –9




Board Name

Access Service Type






Maximum (dBm)

Minimum (dBm)

GE/ FC100/ STM4/ ESCON/ STM1/ FE/ DVB-ASI



STM16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM4/ ESCON/ STM1/ DVB-ASI/ FE


5 0 –28 –9

LQMS FC200/ GE/ FC100/ FE/ FICON/ FICON 2G


–2.5 –9.5 –17 0 eSFP

GE/ FC100/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ FE/ DVB-ASI/ FICON

1000 BASE-LX-10 km

–3 –11.5 –19 –3

1000 BASE-LX-40 km

3 –2 –21 –3

1000 BASE-ZX-80 km

5 –2 –21 –3

STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ FE/ FICON 2G

I-16 –3 –10 –18 –3

S-16.1 0 –5 –18 0

L-16.1 3 –2 –27 –9

L-16.2 3 –2 –28 –9




Board Name

Access Service Type






Maximum (dBm)

Minimum (dBm)






5 0 –28 –9

LSX 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN/ STM-64/ OC-192/ OTU2/ FC1200a

10 Gbit/s multirate-10 km

–1 –6 –11 0.5 XFP


2 –1 –14 –1

10 Gbit/s single-rate-0.3 km

–1.3 –7.3 –7.5 –1


4 0 –24.0 –7

LSXL STM-256/ OC-768

Transponder 3 0 –5 3 -

LWX2 FC200/ GE/ FC100/ FE


–2.5 –9.5 –17 0 eSFP

STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ DVB-SDI/ FE/ FICON/ FICON 2G

I-16 –3 –10 –18 –3

S-16.1 0 –5 –18 0

L-16.2 3 –2 –28 –9




Board Name

Access Service Type






Maximum (dBm)

Minimum (dBm)






5 0 –28 –9

LWXD

FC200/ GE/ FC100/ FE/ FICON/ FICON 2G


–2.5 –9.5 –17 0 eSFP

STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ DVB-SDI/ FE/ FICON/ FICON 2G

I-16 –3 –10 –18 –3

S-16.1 0 –5 –18 0

L-16.2 3 –2 –28 –9







Board Name

Access Service Type






Maximum (dBm)

Minimum (dBm)



5 0 –28 –9

LWXS FC200/ GE/ FC100/ FE/ FICON/ FICON 2G


–2.5 –9.5 –17 0 eSFP

STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ DVB-SDI/ FEFICON/ FICON 2G

I-16 –3 –10 –18 –3

S-16.1 0 –5 –18 0

L-16.2 3 –2 –28 –9






5 0 –28 –9

TMX STM-16/ OC-48/ OTU1 (without

I-16 –3 –10 –18 –3 eSFP

S-16.1 0 –5 –18 0

L-16.1 3 –2 –27 –9




Board Name

Access Service Type






Maximum (dBm)

Minimum (dBm)

FEC) L-16.2 3 –2 –28 –9




3 0 –28 –9 eSFP DWDM

TBE FE 100 BASE-FX-1310 nm-40km

0 –5 –30 –10 eSFP

100 BASE-FX-1310 nm-2km

–14 –19 –30 –14

GE/ 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN


–2.5 –9.5 –17 0

I-16 –3 –11.5 –19 –3

S-16.1 0 –4.5 –20 –3

L-16.2 5 –2 –22 –3

10 Gbit/s multirate-10km

–1 –6 –11 0.5 XFP


2 –1 –14 –1


–1.3 –7.3 –7.5 –1


4 0 –24 –7

FE/ GE/ 10GE LAN/ 10GE WAN




5 0 –28 –9

TDG GE 2.125 Gbit/s multirate

–2.5 –9.5 –17 0 eSFP

1000 BASE-LX-10 km

–3 –11.5 –19 –3

1000 BASE-LX-40 km

3 –2 –21 –3




Board Name

Access Service Type






Maximum (dBm)

Minimum (dBm)

1000 BASE-ZX-80 km

5 –2 –21 –3




5 0 –28 –9

TDX 10GE LAN/ STM-64/ OC-192

10 Gbit/s multirate-10km

–1 –6 –11 0.5 XFP


2 –1 –14 –1


–1.3 –7.3 –7.5 –1


4 0 –24 –7

TQM STM-16/ STM-4/ STM-1/ OC-48/ OC-12/ OC-3/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ FE/ ESCON/ DVB-ASI/ FICON/ FICON 2G


–2.5 –9.5 –17 0 eSFP

1000 BASE-LX-10 km

–3 –11.5 –19 –3

1000 BASE-LX-40 km

3 –2 –21 –3

1000 BASE-ZX-80 km

5 –2 –21 –3


1.25 Gbit/s multirate)





Board Name

Access Service Type






Maximum (dBm)

Minimum (dBm)


2.5 Gbit/s multirate)

5 0 –28 –9

TQS STM-16/ OC-48/ OTU1

I-16 –3 –10 –18 –3 eSFP

S-16.1 0 –5 –18 0

L-16.1 3 –2 –27 –9

L-16.2 3 –2 –28 –9



a: Only TN12LSX supports FC1200 service.

D.1.2 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification on the WDM Side

The main wdm-side specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs), tributary boards and line boards include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module type.

Table D-1 Quick reference table for DWDM-side specifications of OTU boards

Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module





Maximum (dBm)

Minimum (dBm)

L4G OTU 5G 3400 ps/nm 2 –2 –25 –9

6400 ps/nm –1 –5 –25 –9

3400 ps/nm- tunable 4 0 –25 –9

LDGD STM-16/ 12800 ps/nm-PIN –4 –8 –18 0




Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module





Maximum (dBm)

Minimum (dBm)

OTU1 12800 ps/nm-APD –4 –8 –25 –9

6500 ps/nm-PIN 0 –5 –18 0

3200 ps/nm-2mW-APD 0 –5 –25 –9

12800 ps/nm- tunable 0 –4 –30 –9

LDGS STM-16/ OTU1

12800 ps/nm-PIN –1 –5 –18 0

12800 ps/nm-APD –1 –5 –25 –9

6500 ps/nm-PIN 3 –2 –18 0

3200 ps/nm-2mW-APD 3 –2 –25 –9

12800 ps/nm- tunable 3 –1 –30 –9

LOG GE 800 ps/nm 2 –3 –16 0

1600 ps/nm 4 0 –27 –9

1200 ps/nm-tunable-PIN

2 –3 –16 0

1200 ps/nm-tunable-APD

2 –3 –26 –9

4800 ps/nm-ODB-tunable

2 –3 –26 –8

800ps/nm-DRZ-tunable 2 –3 –16 0

LOM GE 800 ps/nm 2 –3 –16 0

1600 ps/nm 4 0 –27 –9

1200 ps/nm-tunable-PIN

2 –3 –16 0

1200 ps/nm-tunable-APD

2 –3 –26 –9

4800 ps/nm-ODB-tunable

2 –3 –26 –8


LQMD OTU1 12800 ps/nm-PIN –4 –8 –18 0

12800 ps/nm-APD –4 –8 –25 –9




Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module





Maximum (dBm)

Minimum (dBm)

6500 ps/nm-PIN 0 –5 –18 0

3200 ps/nm-2mW-APD 0 –5 –25 –9

12800 ps/nm-tunable 0 –4 –30 –9

LQMS OTU1 12800 ps/nm-PIN –1 –5 –18 0

12800 ps/nm-APD –1 –5 –25 –9

6500 ps/nm-PIN 3 –2 –18 0

3200 ps/nm-2mW-APD 3 –2 –25 –9

12800 ps/nm- tunable 3 –1 –30 –9

LSX OTU2/ OTU2v

800 ps/nm 2 –3 –16 0

1600 ps/nm 4 0 –26 –9

1200 ps/nm- tunable-PIN

2 –3 –16 0

1200 ps/nm- tunable-APD

2 –3 –26 –9

4800 ps/nm- ODB-tunable

2 –3 –26 –9

800 ps/nm-DRZ-tunable

2 –3 –16 0

LSXL STM-256/ OC-768

ODB-tunable –1 –4 –17 0

DRZ-tunable –1 –5 –17 0

LSXLR OTU3 ODB-tunable –1 –4 –17 0

DRZ-tunable –1 –5 –17 0

LSXR OTU2/ OTU2v

800 ps/nm 2 –3 –16 0

1600 ps/nm 4 0 –26 –9


2 –3 –16 0


2 –3 –26 –9


2 –3 –26 –9




Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module





Maximum (dBm)

Minimum (dBm)


LWX2 STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ DVB-SDI/ FEFICON/ FICON 2G

12800ps/nm-PINa –1 –5 –18 0

12800ps/nm-APDa –1 –5 –25 9

6500 ps/nm -PIN 3 –2 –18 0

3200 ps/nm -2mW-APD

3 –2 –25 –9

LWXD STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ DVB-SDI/ FEFICON/ FICON 2G

12800ps/nm-PINa –4 –8 –18 0

12800ps/nm-APDa –4 –8 –25 9

6500 ps/nm -PIN 0 –5 –18 0

3200 ps/nm -2mW-APD

0 –5 –25 –9

12800 ps/nm- tunable 0 –4 –30 –9

LWXS STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ DVB-SDI/ FEFICON/ FICON 2G

12800ps/nm-PINa –1 –5 –18 0

12800ps/nm-APDa –1 –5 –25 9

6500 ps/nm -PIN 3 –2 –18 0

3200 ps/nm -2mW-APD

3 –2 –25 –9

12800 ps/nm- tunable 3 –1 –30 –9

TMX STM-16/ OC-48/ OTU1 (without FEC)

800 ps/nm 2 –3 –16 0

1600 ps/nm 4 0 –27 –9


2 –3 –16 0


2 –3 –26 –9


2 –3 –26 –8




Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module





Maximum (dBm)

Minimum (dBm)


NS2 OTU2 800 ps/nm 2 –3 –16 0

1600 ps/nm 4 0 –27 –9


2 –3 –16 0


2 –3 –26 –9


2 –3 –26 –9



Table D-2 Quick reference table for CWDM-side specifications of OTU boards

Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module




Minimum Overload Point (dBm)Maximu

m (dBm)Minimum (dBm)

ECOM FE 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate

5 0 –19 –3

2.67 Gbit/s Multirate

5 0 –28 –9

L4G OTU.5G 3400 ps/nm 5 2.5 –25 –9

LDGD STM-16/ OTU1

1600 ps/nm-4mW

2 –0.5 –28 –9

LDGS STM-16/ OTU1

1600 ps/nm-4mW

5 2.5 –28 –9

LQMD OTU1 1600 ps/nm-4mW

2 –0.5 –28 –9

LQMS OTU1 1600 ps/nm-4mW

5 2.5 –28 –9




Board Name

Access Service Type

Optical Module




Minimum Overload Point (dBm)Maximu

m (dBm)Minimum (dBm)

LWX2 STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ DVB-SDI/ FEFICON/ FICON 2G

1600 ps/nm-4mW

5 2.5 –28 –9

LWXD STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ DVB-SDI/ FEFICON/ FICON 2G

1600 ps/nm-4mW

2 –0.5 –28 –9

LWXS STM-16/ FC200/ FC100/ GE/ STM-4/ ESCON/ STM-1/ DVB-ASI/ DVB-SDI/ FEFICON/ FICON 2G

1600 ps/nm-4mW

5 2.5 –28 –9

D.2 Optical Amplifying Unit SpecificationThe main specifications of the optical amplifying unit include the operating wavelength range, channel gain, nominal input power range, nominal output power range and maximum output power of a single wavelength.

Table D-1 Quick reference table for optical amplifying unit

Board name

Gain adjustable range (dB)

Nominal Channel gain (dB)

Input power range per channel (dBm)

Typical input power of a single wavelength (dBm)

40 channels

80 channels

40 channels

80 channels

OAU101 20 to 23 20 –32 to –16 –32 to –19 - -

23 to 29 26 –32 to –22 –32 to –25

29 to 31 31 –32 to –27 –32 to –30

OAU103 24 to 28 24 –32 to –20 –32 to –23 - -

28 to 30 29 –32 to –25 –32 to –28

30 to 36 36 –32 –32




Board name

Gain adjustable range (dB)

Nominal Channel gain (dB)

Input power range per channel (dBm)


40 channels

80 channels

40 channels

80 channels

OBU101 - 20 –32 to –20 –32 to –23 –20 –23

OBU103 - 23 –32 to –19 –32 to –22 –19 –22

OBU104 - 17 –32 to –17 –32 to –20 –17 –20

OBU205 - 23 –24 to –16 –24 to –16 –16 –19

Table D-2 Quick reference table for CRPC

Board name Channel gain (dB) Maximum pump power (dBm)

G.652 fiber LEAF fiber

CRPC ≥10 ≥12 29

Table D-3 Quick reference table for HBA

Board name

Channel gain (dB)


Nominal input power range (dBm)

Channel allocation (nm)

40 channels

10 channels

40 channels

10 channels

HBA 29 –19 –13 –19 to –3 1529 to 1561

Any two of the last 20 wavelengths are spaced at 200 GHz.




D.3 Other Unit SpecificationThe main specifications of other boards include the insertion loss values of each board.

Table D-1 Quick reference table for specifications of other boards

Board Name

Insertion Loss (dB)

MR2 IN-MOMI-OUT

≤1.0

Add/drop channel ≤1.5

MR4 IN-MOMI-OUT

≤1.5


MR8 IN-MOMI-OUT

≤3.5

Add/drop channel ≤4

CMR2 IN-MOMI-OUT

≤1.0


CMR4 IN-MOMI-OUT

≤1.0


DMR1 EIN-EMOEMI-EOUTWIN-WMOWMI-WOUT

≤0.8


SBM2 Add/drop channel ≤3

D40 ≤6.5

D40V ≤8a

FIU IN-TMRM-OUT

≤1.5

IN-TCRC-OUT

≤1




Board Name

Insertion Loss (dB)

ITL RE-OUTRO-OUT

<4

IN-TEIN-TO

<2.5

M40 ≤6.5

M40V ≤8a

DCP Transmit-end insertion loss Single mode ≤4

Multimode ≤4.5

Receive-end insertion loss Single mode ≤1.5

Multimode ≤2

OLP Transmit-end insertion loss Single mode ≤4

Multimode ≤4.5

Receive-end insertion loss Single mode ≤1.5

Multimode ≤2

SCS Wavelength dropping insertion loss Single mode ≤4

Multimode ≤4.5

Wavelength adding insertion loss Single mode ≤4

Multimode ≤4.5

RMU9 EXPI-OUT ≤8.5

AMxb-TOA ≤12.5a

ROA-OUT ≤1.5

ROAM Mxc-OUT ≤9a

IN-DM ≤7

EXPI-OUT ≤14a

IN-EXPO ≤3

WSD9 IN-DMxd

IN-EXPO≤8a

WSM9 AMxb-OUTEXPI-OUT

≤8a

WSMD4 AMxb-OUTIN-DMxd

≤8a




a: The value tested when the VOA attenuation is set to 0 dB.

b: AMx denotes AM1–AM8.

c: Mx denotes M1–M40.

d: DMx denotes DM1–DM8.

D.4 MON Interface Optical Split RatioSome boards of WDM equipment provide a MON interface. A small number of supervisory signals are split from the main-path signals and are output through MON for in-service performance monitoring of the optical signals.

Table D-8 lists the ratio of the optical power of signals at MON to that of the main-path signals of each type of board.

Table D-1 Ratio of the optical power of signals at MON to that of the main-path signals of each type of board

Board Name

Ratio of MON Interface to Received Signal in Main Path

Ratio of MON Interface to Transmitting Signal in Main Path

CRPC – "MON"/"SYS" = 1/99 (20dB)

D40 "MON"/"IN" = 10/90 (10dB) –

D40V "MON"/"IN" = 10/90 (10dB) –

FIU – "MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20dB)

HBA – "MON"/"OUT" = 1/999 (30dB)

ITL – "MON"/"OUT" = 10/90 (10dB)

M40 – "MON"/"OUT" = 10/90 (10dB)

M40V – "MON"/"OUT" = 10/90 (10dB)

OAU1 – "MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20dB)

OBU1 – "MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20dB)

OBU2 – "MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20dB)

RMU9 "MONI"/"EXPI" = 3/97 (15dB) "MONO"/"TOA" = 3/97 (15dB)

WSD9 "MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15dB) "MONO"/"EXPO" = 3/97 (15dB)

WSM9 "MONI"/"EXPI" = 3/97 (15dB) "MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15dB)

WSMD4 "MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15dB) "MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15dB)




D.5 Basic Functions of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards

The main functions and features supported by OTUs, tributary boards and line boards are wavelength conversion, cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.

For detailed functions and features, refer to Table D-9.

Table D-1 Basic functions of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards

Board name


ESC function

ALS function

OTN function

FEC encoding

WDM specification

Optical moduleFE

CAFEC

DWDM

CWDM

ECOM x x x x x x x √ eSFP

L4G √ √ √ √ √ x √ √ eSFP

LDGD √ √ √ √ √ x √ √ eSFP

LDGS √ √ √ √ √ x √ √ eSFP

LOG √ √ √ √ √ √ √ x eSFP

LOM √ √ √ √ √ √ √ x eSFP

LQMD √ √ √ √ √ x √ √ eSFP

LQMS √ √ √ √ √ x √ √ eSFP

LSX √ √ √ √ √ √ √ x XFP

LSXL √ √ √ √ √ √ √ x x

LSXLR √ √ √ √ √ √ √ x x

LSXR √ √ √ √ √ √ √ x XFP

LWX2 √ √ √ x x x √ √ eSFP

LWXD √ √ √ x x x √ √ eSFP

LWXS √ √ √ x x x √ √ eSFP

NS2 √ √ √ √ √ √ √ x x

TBE x x √ x x x x x eSFPXFP

TDG x x √ x x x x x eSFP

TDX x x √ x x x x x eSFP

TMX √ √ √ √ √ √ √ x eSFP

TQM x x √ x x x x x eSFP




Board name


ESC function

ALS function

OTN function

FEC encoding

WDM specification

Optical moduleFE

CAFEC

DWDM

CWDM

TQS x √ √ √ √ x x x eSFP

NOTE: "√" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "x" indicates that the OTU does not support the functionThe SCC board can automatically detect that the eSFP and XFP modules are installed and online. The following information about the modules can be obtained through a query on the T2000: VendorName, BarCode, and type of optical interface.

D.6 Loopback Function of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards

The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support different loopback.

Table D-1 Loopback function of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards

Board Name

Client-Side Inloop

Client-Side Outloop

WDM-Side Inloop

WDM-Side Outloop

ECOM √ √ √ x

L4G √ √ √ √

LDGD √ √ √ √

LDGS √ √ √ √

LOG √ √ √ √

LOM √ √ √ √

LQMD √ √ √ √

LQMS √ √ √ √

LSX √ √ √ √

LSXL x x √ √

LSXLR x x x x

LSXR x x x x

LWX2 √ √ √ √

LWXD √ √ √ √

LWXS √ √ √ √

TMX √ √ √ √

NS2a x x √ √




TDG √ √ x x

TDX √ √ x x

TQM √ √ x x

TQS √ √ x x

NOTE: "√" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "x" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.

a: NS2 also supports path loopback.

Table D-2 Loop function of the Ethernet boards

Board Name Interface Loop Mode

L4G Client side MAC inloop

PHY outloop

WDM side Inloop

Outloop

TBE 10GE optical interface MAC inloop

MAC outloop

PHY inloop

PHY outloop

GE optical interface MAC inloop

PHY inloop

GE electric interface MAC inloop

PHY inloop

PHY outloop

FE optical interface MAC inloop

PHY inloop

FE electric interface MAC inloop

PHY inloop

PHY outloop




D.7 Protection mode of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards

The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support protection function.

For detailed protection mode, refer to Table D-12.

Table D-1 Protection mode of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards

Board name

Protection mode

SW SNCP

VLAN SNCP

ODUk SNCP

Client-side 1+1 protection

Intra-OTU 1+1 protection

OWSP protection

ODUk SPRing protection

BPS protection

ECOM x x x x x x x x

L4G √ √ x √ √ √ x x

LDGD √ x x √ √ √ x x

LDGS √ x x √ x √ x x

LOG √ √ √ √ √ √ x x

LOM x x x √ √ √ x x

LQMD √ x x √ √ √ x x

LQMS √ x x √ x √ x x

LSX x x x √ √ √ x x

LSXL x x x √ √ √ x x

LSXLR x x x x x x x x

LSXR x x x x x x x x

LWX2 x x x √ x √ x x

LWXD x x x √ √ √ x x

LWXS x x x √ x √ x x

NS2 x x √ x x √ √ x

TBE √ √ x √ √ x x √

TDG √ x √ √ x x √ x

TDX x x √ √ x x √ x

TMX x x x √ √ √ √ x

TQM √ x √ √ x x √ x

TQS x x √ √ x x √ x




Board name

Protection mode

SW SNCP

VLAN SNCP

ODUk SNCP

Client-side 1+1 protection

Intra-OTU 1+1 protection

OWSP protection

ODUk SPRing protection

BPS protection

NOTE: "√" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "x" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.




D.8 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards

The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support electrical cross-connection.

For detailed electrical cross-connection functions, refer to Table D-13.

Table D-1 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards

Board name

Electrical cross-connection

Integrated cross-connection

Distributed cross-connection

ECOM 1 x GE 1 x GE

L4G 4 x GE 4 x GE

LOG 8 x GE 8 x GE

LOM x x

LDGD 2 x GE 2 x GE

LDGS 2 x GE 2 x GE

LQMD x 4 x Any

LQMS x 4 x Any

LSX x x

LSXL x x

LSXLR x x

LSXR x x

LWX2 x x

LWXD x x

LWXS x x

NS2 4 x ODU1 4 x ODU1

TBE 8 x GE 8 x GE

TDG 2 x GE/1 x ODU1 2 x GE/1 x ODU1

TDX 8 x ODU1 8 x ODU1

TMX x x

TQM 1 x ODU1 4 x Any/1 x ODU1

TQS 4 x ODU1 4 x ODU1




Board name

Electrical cross-connection

Integrated cross-connection

Distributed cross-connection

NOTE: "x" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.




E Power Consumption, Weight and Valid Slots of Boards

This chapter describes the power consumption, weight and valid slots of the boards used in the OptiX OSN 6800 system.

The power consumption, weight and valid slots of the OptiX OSN 6800 boards are shown in Table E-1. The values listed in the following table indicate the power consumption of the boards when they normally work at 25 and 55 .

Table E-1 Power consumption, weight and valid slots of the OptiX OSN 6800 boards


Maximum Power Consumption at 25 (W)


Weight (kg)

Number of Occupied Slots

Valid Slots

TN11ACS

- 0.2 0.3 0.8 1 IU1–IU17

TN11AUX

- 14.0 15.4 0.5 1 IU21

TN11CMR2

- 0.2 0.3 0.8 1 IU1–IU17

TN11CMR4

- 0.2 0.3 0.9 1 IU1–IU17

TN11CRPC

- 110.0 121.0 4.0 - –

TN11D40

- 20.0 22.0 2.2 3 IU1–IU15

TN11D40V

- 38.5 42.3 2.3 3 IU1–IU15

TN11DCP

- 6.8 7.5 1.0 1 IU1–IU17







Weight (kg)


Valid Slots

TN11DCU

- 0.5 0.5 1.5 1 IU1–IU17

TN11DMR1

- 0.2 0.3 0.7 1 IU1–IU17

TN11ECOM

- 19.6 21.6 1.01 1 IU1–IU8, IU11–IU16

TN11FIU/TN12FIU

- 4.2 4.6 1.0 1 IU1–IU17

TN11HBA

- 47.0 75.0 3 3 IU2–IU16

TN11ITL

- 0.2 0.3 1.2 1 IU1–IU17

TN11L4G

NRZ-fixed(D)(5G) (3400 ps/nm6400 ps/nm)

50.0 55.0 1.4 1 IU1–IU8, IU11–IU16

NRZ-fixed(C)(5G) (3400 ps/nm)

45.0 50.0

NRZ-tunable(5G) (3400 ps/nm)

53.0 58.0

TN11LDGD

Fixed(2.5G) (12800 ps/nm-PIN12800 ps/nm-APD6500 ps/nm-PIN3200 ps/nm-2mW-APD)

34.0 37.4 1.4 1 IU1–IU8, IU11–IU16


36.0 39.6

TN11LDGS


32.0 35.2 1.2 1 IU1–IU8, IU11–IU16







Weight (kg)


Valid Slots

Tunable(2.5G)(12800 ps/nm)

34.0 37.4

TN11LOG

NRZ-fixed(10G) (800 ps/nm-40 channels fixed1600 ps/nm-40 channels fixed

49.5 54.5 1.6 1 IU1–IU8, IU11–IU16


50.0 55.0


51.2 56.1


55.0 60.5

TN11LOM


92.7 101.7 2.32 2 IU1–IU8, IU11–IU16


92.9 101.9

DRZ-tunable (10G) (800 ps/nm-80 channels tunable)

93.4 102.7


98.2 108.0

TN11LQMD


54.9 60.4 1.4 1 IU1–IU8, IU11–IU16







Weight (kg)


Valid Slots


59.1 65.1

TN11LQMS


53.2 58.5 1.3 1 IU1–IU8, IU11–IU16

Tunable(2.5G)(12800 ps/nm)

57.8 63.6

TN11LSX

NRZ-fixed(10G) (800 ps/nm-40 channels fixed1600 ps/nm-40 channels fixed)

47.7 52.3 1.3 1 IU1–IU17


47.9 52.5


49.7 52.7


52.7 55.7

TN12LSX


32.0 38.4 1.4 1 IU1–IU17

NRZ-tunable (10G) (1200 ps/nm-PIN-80 channels tunable1200 ps/nm-APD-80 channels tunable)

32.2 38.6


34.0 40.8







Weight (kg)


Valid Slots


36.0 43.2

TN11LSXL

DRZ-tunable(40G) (Transponder)

103.0 110.0 5.0 4 IU1–IU14

ODB-tunable(40G) (Transponder)

98.0 105.0

TN11LSXLR

DRZ-tunable(40G) (Transponder)

87.0 90.0 3.05 4 IU1–IU14

ODB-tunable(40G) (Transponder)

82.0 85.0

TN11LSXR


34.8 38.3 1.2 1 IU1–IU17


35.0 38.5


36.8 40.3


39.8 43.3

TN11LWX2

- 38.5 42.4 1.3 1 IU1–IU17

TN11LWXD

- 35.8 39.4 1.2 1 IU1–IU17

TN11LWXS

- 33.9 37.3 1.1 1 IU1–IU17

TN11M40

- 20.0 22.0 2.2 3 IU1–IU15

TN11M40V

- 38.5 42.3 2.3 3 IU1–IU15







Weight (kg)


Valid Slots

TN11MB2

- 0.2 0.3 0.9 1 IU1–IU17

TN11MCA4

- 16.0 17.6 1.9 2 IU1–IU16

TN11MCA8

- 17.0 18.7 1.9 2 IU1–IU16

TN11MR2

- 0.2 0.3 0.9 1 IU1–IU17

TN11MR4

- 0.2 0.3 0.9 1 IU1–IU17

TN11MR8

- 0.2 0.3 1.0 2 IU1–IU16

TN11NS2


38.0 41.8 1.2 1 IU1–IU8, IU11–IU16


39.0 42.9

DRZ-tunable (10G) (800 ps/nm-80 channels tunable)

41.0 45.1


44.0 48.4

TN11OAU1

- 33.0 36.3 1.8 2 IU2–IU17

TN11OBU101/ TN11OBU104

- 16.0 17.6 1.3 1 IU1–IU17

TN11OBU103

- 18.0 19.8 1.3 1 IU1–IU17

TN11OBU2

- 35.0 38.5 1.9 2 IU2–IU17







Weight (kg)


Valid Slots

TN11OLP

- 6.0 6.6 0.9 1 IU1–IU17

TN11PIU

- 35 35 0.5 1 IU19, IU20

TN11RMU9

- 11.0 12.1 1.1 1 IU1–IU17

TN11ROAM

- 66.0 72.6 3.2 3 IU1–IU15

TN11SBM2

- 0.2 0.3 0.82 1 IU1–IU17

TN11SC1

- 13.5 14.9 1.0 1 IU1–IU17

TN11SC2

- 13.5 14.9 1.0 1 IU1–IU17

TN11SCC

- 30.0 33.0 1.2 1 IU17, IU18

TN11SCS

- 0.2 0.3 0.8 1 IU1–IU17

TN11TBE

- 40.7 44.8 1.4 1 IU1–IU8, IU11–IU16

TN11TDG

- 30.0 33.0 1.1 1 IU1–IU8, IU11–IU16

TN11TDX

- 78.0 80.0 1.25 1 IU1–IU8, IU11–IU16

TN11TMX


40.3 44.3 1.4 1 IU1–IU17


42.1 46.4







Weight (kg)


Valid Slots


42.4 46.6


46.5 51.2

TN11TQM

- 49.1 54.1 1.2 1 IU1–IU8, IU11–IU16

TN11TQS

- 43.0 47.3 1.2 1 IU1–IU8, IU11–IU16

TN11TSXL

- 65 72 2.5 2 IU2–IU8, IU12–IU16

TN11VA1/ TN12VA1

- 6.5 7.2 1.0 1 IU1–IU17

TN11VA4/ TN12VA4

- 8.5 9.4 1.0 1 IU1–IU17

TN11WMU

- 12.0 15.0 1.02 1 IU1–IU17

TN11WSD9

- 17.0 18.7 2.2 2 IU1–IU16

TN12WSD9

- 30.0 35.0 2.5 2 IU1–IU16

TN13WSD9

- 30.0 35.0 2.5 3 IU1–IU15

TN11WSM9

- 17.0 18.7 2.2 2 IU1–IU16

TN12WSM9

- 30.0 35.0 2.5 2 IU1–IU16

TN13WSM9

- 30.0 35.0 2.5 3 IU1–IU15







Weight (kg)


Valid Slots

TN11WSMD4

- 17.0 18.7 3.2 2 IU1–IU15

TN11XCS

- 20.0 22.0 1.0 1 IU9, IU10




F Glossary

This document defines the following terms:

Numerics 3R Regenerating, Reshaping and Retiming.

A

Alarm cascading The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets.

Alarm A visible or an audible indication to notify the person concerned that a failure or an emergency has occurred. See also Event.

ALC Automatic Level Control. The technique supports the adjustment of optical power aimed to restrain the output power to be inferior on the downstream and keep the optical power to be within a certain working range.

ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode. A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells. It is asynchronous in the sense that the recurrence of cells containing information from an individual user is not necessarily periodic. It is a protocol within the OSI layer 1. An ATM cell consists of a 5 octet header followed by 48 octets of data.

Attenuation Reduction of signal magnitude or signal loss, usually expressed in decibels.

Attenuator A passive component that attenuates an electrical or optical signal.

B

Back up A method to copy the important data into a backing storage in case that the original is damaged or corrupted.

Backplane A PCB circuit board in the subrack, which is connected with all the boards in position.

Bandwidth Information-carrying capacity of a communication channel. Analog bandwidth is the range of signal frequencies that can be transmitted by a communication channel or network.




Numerics Bit Error Rate The number of coding violations detected in a unit of time, usually one

second. Bit error rate (BER) is calculated with this formula: BER = error bits received/total bits sent

Bit error An error occurs to some bits in the digital code stream after being received, judged, and regenerated, thus damaging the quality of the transmitted information.

Broadcast The act of sending a frame addressed to all stations on the network

C

Chain network One type of network that all network nodes are connected one after one to be in series.

CWDM Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing. The technology for transmitting signals at multiple wavelengths through the same fiber with wide spacing between optical channels. Typical spacing is several nanometers or more.

D

DCF Dispersion Compensation Fiber. A kind of fiber which uses negative dispersion to compensate for the positive dispersion of transmitting fiber to maintain the original shape of the signal pulse.

DCM Dispersion Compensation Module. A module, which contains dispersion compensation fibers to compensate for the positive dispersion of transmitting fiber.

DCN Data Communication Network. A communication network within a TMN or between TMNs which supports the data communication function (DCF).

Demultiplexing A process applied to a multiplex signal for recovering signals combined within it and for restoring the distinct individual channels of the signals.

Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing

The higher capacity version of WDM, which is a means of increasing the capacity of fiber-optic data transmission systems through the multiplexing of multiple wavelengths of light. Commercially available DWDM systems support the multiplexing of from 8 to 40 wavelengths of light.

E

ECC Embedded Control Channel. An ECC provides a logical operations channel between SDH NEs, utilizing a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer.

EDFA Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier. The optical amplifier that its fiber doped with the rare earth element erbium, which can amplify at 1530 to 1610 nm when the optical amplifier is pumped by an external light source.

ESCON Enterprise System Connection. A path protocol which connects the host with various control units in a storage system. It is a serial bit stream transmission protocol. The transmission rate is 200 Mbit/s.




Numerics Ethernet A data link level protocol comprising the OSI model's bottom two layers. It is a

broadcast networking technology that can use several different physical media, including twisted pair cable and coaxial cable. Ethernet usually uses CSMA/CD. TCP/IP is commonly used with Ethernet networks.

EVPL Ethernet Virtual Private Line. An EVPL service is a service that is both a line service and a virtual private service.

Eye pattern A graphic presentation formed by the superimposition of the waveforms of all possible pulse sequences.

F

FC Fiber Channel. A standard of data storage network for transmitting signals at 100 Mbit/s to 4.25Gbit/s over fiber or (at slow speeds) copper.

FICON Fiber Connect. A new generation connection protocol which connects the host with various control units. It carries single byte command protocol through the physical path of fiber channel, and provides higher rate and better performance than ESCON.

Frame A cyclic set of consecutive time slots in which the relative position of each time slot can be identified.

G

Gain The ratio between the optical power from the input optical interface of the optical amplifier and the optical power from the output optical interface of the jumper fiber, which expressed in dB.

Grooming Consolidating or segregating traffic for efficiency.

H

History alarms Alarms that have been cleared and acknowledged.

I

IP over DCC The IP Over DCC follows TCP/IP telecommunications standards and controls the remote NEs through the Internet. The IP Over DCC means that the IP over DCC uses overhead DCC byte (the default is D1-D3) for communication.

IPA Intelligent Power Adjustment. The technology that the system reduces the optical power of all the amplifiers in an adjacent regeneration section in the upstream to a safety level if the system detects the loss of optical signals on the link. The loss of optical signals may due to the fiber is broken, the performance of equipments trend to be inferior or the connector is not plugged well. Thus, the maintenance engineers are not hurt by the laser being sent out from the slice of broken fiber.




Numerics M

MAN Metropolitan Area Network. An IEEE-approved network that supports high speeds over a metropolitan area.

Mapping A procedure by which tributaries are adapted into virtual containers at the boundary of an SDH network.

Multiplexer An equipment which combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number of aggregate bearer channels, the relationship between the tributary and aggregate channels being fixed.

Multiplexing A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher order path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex section.

O

ONE Optical Network Element. A stand-alone physical entity in an optical transmission network that supports at least network element functions.

OSC Optical Supervisory Channel. A technology realizes communication among nodes in optical transmission network and transmits the monitoring data in a certain channel (the wavelength of the working channel for it is 1510 nm and that of the corresponding protection one is 1625 nm).

OSNR Optical Signal-to-Noise Ratio. Ratio of the optical power of the transmitted optical signal to the noise on the received signal.

P

Path protection The working principle of path protection: When the system works in path protection mode, the PDH path uses the dual-fed and signal selection mode. Through the tributary unit and cross-connect unit, the tributary signal is sent simultaneously to the east and west lines. Meanwhile, the cross-connect matrix sends the signal dually sent from the opposite end to the tributary board through the active and standby buses, and the hardware of the tributary board automatically and selectively receive the signal from the two groups of buses automatically according to the AIS number of the lower order path.

Paired slots A pair of slots whose overhead can be processed by the bus on the backplane. For the two boards in the paired slots, the inter-board cross-connection can be directly configured, and the cross-connect grooming of services can be realized without the cross-connect board.

Performance threshold

Performance events usually have upper and lower thresholds. When the performance event count value exceeds the upper threshold, a performance threshold-crossing event is generated; when the performance event count value is below the upper threshold for a period of time, the performance threshold-crossing event is ended. In this way, performance jitter caused by some sudden events can be shielded.

Polarization dependence loss

The maximum variation of loss result from a variation of the state of polarization of the input signal at nominal operating conditions.




Numerics

R

Receiver overload Receiver overload is the maximum acceptable value of the received average power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10–10 BER.


Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-12 BER.

Ring network One type of network that all network nodes are connected one after one to be a cycle.

S

SAN Storage Area Network. A dedicated high-speed data storage network which interconnects multiple independent storage systems with multiple servers through fiber path switch or other switch equipment.

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy. A hierarchical set of digital transport structures, standardized for the transport of suitably adapted payloads over physical transmission networks.

Simple Network Management Protocol

An IETF protocol for monitoring and managing systems and devices in a network. The data being monitored and managed is defined by a Management Information Base (MIB). The functions supported by the protocol are the request and retrieval of data, the setting or writing of data, and traps that signal the occurrence of events.

Small Form-Factor Pluggable

A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers. The devices are designed for use with small form factor (SFF) connectors, and offer high speed and physical compactness, and are hot-swappable. SFP transceivers are expected to perform at data speeds of up to five gigabits per second (5 Gbit/s), and possibly higher. Because SFP modules can be easily interchanged, electro-optical or fiber optic networks can be upgraded and maintained more conveniently than has been the case with traditional soldered-in modules. Rather than replacing an entire circuit board containing several soldered-in modules, a single module can be removed and replaced for repair or upgrading. This can result in a substantial cost savings, both in maintenance and in upgrading efforts.

T

T2000 The T2000 is a subnet management system (SNMS). In the telecommunication management network architecture, the T2000 is located between the NE level and network level, which can supports all NE level functions and part of the network level management functions. See also NM.

TCM Tandem Connection Monitor. In the SDH transport hierarchy, the TCM is located between the AU/TU management layer and HP/LP layer. It uses the N1/N2 byte of POH overhead to monitor the quality of the transport channels on a transmission section (TCM section).




Numerics TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. Common name for the suite

of protocols developed to support the construction of worldwide internetworks.

TMN Telecommunications Management Network. The entity which provides the means used to transport and process information related to management functions for the telecommunications network.

V

VLAN Virtual local area network. A subset of the active topology of a Bridged Local Area Network. Associated with each VLAN is a VLAN Identifier (VID).

VOA Variable Optical Attenuator. An attenuator in which the attenuation can be varied.

W

Wavelength Division Multiplexing

A means of increasing the capacity of fiber-optic data transmission systems through the multiplexing of multiple wavelengths of light. WDM systems support the multiplexing of as many as four wavelengths.

WDM Wavelength-Division Multiplexing. WDM technology utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in a single fiber.

Working path A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled working.




G Acronyms and Abbreviations

A

AFEC Advanced Forward Error Correction

AIS Alarm Indication Signal

ALC Automatic Level Control

ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown

APE Automatic Power Equilibrium

APS Automatic Protection Switch

ASON Automatic Switched Optical Network

B

BER Bit Error Ratio

C

CMI Coded Mark Inversion

CRZ Chirped Return to Zero

CWDM Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplex

D

DCC Data Communication Channel

DCF Dispersion Compensation Fiber

DCM Dispersion Compensation Module

DCN Data Communication Network

DSCR Dispersion Slope Compensation Rate




DWDM Dense Wave Division Multiplexer

E

ECC Embedded Control Channel

EDFA Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier

EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility

EPL Ethernet Private Line

ESCON Enterprise Systems Connection

eSFP Enhanced Small Form-Factor Pluggable

ETSI European Telecommunication Standards Institute

EVPL Ethernet Virtual Private Line

F

FEC Forward Error Correction

FWM Four-Wave Mixing

G

GE Gigabit Ethernet

I

ID Identity

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers

IP Internet Protocol

IPA Intelligent Power Adjustment

ITU-T International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Sector

L

LAG Link Aggregation Group

LAN Local Area Network

LCN Local Communication Network

LCT Local Craft Terminal

LOF Loss Of Frame

LOS Loss Of Signal




N

NE Network Element

NRZ Non Return to Zero

O

OA Optical Amplifier

OADM Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer

OD Optical Demultiplexing

ODU Optical Channel Data Unit

OLA Optical Line Amplifier

OM Optical Multiplexing

OMS Optical Multiplex Section

OSC Optical Supervisory Channel

OSN Optical Switch Node

OSNR Optical Signal-to-noise Ratio

OTM Optical Terminal Multiplexer

OTN Optical Transmission Network

OTS Optical Transmission Section

OTU Optical Transponder Unit

Q

QA Q Adaptation

QoS Quality of Service

QinQ 802.1Q in 802.1Q

R

ROADM Reconfiguration Optical Add/drop Multiplexer

S

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SNCP Subnetwork Connection Protection

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol




SONET Synchronous Optical Network

TMN Telecommunications Management Network

V

VOA Variable Optical Attenuator

W

WDM Wavelength Division Multiplex

Copyright©2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

The information contained in this document is for reference purpose only, and is subject to change or withdrawal according to specific customer requirements and

conditions.


Documents

OptiX OSN 6800 Hardware Description (V100R003)